Operation Commands, Vol. 1 Ver. 08-03 compatible

GR4000 Software Manual

Operation Commands, Vol. 1Ver. 08-03 compatible

520-10-010-30X

Relevant program productsThis manual describes models GR4000-80E, GR4000-160E and GR4000-320E. It furthermore describes the functions of software ver. 08-03 common to each model of GR4000. Functions supported by basic software OS-R and various optional licenses are also described.

Caution when exportingThe necessary procedures are to be adopted when exporting this product after first confirming the regulations of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law, U.S. export control related regulations, etc.If any questions remain, please consult with our sales department.

TrademarksEthernet is the product name of the Xerox Corp.HIP Open View is the product name of Hewlett-Packard Company in the U.S. and other countries.Microsoft is the registered trademark of the Microsoft Corp. in the U.S. and other countries.Microsoft Internet Explorer is the product name of the Microsoft Corp. in the U.S. and other countries.MS-DOS is the registered trademark of the Microsoft Corp. in the U.S. and other countries.Netscape Navigator is the registered trademark of the Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.Solaris is the trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries.UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S. and other countries licensed exclusively by X/Open Company Limited.Windows is the registered trademark of the Microsoft Corp. in the U.S. and other countries.Ethernet is the product name of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.Other company names and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Thoroughly read and store this manualRead the and thoroughly understand safety-related explanations before using this product. Keep the manual in a location close at hand for easy reference.

NoteThe content of this manual may be modified at any time for improvement without notice.

Radio wave interferenceThis System is a Class A information technology equipment in compliance with the standards of the Voluntary Control Council (VCCI) for Interference by Information Technology Equipment. It may cause radio wave interference if used in the household environment and it may be necessary in such case for the user to devise appropriate countermeasures.

Control of high harmonic emissionsProducts compatible with high harmonic guidelinesCompatible devices:HN-9544-R80EM (GR4K-80EM)HN-9544-R160EM (GR4K-160EM)HN-9544-R320ESB (GR4K-320EB)

Issue datesJune 2003 (1st edition) 520-10-010XMay 2004 (4th edition) 520-10-010-30X

CopyrightAll Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, Hitachi, Ltd.

Revision history[ Ver. 08-03 ]

Table Revision history

Simple spelling errors, omissions, etc., are corrected without noting.

[ Ver. 08-02 ]


[ Ver. 08-01 ]


Chapter, section, item, title Addition or revision

6 Software Management • The display content list using a show version command was modified.

10 System Management • The ttcp command was added.

11 PRU/NIF Management • The Ethernet NIF information display using the show nif command was modified.• The Ethernet Line summary information display using the show nif command was

modified.

21 Ethernet • An auto_negotiation parameter-specified enable value for each NIF type using a test interface command was added.

• Part of the test interface command message line was added.• Part of the test interface command cautions was added and modified.• Part of the display contents of the execution result in line tests (10GBASE-R and

10GBASE-W) using a no test interface command was modified.

22 Link aggregation • This chapter was added.


Flow Designation • This chapter was added.


Software Management • Part of the synchronize command cautions was added.

MC Maintenance • The MC information display examples using the show mc command were modified.

System Management • The show system command output information display examples and content were modified.

• The clear control-counter command function explanation and cautions were modified.

• The show power-supply command execution examples and addition of cautions were modified.

PRU/NIF Management • The Ethernet line summary information display using the show nif command was modified.

Dump Information • The dump file display commands were added.

Duplex Management • The close standby command cautions were added.• The set mode command cautions were added.

Ethernet • The description of the show interfaces command required for Tag-VLAN line support was modified.

• The show interfaces command execution result display examples and content were modified.

• The test interfaces command cautions were modified.• The no test interfaces command execution result display examples were modified.• Commands along with the addition of new housing and PK were changed.

Preface

Intended products and software versionsThis manual describes models GR4000-80E, GR4000-160E and GR4000-320E. It furthermore describes the functions of software ver. 08-03 common to each model of GR4000. Functions supported by basic software OS-R and various optional licenses are also described.

Please read the manual well and thoroughly understand the instructions and cautions contained herein before operating the device. Keep the manual in a location close at hand for easy reference when necessary.

The functions described in this manual refer to basic software OS-R unless specifically indicated otherwise. Functions supported by various optional licenses are labeled as indicated below.

[OP-BGP] :Functions supported by option license OP-BGP

[OP-ISIS] :Functions supported by option license OP-ISIS

[OP-MLT] :Functions supported by option license OP-MLT

Intended usersApplicable users are system managers who develop and operate network systems using GR4000.

In addition, an understanding of the following is assumed.

• Basic knowledge of network system management

Acquisition of this manualPlease contact our sales department regarding the purchase of this manual. The content of the manual is also posted on the URL indicated below, which you are also encouraged to use.

http://www.hitachi.co.jp/network

i

GR4000 manuals

ii

Sequence of the GR4000 manual perusalManuals to be referenced according to the flow of tasks from installation and setup to daily operations are indicated below.

iii

Related publications• Job Management Partner 1 / Consolidated Management 2 / Network Element Manager for

GR Series (3020-3-G05(E))

Differences in configuration manuals between the GR2000, GR4000 and GS4000 series

There are differences in the manuals relating to configuration between the GR2000, GR4000 and GS4000 series. This is due to differences that exist between the user interface support menus of the GR2000, GR4000 and GS4000 series. The differences in the support menus of each series are as indicated below.Table Differences in support menu by series

< Legend > Y: supported, N: not supported

The Configuration Definition Guides of each manual series are as indicated below. Manuals with the same title included in the various series indicate that they are manuals of the same format user interface.[GR2000 manuals]

CLI type 1 Hierarchical Input Format

"Configuration Settings CLI -CLI type 1 Hierarchical Input Format-"

"Configuration Commands CLI -CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format- Vol.1, Vol.2"

Applicable product User interface

CLI type 1 hierarchical input format CLI type 1 CLI type 2

GR2000 series Y Y Y

GR4000 series Y Y N

GS4000 series Y N N

iv

CLI type 1

"Configuration Commands CLI -CLI Type 1- Vol.1, Vol.2"

CLI type 2

"Configuration Settings Universal CLI -CLI Type 2-"

"Configuration Commands Universal CLI -CLI Type 2-"[GR4000 manuals]

CLI type 1 Hierarchical Input Format

"Configuration Settings CLI -CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format-"


CLI type 1

"Configuration Commands CLI -CLI Type 1- Vol.1, Vol.2"[GS4000 manuals]

CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format

"Configuration Settings CLI -CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format-"


Conventions: abbreviations ABR Available Bit RateAC Access ConcentratorACK ACKnowledgeADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber LineALG Application Level GatewayANSI American National Standards InstituteARP Address Resolution ProtocolAS Autonomous SystemATM Asynchronous Transfer ModeAUX AuxiliaryBGP Border Gateway ProtocolBGP4 Border Gateway Protocol - version 4BGP4+ Multiprotocol Extensions for Border Gateway Protocol - version 4bit/s bits per second, usually abbreviated bps.BPDU Bridge Protocol Data UnitBRI Basic Rate InterfaceCBR Constant Bit RateCIDR Classless Inter-Domain RoutingCIR Committed Information RateCLNP ConnectionLess Network ProtocolCLNS ConnectionLess Network SystemCONS Connection Oriented Network SystemCP multi layer Control ProcessorCRC Cyclic Redundancy CheckCSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision DetectionCSNP Complete Sequence Numbers PDUDA Destination AddressDCE Data Circuit terminating EquipmentDHCP Dynamic Host Configuration ProtocolDiff-serv Differentiated ServicesDIS Draft International Standard/Designated Intermediate SystemDLCI Data Link Connection IdentifierDNS Domain Name SystemDR Designated Router

v

DSAP Destination Service Access PointDSCP Differentiated Services Code PointDTE Data Terminal EquipmentDVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing ProtocolE-Mail Electronic MailES End SystemFCS Frame Check SequenceFDB Filtering DataBaseFR Frame RelayFTTH Fiber To The HomeGBIC GigaBit Interface ConverterGFR Guaranteed Frame RateHDLC High level Data Link ControlHMAC Keyed-Hashing for Message AuthenticationIANA Internet Assigned Numbers AuthorityICMP Internet Control Message ProtocolICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol version 6ID IdentifierIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionIEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.IETF the Internet Engineering Task ForceIGMP Internet Group Management ProtocolIIH IS-IS HelloIP Internet ProtocolIPv4 Internet Protocol version 4IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6IPX Internetwork Packet ExchangeIS Intermediate SystemIS-IS Information technology - Telecommunications and Information exchange between systems - Intermediate system to Intermediate system Intra-Domain routeing information exchange protocol for use in conjunction with the Protocol for providing the Connectionless-mode Network Service (ISO 8473) ISDN Integrated Services Digital NetworkISO International Organization for StandardizationISP Internet Service ProviderLAN Local Area NetworkLCP Link Control ProtocolLED Light Emitting DiodeLLC Logical Link ControlLLQ+3WFQ Low Latency Queueing + 3 Weighted Fair QueueingLSP Label Switched PathLSP Link State PDULSR Label Switched RouterMAC Media Access ControlMC Memory CardMD5 Message Digest 5MDI Medium Dependent InterfaceMDI-X Medium Dependent Interface crossoverMIB Management Information BaseMPLS Multi-Protocol Label SwitchingMRU Maximum Receive UnitMTU Maximum Transfer UnitNAT Network Address TranslationNDP Neighbor Discovery ProtocolNET Network Entity TitleNIF Network Interface boardNLA ID Next-Level Aggregation IdentifierNSAP Network Service Access Point

vi

NSSA Not So Stubby AreaNTP Network Time ProtocolOSI Open Systems InterconnectionOSPF Open Shortest Path FirstOUI Organizationally Unique IdentifierPC Personal ComputerPCI Protocol Control InformationPDU Protocol Data UnitPICS Protocol Implementation Conformance StatementPID Protocol IDentifierPIM Protocol Independent MulticastPIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense ModePIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse ModePPP Point-to-Point ProtocolPPPoE PPP over EthernetPRED Predicted Random Early DetectionPRI Primary Rate InterfacePRU Packet Routing ModulePSNP Partial Sequence Numbers PDUPVC Permanent Virtual Channel (Connection)/Permanent Virtual CircuitQoS Quality of ServiceRA Router AdvertisementRDI Remote Defect IndicationRFC Request For CommentsRIP Routing Information ProtocolRIPng Routing Information Protocol next generationRM Routing ManagerRMON Remote Network Monitoring MIBRP Routing ProcessorRPF Reverse Path ForwardingSA Source AddressSDU Service Data UnitSEL NSAP SELectorSFD Start Frame DelimiterSFP Small Form factor PluggableSMTP Simple Mail Transfer ProtocolSNAP Sub-Network Access ProtocolSNMP Simple Network Management ProtocolSNP Sequence Numbers PDUSNPA Subnetwork Point of AttouchmentSPF Shortest Path FirstSSAP Source Service Access PointTA Terminal AdapterTCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTLA ID Top-Level Aggregation IdentifierTLV Type, Length, and ValueTOS Type Of ServiceTPID Tag Protocol IdentifierTTL Time To LiveUBR Unspecified Bit RateUDP User Datagram ProtocolUPC Usage Parameter ControlVBR Variable Bit RateVC Virtual Channel/Virtual Call/Virtual CircuitVCI Virtual Channel IdentifierVLAN Virtual LANVP Virtual PathVPI Virtual Path IdentifierVPN Virtual Private NetworkVRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

vii

WAN Wide Area NetworkWFQ Weighted Fair QueueingWS Work StationWWW World-Wide Web

Symbols used in the manualThe symbols used in the manual are as given below.

Conventions: kB, MB, GB, and TB1kB (kilobytes), 1MB (megabytes), 1GB (gigabytes) and 1TB (terabytes) indicate 1,024 bytes, 1,0242 bytes, 1,0243 bytes and 1,0244 bytes, respectively.

Symbol Meaning

[ ] Indicates keyboard keysExamples:

[C]: C key[TAB]: Tab key[ENTER]: Enter or Return key (carriage return)

[ + ] Means to press the key indicated after the "+" sign while depressing the key indicated in front of the "+" signExample:[Control + C]: Press the C key while depressing the Ctrl key.

viii

Contents

Preface i

Intended products and software versions ................................................................................iIntended users ..........................................................................................................................iAcquisition of this manual ......................................................................................................iGR4000 manuals ................................................................................................................... iiSequence of the GR4000 manual perusal ............................................................................ iiiRelated publications ..............................................................................................................ivDifferences in configuration manuals between the GR2000, GR4000 and GS4000 series ..ivConventions: abbreviations ....................................................................................................vSymbols used in the manual ............................................................................................... viiiConventions: kB, MB, GB, and TB ................................................................................... viii

PART 1: Operations Commands1. Operations Commands 1

1.1 List of Commands ...................................................................................................................21.2 Displayed by Input Error Position Indication ........................................................................121.3 About the Description of This Manual ..................................................................................13

PART 2: Basic Operation2. Mode Change 17

enable ............................................................................................................................................18disable ...........................................................................................................................................19quit ................................................................................................................................................20exit ................................................................................................................................................21logout ............................................................................................................................................22configure(configure terminal) .......................................................................................................23end ................................................................................................................................................25

3. Login User 27

adduser ..........................................................................................................................................28rmuser ...........................................................................................................................................30password .......................................................................................................................................32clear password ..............................................................................................................................35show sessions ................................................................................................................................37show whoami ................................................................................................................................38killuser ..........................................................................................................................................39

4. Terminal 41

set terminal warning-level ............................................................................................................42set exec-timeout ............................................................................................................................43set terminal command-literal ........................................................................................................44set terminal help ...........................................................................................................................45set terminal pager .........................................................................................................................46show history ..................................................................................................................................47stty ................................................................................................................................................48

ix

5. Remote Operation 49

telnet ............................................................................................................................................. 50rlogin ............................................................................................................................................ 52ftp ................................................................................................................................................. 54

6. Software Management 59

show version ................................................................................................................................ 60ppupdate ....................................................................................................................................... 63ftpbackup ...................................................................................................................................... 65ftprestore ...................................................................................................................................... 67synchronize .................................................................................................................................. 69

7. MC Maintenance 73

copy mc ........................................................................................................................................ 74format mc ..................................................................................................................................... 76show mc ....................................................................................................................................... 78set mc disable ............................................................................................................................... 80set mc enable ................................................................................................................................ 81

8. File Operation 83

show running-config (show configuration) .................................................................................. 84show startup-config ...................................................................................................................... 85copy running-config ..................................................................................................................... 86copy startup-config ...................................................................................................................... 88copy backup-config ...................................................................................................................... 90erase startup-config ...................................................................................................................... 92cd .................................................................................................................................................. 93pwd ............................................................................................................................................... 94ls ................................................................................................................................................... 95dir ................................................................................................................................................. 96cat ................................................................................................................................................. 99cp ................................................................................................................................................ 100mkdir .......................................................................................................................................... 101mv ............................................................................................................................................... 102rm ............................................................................................................................................... 103rmdir ........................................................................................................................................... 104delete .......................................................................................................................................... 105undelete ...................................................................................................................................... 107squeeze ....................................................................................................................................... 109chmod ..........................................................................................................................................111zmodem ...................................................................................................................................... 112

9. Utility 115

diff .............................................................................................................................................. 116grep (egrep,fgrep) ....................................................................................................................... 117more ........................................................................................................................................... 118less .............................................................................................................................................. 119vi ................................................................................................................................................. 120sort .............................................................................................................................................. 121tail ............................................................................................................................................... 122hexdump ..................................................................................................................................... 123

x

PART 3: System Operation and Maintenance10. System Management 125

show system ................................................................................................................................126clear counters system ..................................................................................................................133clear control-counter ...................................................................................................................134show power-supply .....................................................................................................................135reload ..........................................................................................................................................138close rmEthernet .........................................................................................................................141free rmEthernet ...........................................................................................................................142test interfaces rmEthernet ...........................................................................................................143no test interfaces rmEthernet ......................................................................................................145show tech-support .......................................................................................................................146show tcpdump (tcpdump) ...........................................................................................................151ttcp ..............................................................................................................................................161show pru resources .....................................................................................................................168

11. PRU/NIF Management 171

close pru ......................................................................................................................................172free pru ........................................................................................................................................174show nif (Ethernet) .....................................................................................................................175clear counters nif (Ethernet) .......................................................................................................180close nif ......................................................................................................................................182free nif ........................................................................................................................................184

12. Message Log 187

show logging ..............................................................................................................................188clear logging ...............................................................................................................................190show logging console .................................................................................................................191set logging console .....................................................................................................................192show warning ..............................................................................................................................193

13. E-Mail Report 195

show report-email .......................................................................................................................196clear report-email ........................................................................................................................198set report-email ...........................................................................................................................199test report-email ..........................................................................................................................200show trace report-email ..............................................................................................................201clear trace report-email ...............................................................................................................203

14. Resource Information 205

show rm cpu ...............................................................................................................................206show cp cpu ................................................................................................................................209show cp buffer ............................................................................................................................212clear cp buffer .............................................................................................................................214show processes ...........................................................................................................................215show memory .............................................................................................................................218df .................................................................................................................................................220du ................................................................................................................................................221

15. CP Maintenance Information 223

show trace (CP) ..........................................................................................................................224debug trace (CP) .........................................................................................................................226no debug trace (CP) ....................................................................................................................227clear trace (CP) ...........................................................................................................................228show trace frame .........................................................................................................................229

xi

debug trace frame ....................................................................................................................... 231no debug trace frame .................................................................................................................. 232clear trace frame ......................................................................................................................... 233show register .............................................................................................................................. 234set register .................................................................................................................................. 236

16. Dump Information 239

dump cp ...................................................................................................................................... 240dump pru .................................................................................................................................... 243dump nif ..................................................................................................................................... 246set dump ..................................................................................................................................... 248show dump status ....................................................................................................................... 249erase dumpfile ............................................................................................................................ 250show dumpfile ............................................................................................................................ 252

17. Duplex Management 255

close standby .............................................................................................................................. 256free standby ................................................................................................................................ 258show mode ................................................................................................................................. 260set mode ..................................................................................................................................... 262clear mode .................................................................................................................................. 266swap bcu ..................................................................................................................................... 267

18. Time Management 269

show calendar ............................................................................................................................. 270set calendar ................................................................................................................................. 271rdate ............................................................................................................................................ 273show ntp status ........................................................................................................................... 275restart ntp .................................................................................................................................... 277

19. MIB Information 279

snmp lookup ............................................................................................................................... 280snmp get ..................................................................................................................................... 281snmp getnext .............................................................................................................................. 283snmp walk .................................................................................................................................. 285snmp getif ................................................................................................................................... 287snmp getroute ............................................................................................................................. 289snmp getarp ................................................................................................................................ 291snmp getforward ........................................................................................................................ 293snmp rget .................................................................................................................................... 296snmp rgetnext ............................................................................................................................. 298snmp rwalk ................................................................................................................................. 300snmp rgetroute ............................................................................................................................ 302snmp rgetarp ............................................................................................................................... 304

20. Flow Designation 307

show sflow ................................................................................................................................. 308clear sflow statistics .................................................................................................................. 311restart sflow ................................................................................................................................ 312dump sflow ................................................................................................................................ 313

PART 4: Network Interface21. Ethernet 315

show interfaces (Ethernet) ......................................................................................................... 316

xii

clear counters (ethernet) .............................................................................................................338show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage) ................................................................................................340show vlans (Tag-VLAN Linkage) ..............................................................................................343clear counters(Tag-VLAN Linkage) ...........................................................................................345clear vlan statistics (Tag-VLAN Linkage) ..................................................................................347close (ethernet) ...........................................................................................................................348free (ethernet) .............................................................................................................................350test interfaces (ethernet) ..............................................................................................................352no test interfaces (ethernet) .........................................................................................................356

22. Link Aggregation Information 363

show link-aggregation ................................................................................................................364show link-aggregation statistics .................................................................................................374clear link-aggregation statistics lacp ..........................................................................................379restart link-aggregation ...............................................................................................................381dump protocols link-aggregation ................................................................................................383

23. All Interfaces 385

show interfaces (Display of all interface information) ...............................................................386

Index 387

xiii

PART 1: Operations Commands

Chapter

1. Operations Commands

1.1 List of Commands1.2 Displayed by Input Error Position Indication1.3 About the Description of This Manual

1


1.1 List of Commands

The list of the operation commands that can be used in CLI are shown in the following table. For configuration definition commands, see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1", "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2."

Table 1-1: List of Operation Commands (Note 1)

Classification Command Name Function

Mode switchover enable Mode change to system administrator.

disable End system administrator mode.

quit (exit) End current user mode, command input mode.

logout System logout

configure (configure terminal) Start configuration definition command mode.

end End configuration definition command mode.

Login user management

adduser Addition of new user

rmuser Delete user.

password Set/change password.

clear password Delete password.

show sessions Display all logged in users.

show whoami Display all logged in local users.

killuser Specified user forced logout.

Terminal set terminal warning-level Set output level of "messages indicating that there was a warning".

set exec-timeout Set time until "automatic logout".

set terminal command-literal Change CLI operation command input mode.

set terminal help Set list of commands displayed in help messages.

set terminal pager Set paging processing.

show history Display command history.

stty Display terminal attributes

Remote operation telnet Remote login to other systems

rlogin Remote login to other systems

ftp Transfer file.

Software management

show version Display version.

ppupdate Upgrade software version.

ftpbackup Save software in ftp server.

ftprestore Recover software from ftp server.

2


synchronize Copy content of MC.

MC maintenance copy mc Copy MC.

format mc Initialize MC.

show mc Display MC information.

set mc disable Prohibit access to MC.

set mc enable Release MC access ban.

File operation show running-config(show configuration)

Display operation configuration definition information.

show startup-config Display active configuration definition information.

copy running-config Copy operation configuration definition information.

copy startup-config Copy preliminary configuration definition information.

copy backup-config Copy active configuration definition information.

erase startup-config Delete all active configuration definition information.

cd Move current directory.

pwd Display current directory path name.

ls Display directory content.

dir Display MC files.

cat Consolidate and output files.

cp Copy files.

mkdir Produce directory.

mv Move file, change file name

rm Delete file.

rmdir Delete directory.

delete Delete restorable MC files.

undelete Restore deleted restorable MC files.

squeeze Erase deleted restorable MC files.

chmod Change file permission mode.

zmodem Transfer file by RS232C.

Utilities diff Display differences in line content between text files.

grep Search for patterns in files.

egrep Search for expanded patterns in files.

fgrep Search for fixed character strings in files.

more Display text files, paging.

less Display text files, paging.

vi Text editor


3


sort Sort files.

tail Display last part of message.

hexdump Display hexadump.

System management

show system Display system operating conditions/statistics information.

clear counters system Clear statistics information counter of entire System.

clear control-counter Clear retry counter.

show power-supply Display power supply.

reload Reboot.

close rmEthernet Direct rmEthernet close state.

free rmEthernet Release rmEthernet close state.

test interfaces rmEthernet Start rmEthernet line test.

no test interfaces rmEthernet End rmEthernet line test.

show tech-support Acquire route maintenance information.

show tcpdump (tcpdump) Command for packet monitoring.

ttcp Measure throughput in the TCP/UDP level between two points.

show pru resources Display numbers of entries in H/W table of PRU.

PRU/NIF management

close pru Direct PRU close state, set hot swap register.

free pru Release PRU close state, release hot swap register.

show nif NIF operation information

clear counters nif Clear statistics information counter.

close nif Direct NIF close state, set hot swap register.

free nif Release NIF close state, release hot swap register.

Message log show logging Display operation log.

clear logging Delete operation log.

show logging console Display system message level.

set logging console Set system message level.

show warning Display warning messages.

E-mail report show report-email Display operational state of E-Mail report function and its failure information.

clear report-email Erase failure information which has been reported by E-Mail and whose report is under suppression.

set report-email Set operational state of E-Mail report function.

test report-email Test report of E-Mail report function.

show trace report-email Display result of transmission by E-Mail report function.


4


clear trace report-email Erase result of transmission by E-Mail report function after its extraction.

Resource information

show rm cpu Display RM CPU usage rate.

show cp cpu Display CP CPU usage rate/buffer usage rate.

show cp buffer Display CP buffer statistics information.

clear cp buffer Clear CP buffer statistics information counter.

show processes Display process information.

show memory Display memory information.

df Display free disk capacity.

du Display used disk capacity.

CP maintenance information

show trace Display CP trace

debug trace Start extracting CP trace.

no debug trace Stop extracting CP trace.

clear trace Delete CP trace.

show trace frame Display trace of frame.

debug trace frame Start extracting trace of frame.

no debug trace frame Stop extracting trace of frame.

clear trace frame Delete extracting trace of frame.

show registor Display CP/ PRU register content.

set registor Set CP/ PRU register content.

Dump information dump cp Extract CP dump.

dump pru Extract PRU dump.

dump nif Extract NIF dump.

set dump Set CP/ PRU dump extracting range.

show dump status Display CP/ PRU dump extracting range.

erase dumpfile Delete dump file.

show dumpfile Display dump file list.

Duplication management

close standby Direct close state, set hot swap register.

free standby Release close state, release hot swap register.

show mode Operating mode/priority MC when activating system/display operating conditions.

set mode Operating mode/set priority MC when activating system.

clear mode Operating mode/delete priority MC setting when activating system.


5


swap bcu Switch duplicated BCU systems.

Time management show calendar Display date and time.

set calendar Set date and time.

rdate Set date and time from remote host.

show ntp status Display ntp server state.

restart ntp Reinitialize ntp server.

MIB information snmp lookup Display supported MIB object name and object ID.

snmp get Display specified MIB values.

snmp getnext Display next specified MIB values.

snmp walk Display specified MIB tree.

snmp getif Display MIB information of interface group.

snmp getroute Display ipRouteTable (IP routing table).

snmp getarp Display ipNetToMediaTable (IP address conversion table).

snmp getforward Display ipForwardTable (IP forwarding table).

snmp rget Display MIB values of specified remote system.

snmp rgetnext Display next MIB values of specified remote system.

snmp rwalk Display MIB tree of specified remote system.

snmp rgetroute Display ipRouteTable (IP routing table) of specified remote system.

snmp rgetarp Display of ipNetToMediaTable (IP address conversion table) specified remote system.

Flow design show sflow Display statistics information of flow.

clear sflow statistics Clear statistics information of flow.

restart sflow Restart flow-statistics program.

dump sflow Extract dump information of flow statistics.

Ethernet show interfaces Display line operation state/statistics information.

clear counters Clear line statistics information counter.

show vlan Display VLAN line statistics information.

show vlans Display all VLAN line statistics information.

clear counters Clear VLAN line statistics information counter.

clear vlan statistics Clear all VLAN line statistics information counter.

close Direct close state.

free Release close state.

test interfaces Start line test.

no test interfaces End line test.


6


Link aggregation information

show link-aggregation Display link aggregation information.

show link-aggregation statistics Display link aggregation statistics information.

clear link-aggregation statistics lacp Clear link aggregation statistics information.

restart link-aggregation Restart link aggregation program.

dump protocols link-aggregation Extract link aggregation dump information.

All interfaces show interface Display all interfaces operation status/statistics information.

IPv4 network information

show ip-dual interface(IPv4) Display network interface parameters.

show ip interface Display IPv4 network interface.

clear counters null-interface(IPv4) Clear NULL interface discard packet count counter.

ping Echo test

traceroute Display route.

show ip arp Display ARP.

clear arp-cache Delete ARP.

show netstat(netstat)(IPv4) Display network status.

clear netstat(IPv4) Clear network statistics information counter.

clear tcp(IPv4) Interrupt TCP connection.

show filter-flow(IPv4) Display filter IP flow statistics information.

clear filter-flow(IPv4) Clear filter IP flow statistics information counter.

show vrrpstatus(IPv4) Display VRRP operation status.

clear vrrpstatus(IPv4) Clear VRRP statistics information counter.

swap vrrp(IPv4) Swap local system status.

show ip-dual policy(IPv4) Display policy routing condition-defined Filter list number of specified interface name.

show ip-dual local policy(IPv4) Display policy routing conditions and output destination information of specified interface name.

show ip-dual cache policy(IPv4) Display policy group information.

show ip policy Display policy routing condition-defined Filter list number.

show ip local policy Display policy routing conditions and output destination information.

show ip cache policy Display policy group information

show dhcp traffic Display DHCP server statistics information.

clear dhcp traffic Clear DHCP server statistics information counter.

show dhcp giaddr Display giaddr information for interfaces.

show dns-relay Display DNS relay activity state.

clear counters dns-relay Clear DNS relay error statistics information counter.


7


IPv6 network information

show ip-dual interface(IPv6) Display network interface parameters.

show ipv6 interface Display IPv6 network interface parameters.

clear counters null-interface(IPv6) Clear NULL interface discard packet count counter.

show interface Display tunnel interface operation status/statistics information.

clear counters Clear tunnel interface statistics information counter.

ping ipv6 ICMP6 echo test

traceroute ipv6 Display IPv6 routed routes.

show ipv6 neighbors Display NDP.

clear ipv6 neighbors Clear dynamic NDP information.

show netstat(netstat)(IPv6) Display network status.

clear netstat(IPv6) Clear network statistics information counter.

clear tcp(IPv6) Interrupt TCP connection.

show filter-flow(IPv6) Display filter IP flow statistics information.

clear filter-flow(IPv6) Clear filter IP flow statistical counter.

show vrrpstatus(IPv6) Display VRRP operation state.

clear vrrpstatus(IPv6) Clear VRRP statistics information counter.

swap vrrp(IPv6) Swap local system status.

show ip-dual policy(IPv6) Display policy routing condition-defined Filter list number of specified interface name.

show ip-dual local policy(IPv6) Display policy routing conditions and output destination information of specified interface name.

show ip-dual cache policy(IPv6) Display policy group information.

show ipv6 policy Display policy routing condition-defined Filter list number.

show ipv6 local policy Display policy routing conditions and output destination information.

show ipv6 cache policy Display policy group information

show ipv6 dhcp binding Display IPv6 DHCP server coupling information.

clear ipv6 dhcp binding Delete IPv6 DHCP server coupling information.

show ipv6 dhcp server statistics Display IPv6 DHCP server statistics information.

clear ipv6 dhcp server statistics Clear IPv6 DHCP server statistics information counter.

restart ipv6-dhcp server Restart IPv6 DHCP server program.

dump protocols ipv6-dhcp server Dump of IPv6 DHCP information.

ipv6-dhcp server monitor Start extracting log of packets sent/received by IPv6 DHCP server.

no ipv6-dhcp server monitor End extracting log of packets sent/received by IPv6 DHCP server.


8


IP unicast routing protocol information

show ip route Display list of all routes.

clear ip route Reinstall and reassess route information.

show ip entry Display detailed specific route information.

show ip rip Display RIP protocol information.

clear counters rip ipv4-unicast Clear RIP protocol information.

show ip ospf Display OSPF protocol information.

clear ip ospf Clear OSPF protocol information

show ip bgp[OP-BGP] Display BGP protocol information

clear ip bgp[OP-BGP] Clear BGP protocol information BGPReadvertise and relearn BGP routes.

show ip static Display static route information.

clear ip static-gateway Clear static route information.

show ip interface ipv4-unicast Display interfaces recognized by IP routing program.

show isis[OP-ISIS] Display IS-IS protocol.

clear isis[OP-ISIS] Clear IS-IS protocol information.

debug isis[OP-ISIS] Display IS-IS protocol sent/received packets.

show processes memory unicast(ipv4)

Display unicast routing program memory usage state.

show processes cpu unicast(ipv4) Display unicast routing program CPU usage state.

show processes task unicast(ipv4) Display unicast routing program task information.

show processes timer unicast(ipv4) Display unicast routing program timer information.

restart unicast(ipv4) Restart unicast routing program.

debug protocols unicast(ipv4) Start unicast routing program event log information display.

no debug protocols unicast(ipv4) Stop unicast routing program event log information display.

debug ip Control IP routing program real time display.

dump protocols unicast(ipv4) Extract unicast routing program control table information, event trace information dump.

erase protocol-dump unicast(ipv4) Delete unicast routing program control table information, event trace information, and core information dump.

IP multicast routing protocol information[OP-MLT]

show ip mcache Display all the multicast routes.

show ip mstatic Display multicast static group subscribe information.

show ip pim Display PIM information.

show ip mroute Display PIM-SM multicast route information.


9


show ip igmp Display IGMP information.

show ip dvmrp Display DVMRP information.

show ip rpf Display RPF information of PIM.


dump protocols unicast(ipv4) Extract unicast routing program control table information and event trace information dump.

erase protocol-dump unicast(ipv4) Delete unicast routing program control table information, event trace information and core information dump.

IPv6 unicast routing protocol information

show ipv6 route Display list of all routes.

clear ipv6 route Reinstall and reassess route information.

show ipv6 entry Display detailed specific route information.

show ipv6 rip Display RIPng protocol information.

clear counters rip ipv6-unicast Clear RIPng protocol information.

show ipv6 ospf Display OSPFv3 protocol information.

clear ipv6 ospf Clear OSPFv3 protocol information.

show ipv6 bgp[OP-BGP] Display BGP4+ protocol information.

clear ipv6 bgp[OP-BGP] Clear BGP4+ protocol information.Readvertise and relearn BGP4+ routes.

show ipv6 static Display static route information.

clear ipv6 static-gateway Clear static route information.

show ipv6 systems Display RA information.

show ipv6 interface ipv6-unicast Display interfaces recognized by IPv6 routing program.

show processes memory unicast(ipv6)

Display unicast routing program memory usage state.

show processes cpu unicast(ipv6) Display unicast routing program CPU usage state.

show processes task unicast(ipv6) Display unicast routing program task information.

show processes timer unicast(ipv6) Display unicast routing program timer information.


debug protocols unicast(ipv6) Start unicast routing program event log information display.

no debug protocols unicast(ipv6) Stop unicast routing program event log information display.

debug ipv6 Control IPv6 routing program real time display.

dump protocols unicast(ipv6) Extract unicast routing program control table information, event trace information dump.

erase protocol-dump unicast(ipv6) Delete unicast routing program control table information, event trace information, and core information dump.


10


(Note 1)

This command may not be executable occasionally if MC is disabled with the set mc disable command (see "set mc disable") or while "ppupdate" command (see "ppupdate") is being executed.

In such a case, execute it again after moving to home directory with the cd command (see "cd").

(Note 2)

For the routing protocol IS-IS information, see IP unicast routing protocol information "show isis", "clear isis", and "debug isis".

IPv6 multicast routing protocol information [OP-MLT]

show ipv6 mcache Display list of all multicast routes.

show ipv6 pim Display PIM information.

show ipv6 mroute Display PIM-SM multicast route information.

show ipv6 dvmrp Display DVMRP information.

show ipv6 rpf Display RPF information of PIM.

restart ipv6-unicast Restart unicast routing program.

dump protocols ipv6-unicast Extract unicast routing program control table information and event trace information dump.

erase protocol-dump ipv6-unicast Delete unicast routing program control table information, event trace information, and core information dump.

QoS information show qos ip-flow Display QoS IP flow statistics information.

clear qos ip-flow Clear QoS IP flow statistics information counter.

show qos flow Display IPX, Bridge, HDLC pass-through and special IP flow statistics information.

clear qos flow Clear IPX, Bridge, HDLC pass-through and special IP flow statistics information counter.

show qos queueing Display statistics information for each sent/received interface priority queue.

clear qos queueing Clear statistics information counter for each sent/received interface priority queue.

show shaper Display statistics information of each sending interface priority queue waited ethernet shaper function.

clear shaper Clear statistics information counter of each sending interface priority queue waited ethernet shaper function.


11


1.2 Displayed by Input Error Position Indication

The error messages output by input error position indication (see "Operations - Device Management Overview, 3.1(6) Input error position indication function" are shown in the following table.

Table 1-2: List of Error Messages Displayed by Input Error Position Indication

No. Message Description Cause

1 % illegal parameter at '^' marker

An illegal command or parameter is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when the unsupported command or parameter is input.

2 % too long at '^' marker A parameter exceeding the number of limited digits is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when a parameter exceeding the number of limited digits is input.

3 % Incomplete commnad at '^' marker

A parameter is insufficient. This is displayed when a parameter is insufficient.

4 % illegal option at '^' marker An illegal option is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when an illegal option is input.

5 % illegal value at '^' marker An illegal numeric value is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when an illegal numeric value is input.

6 % illegal name at '^' marker An illegal name is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when an illegal name is input.

7 % out of range '^' marker An out-of-range numeric value is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when an out-of-range numeric value is input.

8 % illegal IP address format at '^' marker

An illegal IP address or IPv6 address is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when the input format of an IP address or IPv6 address is illegal.

9 % illegal combination or already appeared at '^' marker

The previously input parameter is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when the previously input parameter is input again.

10 % illegal format at'^' marker An illegal format-based parameter is input in the '^' position.

This is displayed when the input format of a parameter is illegal.

11 % Permission denied General users cannot execute this command.

If execution of a command only system administrator can execute was tried by a general user.

12 % internal program error An error occurs in a program. Consult the maintenance person.

This is displayed when illegal operations other than those described above are performed.

12

1.3 About the Description of This Manual

This manual describes the functions and syntaxes of different commands in accordance with the format as shown below.

(1) [Function]The application of the command is briefly described.

(2) [Input Format]The usage of the command is explained. The command is configured in the following format:

Command name [Option] [Command argument]

The command and its parameters, and one parameter and another, are each set apart from one another with one or more spaces.

When a command is described in more than one line, a back-slash is specified immediately before the C/R (Return key) is pressed.

Command name: Designation of the command

Option:

Parameter consisting of a hyphen (-) and any one character. In the case of "-xyz", for example, each of the options x, y and z has a meaning, and the options can be specified linking them in any combination, such as "-x", "-y" or "-xy".

Command argument: Parameter with no hyphen (-)

Characters not enclosed in < > are the input characters to be entered as is.

Characters enclosed in < > mean that the character string of a value or name is to be entered.

In the case of a command argument specifying an PRU number, for example, it is represented in this input format: pru <PRU No.>. Here, pru are the input characters that are to be typed in as is, while the numeral of the PRU number should be specified in the part <PRU No.>. So, to specify " PRU number = 1," key in pru1.

The input characters enclosed in < > are explained under Item [Parameter] of each command.

<...>... denotes more than one parameter.

{A|B} means that "either A or B should be selected."

{..., ...} means that more than 0 (zero) in number should be specified in any arbitrary sequence.

An option or command argument enclosed in [ ] indicates that "it can be omitted."

[ <...>..] denotes omission or more than one parameter.

An IP address or subnet mask is represented by decimal digits, byte by byte, with a dot (.) inserted between them in order to set them apart from one another.

(Ex.) 192.168.0.1

255.255.255.0

An IPv6 address is represented by hexadecimal digits, every two bytes, with a colon (:) inserted between them in order to set them apart from one another.

(Ex.) 3ffe:501:811:ff03::87ff:fed0:c7e0

An IPv6 address is represented by an interface name that is specified in the rear part of the

13

hexadecimal address with a percentage (%) symbol inserted in between.

(Ex.) fe80::200:87ff:fe5a:13c7%Department1

(3) [Parameters]Details of command argument or option treated by command are described. The value range of <PRU No.>, <NIF No.> and <Line No.> parameter is as follows:

Table 1-3: Range of <PRU No.> and <NIF No.>

Table 1-4: Range of <Line No.>

(4) [User Level]The user level (system administrator or general user) in which a command can be used is displayed.

(5) [Example]An example of command usage is indicated as needed.

(6) [Display Explanation]The contents of the display given in an execution example are described.

(7) [Influence on User Communication]It is described whether the interruption of a packet relay in this System, the disconnection of a line, and the re-initialization of a system influence the user communication when a command is executed during operation.

(8) [Response Messages]The list of response messages that are displayed after command execution is described.

However, the error message displayed by input error position indication is not described here, but it is described in "1.2 Displayed by Input Error Position Indication".

No. Model Range of <PRU No.> Range of <NIF No.>

1 GR4000-80E 0 - 1 0 - 3

2 GR4000-160E 0 - 3 0 - 7

3 GR4000-320E 0 - 7 0 - 15

No. NIF name NIF type Range of <Line No.>

1 NE100-48T 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 48 lines 0 - 47

2 NE1000-12T 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T 12 lines 0 - 11

3 NE1G-12S 1000BASE-X(SX/LX) SFP 12 lines 0 - 11

4 NE1GSHP-4S 1000BASE-X(SX/LX) with hierarchical shaper function, SFP(1000 user x QoS/4port) 4 lines

0 - 3

5 NE1G-6G 1000BASE-X(SX/LX/LH) GBIC 6 lines 0 - 5

6 NE10G-1LR 10GBASE-LR(2 m - 10 km) 1 line 0

7 NE10G-1ER 10GBASE-ER(2 m - 40 km) 1 line 0

8 NE10G-1LW 10GBASE-LW(2 m - 10 km) 1 line 0

9 NE10G-1EW 10GBASE-EW(2 m - 40 km) 1 line 0

14


(9) [Precautions]Precautionary notes, such as those on the restriction of command use, are given.

"Figure 1-1: Example of Command Format Description" shows a description of show ip route command taken by way of example

Figure 1-1: Example of Command Format Description

15

PART 2: Basic Operation

Chapter

2. Mode Change

enabledisablequitexitlogoutconfigure(configure terminal)end

17

enable

enable

[Function]Changes the user level from that of a general user to a system administrator.

[Input Format]enable

[Parameters]Default

[User Level]General user

[Example]Change the user level to system administrator.> enable [Enter] key pressingpassword: ******#

If the password confirmation succeeds, the system administrator's prompt (#) appears. After you become the system administrator, you can execute configuration definition commands, etc.

[Influence on User Communication]None

[Response Messages]"Table 2-1: enable Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the enable command.

Table 2-1: enable Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. The password is not set up at the time of initialization. To prevent a breach of security, you

should set up the password using the password command (see "password").

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. This command cannot be executed on the standby system.

Sorry You cannot become the system administrator due to a password insertion error.

18

disable

disable

[Function]Changes the user level from system administrator to general user.

[Input Format]disable

[Parameters]Default

[User Level]System administrator

[Example]Change the user level from system administrator to general user.# disable [Enter] key pressing>

[Display Explanation]None


[Response Messages]None

[Precautions]None

19

quit

quit

[Function]Terminates the current user level or command input mode as described below.

1. Log out when the user level is a general user.

2. Terminate the system administrator to return to the general user when the user level is a system administrator.

3. Terminate the configuration definition command mode and return to the operation command mode. (For detail, see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, quit (exit)").

[Input Format]quit

[Parameters]Default


[Example]1. Terminate the configuration definition command mode.

(config)# quit [Enter] key pressing#

2. Terminate the system administrator to return to the general user.# quit [Enter] key pressing>

[Influence on User Communication]Yes (when returning from configuration definition command mode to CLI operation command mode).


[Precautions]1. A disable command (see "disable") can also be used when the user level is returned from

a system administrator to a general user.

20

exit

exit

[Function]Terminates the current command input mode as described below.

1. Terminate the CLI operation command mode and log out of the system.

2. Terminate the configuration definition command mode and return to the CLI operation command mode. (For detail, see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, quit (exit)").

[Input Format]exit

[Parameters]Default


[Example]1. Terminate the configuration definition command mode.

(config)# exit [Enter] key pressing#

2. Terminate the system administrator and log out of the system.# exit [Enter] key pressing

[Influence on User Communication]Yes (when returning from configuration definition command mode to CLI operation command mode).


[Precautions]1. Use a disable command ("disable") when the user level is returned from a system

administrator to a general user.

21

logout

logout

[Function]Logs out from a system.

[Input Format]logout

[Parameters]Default


[Example]Log out of the command input mode from the administrator mode.# logout [Enter] key pressinglogin:



[Precautions]None

22

configure(configure terminal)


[Function]Changes the command input mode from operation command mode to configuration definition command mode, when starting to edit configuration definition information, if user level is system administrator.

[Input Format]configure [terminal | hierarchy | non-hierarchy] [file <File Name>]

[Parameters]hierarchy | non-hierarchy

Specifies the editing format of configuration definition information.

hierarchy

Specifies to edit with the type-1 hierarchy input format.

non-hierarchy

Specifies to edit with the type-1 format.

Omitted

Edits with the format of the configuration definition information to be edited.

file <File Name>

Specifies a file-name in <File Name> when preliminary configuration definition information is edited.

Omitted

Edits operational configuration definition file stored in memory.


[Example]Change the command input mode from the operation command mode to the configuration definition command mode.# configure [Enter] key pressing(config)#

[Influence on User Communication]Yes

[Response Messages]See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, 12. Configuration Definition Error Messages during Editing".

[Precautions]1. If exists a user who is already editing the configuration definition information file, a

parameter having a different editing format or file-name cannot be specified.

2. If the content of configuration definition information file specified has an error, the content of the error is displayed and you cannot start editing the file. In such a case, edit the error of the configuration definition information file using a text editor, etc.

3. If the system is powered on, current configuration definition information file (/config/

23


system.cnf) is read into memory, and operation starts according to the contents defined. If a parameter is omitted, the operational configuration definition information stored in memory is edited. If such information is not saved in the MC after being edited, any edited configuration definitions are lost when the system restarts. Caution: We recommend you save any edited information in the MC using a configuration definition command save (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, save (write)").

4. If a current configuration definition information file (/config/system.cnf) is specified as the name of the configuration definition information file, the configuration definition can be edited, however, none of the edited content is used for operation, and it cannot be saved as a current configuration definition file. Pay careful attention to this point.

5. If a temporarily saved configuration definition information file (/config.cache/cache.cnf) is specified for the name of the configuration definition information file, the configuration definition can be edited, but the edited content cannot be saved as a temporarily saved configuration definition file. Pay careful attention to this point.

6. If alternation between active and standby occurs while configuration definition information is being edited, the edition is terminated automatically. If the preliminary configuration definition information file is being edited, any edited configuration definitions are lost. Hence, we recommend you save configuration definitions edited by using the save command on a regular basis while editing a preliminary configuration definition information file.

7. Use configuration definition command status (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, status") and you can get to know the state of the configuration definition being edited.

8. If the configuration definition command apply (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, apply") has not yet been executed after the IP routing protocol information was changed, inputting this command causes the configuration definition command apply to be executed automatically before execution of itself, and the changed IP routing protocol information is reflected in the system operation.

9. This command may cause an error if the NIF to be operated is not in the operational state. In such a case, insert the configuration definition command exit (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, quit (exit)") to terminate the configuration definition editing mode. Use the show nif command to confirm that the state of the NIF to be operated is active and then execute this command to move to the configuration definition edition mode.

10. A configuration definition file of the type-1 format in the type-1 hierarchy input format can be edited by specifying the hierarchy. Note that such editing takes more time than usual until the configure command finishes executing. This is because the defined contents are converted.

24

end

end

[Function]Terminates the configuration definition command mode to return to the operation command mode.

[Input Format]end

[Parameters]Default


[Example]Terminate the configuration definition command mode.(config)# end [Enter] key pressing#



[Precautions]None

25

Chapter

3. Login User

adduserrmuserpasswordclear passwordshow sessionsshow whoamikilluser

27

adduser

adduser

[Function]Adds an account for a new login user. It performs the following four operations:

1. Adds new user to the password file.

2. Creates new login user's home directory, and sets directory ownership as the new login user.

3. Sets up a basic dot file (.login, .tcshrc) for new login user.

4. When the system is duplex operation, the account is synchronized automatically in current MC of the standby BCU system. When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU and the standby BCU systems, the account is synchronized after confirmation.

[Input Format]adduser

[Parameters]Default


[Example]Add a new login user called "user1."# adduser [Enter] key pressing

Input the login user name.Login name: user1 [Enter] key pressing

Input the password.Password: ****** [Enter] key pressing

Input the password again for confirmation.Retype password: ****** [Enter] key pressing

The confirmation message about whether to add the account is displayed.Add User user1 OK? (y/n) : _

When you enter 'y', the account is added.

When you enter 'n', the command prompt is displayed without adding the account.

When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU system, a message that confirms whether the account is synchronized is displayed. Synchronize accounts to Secondary MC? (y/n) : _

When you enter 'y', the account is synchronized.

When you enter 'n', the account is not synchronized.

When preliminary MC is installed in the standby BCU system, a message that confirms whether the account is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize accounts to Standby's Secondary MC? (y/n) : _




28

adduser

[Response Messages]"Table 3-1: adduser Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the adduser command.

Table 3-1: adduser Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. A login user name that has already been registered cannot be added.

2. The number of characters in the password must be at least 6 and no more than 128. Numbers or special characters must be included in the password.

3. The login user name must be 16 characters or less. Numeric characters and alphabetical characters can be used.

4. If executed in a duplex-operated system, account synchronization with the standby BCU system may take time.

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. This command cannot be executed on the standby BCU.

Please don't use an all-lower case password.Unusual capitalization, control characters or digits are suggested.

Do not use English characters alone; add symbols or numbers.

Illegal name -- <UserName> This user name cannot be used. <UserName> User name

User <UserName> exists Specified user already registered. <UserName> User name

Please enter a longer password. Enter longer password.

Mismatch; try again. Re-entered password differs from password. Try again.

no changes made The registration of the specified user is stopped.

Signal: <SignalName>: no changes made [Ctrl+C] pressed during command execution, ending registration of specified user. <SignalName> Signal name

Accounts are mismatch between Current and <MC>.

The account is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

Can't access to <MC>. <MC> cannot be accessed.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

Software version mismatch between Current and <MC>.

S/W version is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

password file already locked Addition of a user is terminated because password file has been locked.

29

rmuser

rmuser

[Function]Deletes the account of the login user registered using an adduser command. When the system is duplex operation, the account is synchronized automatically in current MC of the standby BCU system. When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU and the standby BCU systems, the account is synchronized after confirmation.

[Input Format]rmuser [<login name>]

[Parameters]<login name>

Specifies the registered login name in the password file. During default setting, the registered login user's list is displayed to ask the login user to be deleted.


[Example]Delete the user registered with the login user name "operator".# rmuser operator [Enter] key pressing

If the specified login user name is registered, the following confirmation message will appear.Delete user'operator'?(y/n): _

When you enter 'y', the account will be deleted.

When you enter 'n', the command prompt is displayed without deleting the account.

When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU system, a message that confirms whether the account is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize accounts to Secondary MC? (y/n) : _



When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU system, a message that confirms whether the account is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize accounts to Standby's Secondary MC? (y/n) : _




[Response Messages]"Table 3-2: rmuser Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the rmuser command.

Table 3-2: rmuser Command Response Messages

Message Explanation


30

rmuser

[Precautions]1. The account used for login cannot be deleted. For example, "operator" cannot be deleted

using this command while logging in using "operator".

2. The user ("operator") in effect at the time of initialization can be deleted.

3. Since the user's home directory will be deleted if the user is deleted, back up any files that you need before deletion of the user.


No user.Failed to remove user.

There is no user.

Last user. Since this was the last user, the account cannot be deleted.

Remove myself? The account used for login cannot be deleted.

User '<UserName>' no exists.Failed to remove user.

Specified user not registered.<UserName>: User name

Signal: <SignalName>: no changes made [Ctrl+C] pressed during command execution, ending registration of specified user.<SignalName>: Signal name

Accounts are mismatch between Current and <MC>.

The account is different between current and <MC>.<MC> : MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

Can't access to <MC>. <MC> cannot be accessed.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

Software version mismatch between Current and <MC>.

S/W version is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

password file already locked Deletion of a user is terminated because password file has been locked.

no changes made Deletion of a specified user is terminated.

Message Explanation

31

password

password

[Function]Changes the password for login user. When the system is duplex operation, the password is synchronized automatically in the current MC of the BCU standby system. When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU and the standby BCU systems, the password is synchronized after confirmation.

[Input Format]password [<login name>]


Specifies the login user name. The login user's password is changed when the login user name is omitted. A system administrator's password is changed when the login user name is omitted in the sysyem administrator mode.


[Example]1. Change password for login user name "operator".

> password operatorChanging local password for operatorNew password:******** ... Please input new password.Retype new password:******** ... Please input new password again.

When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU system, a message that confirms whether the password is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize password to Secondary MC? (y/n) : _

When you enter 'y', the password is synchronized.

When you enter 'n', the password is not synchronized.

When preliminary MC is installed in the standby BCU system, a message that confirms whether the password is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize password to Standby's Secondary MC? (y/n) : _


When you enter 'n', the password is not synchronized.>

2. Change local login user password (when no parameter exists):> passwordChanging local password for xxxxxxx ... Login user name will be displayed.Old password:******** ... Input current password.New password:******** ... Input new password.Retype new password:******** ... Input new password again.

When preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU system, a message that confirms whether the password is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize password to Secondary MC? (y/n) : _



32

password





[Response Messages]"Table 3-3: password Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the password command.

Table 3-3: password Command Response Messages

Message Explanation


Changing local password for <UserName>. Password for specified user has changed. <UserName> User name

Permission denied Cannot permit password change.

Please enter a longer password. Password input character has to be 6 characters.

Please don't use an all-lower case password.Unusual capitalization, control characters or digits are suggested.

Do not use English characters alone; add symbols or numbers.

Mismatch; try again, EOF to quit. Re-entered password does not match the one entered at first. Use [Ctrl+D] to quit.

unknown user admin. General user cannot change system administrator's password.

unknown group user. This user not registered in group.

unknown user <UserName> Specified user not registered. <UserName> User name

failed to copy <UserName> Could not copy specified user's password into MC. <UserName> User name

Password files are mismatch between Current and <MC>. The account is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

Can't access to <MC>. <MC> cannot be accessed.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby MC systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby MC system

33

password

[Precautions]1. Only the system administrator can change password information for other login users.

When changing passwords for other login users, "Old passwords:" will not be output. Start input from "New password:"

2. Passwords should have between 6 and 128 characters. Passwords should contain numbers and symbols.


Software version mismatch between Current and <MC>. S/W version is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

no changes made Change of password is terminated.

updating passwd databaseThe password database is currently locked.Wait for lock to be released? [y]

Password database is currently locked. Change password after lock is released?If 'y' is entered, the password is changed after lock is released. If 'n' is entered, no password is changed.

Message Explanation

34

clear password

clear password

[Function]Deletes a password for login user.

[Input Format]clear password [<login name>]


Specifies login user name. Deletes local login user password after omitting login user name. The password of a system administrator is deleted when the login user name is omitted in the system administrator mode.


[Example]Delete local login user password.> clear passwordChanging local password for xxxxxxx ... Login user name will be displayed.Old password:******** ... Please input current password again.

When the preliminary MC is installed in the active BCU system, a message that confirms whether the password is synchronized is displayed.Synchronize password to Secondary MC? (y/n) : _







[Response Messages]"Table 3-4: clear password Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the clear password command.

Table 3-4: clear password Command Response Messages

Message Explanation


Mismatch; try again, EOF to quit. Re-entered password does not match the one entered at first. Use [Ctrl+D] to quit.

Permission denied General user cannot change system administrator's password.

unknown group user. This user not registered in group.

35

clear password

[Precautions]1. Only the system administrator can delete password information for other login users.


unknown user <UserName> Specified user not registered. <UserName> User name

failed to copy <UserName> Could not copy specified user's password into MC. <UserName> User name

Password files are mismatch between Current and <MC>. The account is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

Can't access to <MC>. <MC> cannot be accessed.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby MC systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby MC system

Software version mismatch between Current and <MC>. S/W version is different between current and <MC>.<MC>: MC to be synchronizedSecondary MC ... Preliminary MCStandby's Primary MC ... Current MC in the standby BCU systemStandby's Secondary MC ... Preliminary MC in the standby BCU system

updating passwd databaseThe password database is currently locked.Wait for lock to be released? [y]

Password database is currently locked. Change password after lock is released? If 'y' is entered, the password is changed after lock is released. If 'n' is entered, no password is changed.

Message Explanation

36

show sessions

show sessions

[Function]show sessions

Displays the user who logs into this System.

[Input Format]show sessions

[Parameters]Default


[Example]Displays the user who logs into this System.> show sessionskikuchi: console ----- 0 Aug 6 14:16:05 <- Login from CONSOLEshimizu: aux admin 1 Aug 6 14:16:45 <- Login from AUX (System Administrator)shimizu: ttyp0 ----- 2 Aug 6 14:17:03(192.168.0.1) <- Login from remote operation terminal>



[Precautions]1. The login user name, tty name, user level "admin" (system administrator) or "-----"

(general user), login number, date, time, and terminal IP address (only when the user logs in from the remote operation terminal) are displayed.

2. Uses login number to forcibly log off the user.

37

show whoami

show whoami

[Function]Among the users who log in to this System, this command displays only the user who executes this command.

[Input Format]show whoami

[Parameters]Default


[Example]Displays the login name of a local user.> show whoamishimizu: ttyp0 ----- 2 Aug 6 14:17:03(192.168.0.1)>



[Precautions]1. The login user name, tty name, user level "admin" (system administrator) or "-----"

(general user), login number, date, time, and terminal IP address (only when the user logs in from the remote operation terminal) are displayed.

2. Login number is used to forcibly log off the user.

38

killuser

killuser

[Function]Forcibly logs off user during login.

[Input Format]killuser <login no>

[Parameters]<login no> ... Specifies the login number to forcibly log off. Login number can be confirmed by show session command.


[Example]Use show sessions command (see "show sessions") to look up user login number to be logged out. Specify login number and execute this command.


[Response Messages]"Table 3-5: killuser Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the killuser command.

Table 3-5: killuser Command Response Messages

Message Explanation


no user(UserName) User name does not exist.

invalid Login-No: LoginNo Specified login number is illegal.

kill myself? You cannot log yourself out forcibly.

different user. Users except yourself cannot be forcibly logged off.

39

killuser

[Precautions]1. This command is supplied to forcibly log off the login user who stays logged in because

network fault or terminal fault occurred during login. For normal logout, use logout command (see "logout") or exit command (see "exit"). Do not use this command other than in an emergency. Even in the login state, the user is logged out using an automatic logout function.

2. User cannot specify himself to be forcibly logged off. Such a specification results in an error. In the example above, after console-logging in as "kikuchi", the user cannot execute killuser 0.

3. If system administrator is forced to log out, this command can be executed only by a user who has logged in with the same user-name as the one used by the system administrator for log-in. Therefore, log in again by the login user name already used as a system administrator and then specify the relevant login number using this command to log out forcibly when logging out the login number of a system administrator forcibly. In the example above, the second logged in user, "shimizu", can perform killuser 1, but the third logged in user "kikuchi" cannot.

4. When cable removal failure occurs while displaying command execution result, forcibly logoff may not be allowed. In this case, system is logged off after recovered the failure. When failure has not been recovered, system is logged off after timeout of TCP protocol. It takes about 10 minutes to timeout though the time of the TCP protocol timeout is changed depending on the line speed and line quality.

5. Forcibly logoff can be allowed for other login users only when this command is executed from console.

40

Chapter

4. Terminal

set terminal warning-levelset exec-timeoutset terminal command-literalset terminal helpset terminal pagershow historystty

41

set terminal warning-level

set terminal warning-level

[Function]Sets the output level of a "Warning message" (see "Operations - Device Management Overview, 3.1(12) Warning Messages").

[Input Format]set terminal warning-level [ disable | enable [all | once]]

[Parameters]disable

A "Warning message" is not displayed even when a warning exists.

enable once

A "Warning message" is displayed only once during activation, user mode change, input mode change, and logging out. It is displayed only once even when a new warning occurs.

enable all or enable

A message is displayed at all times when a warning exists during initial setting.

The "enable" setting is validated when this command is executed with the parameter omitted.


[Example]1. A "Warning message" is not displayed.

> set terminal warning-level disable [Enter] key pressing

2. Display a message when a warning exists only once during activation, user mode switching, input mode switching, and logging out.> set terminal warning-level enable once [Enter] key pressing

3. A message is displayed at all times when a warning exists.> set terminal warning-level enable [Enter] key pressing



[Precautions]None

42

set exec-timeout

set exec-timeout

[Function]Sets the time (in minutes) required until automatic logout (see "Operations - Device Management Overview, 3.1(14) Automatic Logout") is realized.

[Input Format]set exec-timeout <Minutes>

[Parameters]<Minutes>

Specifies the automatic logout time (in minutes). The range of the value that can be specified is 1 to 60. The default value is 60 minutes.


[Example]Set the automatic logout value to 30 minutes.> set exec-timeout 30 [Enter] key pressing



[Precautions]None

43

set terminal command-literal

set terminal command-literal

[Function]Changes the command input mode of a CLI operation command.

[Input Format]set terminal command-literal { old-format | new-format }

[Parameters]old-format

Changes the command input mode of a CLI operation command to the old syntax operation command mode.

new-format

Changes the command input mode of a CLI operation command to the new syntax operation command mode (default).


[Example]1. Change the command input mode of a CLI operation command to the old syntax operation

command mode.> set terminal command-literal old-format [Enter] key pressing*>

2. Change the command input mode of a CLI operation command to the new syntax operation command mode.*> set terminal command-literal new-format [Enter] key pressing>



[Precautions]• The default value of the CLI operation command input mode is a new syntax operation

command mode.

44

set terminal help

set terminal help

[Function]Sets the list of commands displayed using a help message.

[Input Format]set terminal help { all | no-utility }

[Parameters]all

Sets so that the list of all enterable operation commands is displayed when the help message of an operation command is displayed during initial setting.

no-utility

Sets so that the list of operation commands other than a utility command and file operation command is displayed when the help message of an operation command is displayed.


[Example]1. Set so that the list of all enterable operation commands is displayed.

> set terminal help all [Enter] key pressing

2. Set so that the list of operation commands other than a utility command and file operation command is displayed.> set terminal help no-utility [Enter] key pressing



[Precautions]None

45

set terminal pager

set terminal pager

[Function]Specifies whether to perform paging (see "Operations - Device Management Overview, 3.1(11) Paging").

[Input Format]set terminal pager [{ enable | disable }]

[Parameters]disable

Performs no paging.

enable

Performs paging. Setting of default.

Omitted

Performs paging.


[Example]1. Perform no paging.

> set terminal pager disable [Enter] key pressing

2. Perform paging.> set terminal pager enable [Enter] key pressing



[Precautions]None

46

show history

show history

[Function]Displays the history of commands that were executed previously.

[Input Format]show history

[Parameters]Default


[Example]Display the execution example of a show history command.> show history [Enter] key pressing 1 show history>



[Precautions]None

47

stty

stty

[Function]Displays the terminal attributes of a device that is input as a standard feature.

[Input Format]stty [<option>]

[Parameters]Omitted

Displays partially the set attributes during default setting.

<option>

-a

Outputs all current terminal attributes as a standard feature.

-e

Outputs all current terminal attributes in the format of "all" or "everything" as a standard feature.



48

Chapter

5. Remote Operation

telnetrloginftp

49

telnet

telnet

[Function]Connects a hypothetical terminal with a remote terminal that has the specified IP address.

[Input Format]telnet <host> [/source-interface [<src_addr>]][<port>]

[Parameters]<host>

Specifies the IP address. An IPv4 or IPv6 address can be specified as the IP address.

<port>

Specifies the port number. When not specified, the default telnet port number (in the /etc/services file) is used.

/source-interface [<src_addr>]

Sets the send source IP address of telnet connection. An IPv4 or IPv6 address can be specified as the IP address.

When <src_addr> is omitted, the system IP address defined using the configuration definition command system (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, system") is automatically set as the transmission source IP address of the telnet connection.

[User Level] General user

[Example]Execute telnet to the remote operation terminal at IP address 192.168.0.1.> telnet 192.168.0.1 [Enter] key pressing

After telnet command is executed, the following message appears and waits so that the connection with the remote operation terminal will be established:Trying 192.168.0.1 ...

When the connection with the remote operation terminal is established, the following message appears. If the connection is not established within 30 seconds, the System waits for a command.Connected to 192.168.0.1

After the above message appears, enter the login name and password.login: username [Enter] key pressingPassword: ******** [Enter] key pressing

Execute telnet to the remote operation terminal of the IPv6 address 3ffe:1:100::250.> telnet 3ffe:1:100::250Trying 3ffe:1:100::250...


[Response Messages]"Table 5-1: telnet Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the telnet command.

50

telnet

Table 5-1: telnet Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• To interrupt the trying command during display, enter [Ctrl+C].

• After the connection is established, if this command is interrupted, enter [Ctrl+D].

• With this command, the input key code is sent as is to a host system that has already logged in. Therefore, if the key code of the terminal where this command was entered and the key code recognized by the logged-in terminal do not match, the operation will not be successful. For example, with the input key code for return control ([Enter]), a terminal generates (0d)16 or (0d0a) 16, and a device is required for (0d) 16 and a device is required for (0a) 16 in the return-control recognition of the previously logged-in terminal. This should be checked in advance.

• When using the /source-interface parameter, the connection using IPv4 is given preference if the addresses of both of IPv4 and IPv6 to destination host are registered in the DNS server.

Message Explanation

Trying <host>... Trying to connect to <host>.<host> remote host IP address

Connected to <host>. Connected to <host>.<host> Remote host IP address

Connection closed by foreign host. Disconnected from host.

Unable to connect to remote host: Connection refused

Connection refused: Connection refused by host.

Unable to connect to remote host: Operation timed out

Operation timed out: Connection time ran out.

<port>: bad port number Incorrect port number was entered.<port> Port number.

<host>: Unknown host Unknown host name was entered.<host> Remote host IP address

Not defined local address System IP address is undefined.

Bind: Can't assign reguested address Illegal send source IP address is set.

<host>:Host name lookup failure Unknown host name was entered.<host> Remote host

51

rlogin

rlogin

[Function]Connects a virtual terminal with a specified remote operation terminal.

[Input Format]rlogin <host> [-l <username>]

[Parameters]-l <username>

Specifies the corresponding user name when the user logs into the remote operation terminal with a user name that is different from the name used for logging into the current System. When this option is not used, the login user name used for logging into the remote operation terminal becomes the same as the user name used for logging into the current System.

<host>

Specifies the IP address of the remote operation terminal to be connected. An IPv4 or IPv6 address can be specified as the IP address.


[Example]Execute rlogin to terminal 92.168.0.1.> rlogin 192.168.0.1[Enter] key pressing

When the connection to the remote operation terminal is established, a password prompt message appears.Password: ********[Enter] key pressing

If a connection is not established, the System waits for a command.


[Response Messages]"Table 5-2: rlogin Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the rlogin command.

Table 5-2: rlogin Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

<host>: Connection refused Connection to remote terminal refused.<host> Remote host IP address

connection closed. Connection cut off.

<host>: Operation timed out. Connection to remote terminal cut off because input wait time ran out.<host> Remote host IP address

<host>: No route to host No routing to remote terminal.<host> Remote host IP address


52

rlogin

[Precautions]If this command is cut off, enter [Ctrl+D].

Temporary failure in name resolution Unknown host name was entered.

Message Explanation

53

ftp

ftp

[Function]Transfers files between remote operation terminals connected to this System by TCP/IP syntax.

[Input Format]ftp [<host>] [/source-interface [<src_addr>]]

[Parameters]<host>

Specifies the IP address of the remote operation terminal. An IPv4 or IPv6 address can be specified as the IP address.

<host>None

Displays the ftp prompt. The remote operation terminal is not connected in; establish connection with the open command.

/source-interface [<src_addr>]

Sets the send source IP address of ftp connection. It is possible to specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address as an IP address. When <src_addr> is omitted, the system address set using router in "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, system" is automatically set as the transmission source address of ftp connection.


[Example]Log in to the remote operation terminal that has the IP address 192.168.0.1.> ftp 192.168.0.1[Enter] key pressing

After the ftp command is executed, the operation does not start until connection with the remote operation terminal has been established. Then input prompts 1 and 2 below appear. If the connection is not established, the System waits for a command.

1. Input of login name

The login name prompt appears in the command line. Enter the login name for the remote operation terminal and press the [Enter] key.Name:

2. Input of password

The password prompt appears in the command line. Enter the password corresponding to the specified login name and press the [Enter] key.Password:

3. Input of file transmission commands

The file transfer prompt appears in the command line.ftp>

Enter the file transmission command corresponding to the destination and press the [Enter] key.

The input format for the file transmission commands is shown below.get <remote-file> [<local-file>]

The file is transmitted from the remote operation terminal to this System.

If local-file is omitted, the filename will be the same as the filename on the remote

54

ftp

operation terminal.mget <remote-files>

Use when there are multiple files to download. Enter as mget *.txtput <local-file> [<remote-file>]

Transfer a file from this System to the remote operation terminal. When remote-file is omitted, the filename will be the same as the one in this System.mput <local-files>

Use when there are multiple files to upload. Enter as mput *.txt.

4. Input of commands other than file transfer.

When the prompt "ftp>" appears, the commands shown below can be executed other than get or put.

ascii

Sets the file transmission format to ASCII (default).

binary

Sets the file transmission format to binary.

bye

Ends ftp.

cd <remote-directory>

Changes the current directory in the remote operation terminal to remote-directory.

chmod <mode> <file-name>

Changes the file attributes in the remote operation terminal specified by file-name to the ones specified by mode.

close

Ends the FTP session and displays the "ftp>" prompt.

delete <remote-file>

Deletes the remote-file file in the remote operation terminal.

help [<command>]

Displays the help message for the specified command. When the argument is omitted, a list of commands that can be used appears.

lcd [<directory>]

Changes the current directory in this System. When directory is omitted, the user home directory is used.

lols [<local-directory>]

Displays the list of local-directory (when not specified, current directory) contents in this System.

lopwd

Displays the current directory of this System.

ls [<remote-directory>] [<local-file>]

Displays the list of remote-directory (when not specified, current directory) contents in the remote operation terminal. When local-file is specified, saves the display contents in the file.

55

ftp

mdelete [<remote-files>]

Deletes remote-files in the remote operation terminal.

mkdir <directory-name>

Creates a directory in the remote operation terminal.

open <host> [<port>]

Establishes a connection with the FTP server with the specified address. If an optional port number is specified, tries to connect to the FTP server in that port.

prompt

Switches the conversational mode prompt on/off. When multiple files are transferred, the relevant file can be selected separately by turning this prompt on. When it is off, mget or mput transmits the specified file unconditionally, and mdelete deletes the specified file unconditionally. The default is on.

pwd

Displays the current directory in the remote operation terminal.

quit

The same as bye.

rename <from> <to>

Changes the filename in the remote operation terminal from "from" to "to".

rmdir <directory-name>

Deletes the directory in the remote operation terminal.

status

Displays the current ftp status.

verbose

Switches the verbose output mode on/off. When the verbose output mode is on, all responses from the FTP server are displayed for the user. Also, when the file transmission ends, data transmission's statistical information is displayed. The default is on.

? [<command>]

The same as help.


[Response Messages]"Table 5-3: ftp Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the ftp command.

Table 5-3: ftp Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

?Ambiguous command Several relevant commands for specified text.

?Invalid command Specified command not found.

Not connected. Remote communication not in effect.

56

ftp

[Precautions]1. Sometimes it is not possible to log in with ftp because the user ID for the terminal where

you want to log in has no password set. Set the password for that terminal and give the ftp command again.

2. When the command input is not received, enter [Ctrl+Z] to end the ftp command.

3. When using the /source-interface parameter, the connection using IPv4 is given preference if the addresses of both of IPv4 and IPv6 are registered in the DNS server.

4. Message "500 'EPRT |1|xx.xx.xx.xx |xxxx|": command not found (xx.xx.xx.xx |xxxx is the IPv4 address/port number of this System)" may be displayed when a command is executed after this System logs in to the IPv4 host using an ftp command. However, this does not influence the operation.

Already connected to <host>, use close first. Communication with host already established. To connect with another host, end communication by (ftp) close or (ftp) quit commands. <host> Remote host IP address

connect: Connection refused Connection failed.

<filename>: No such file OR directory Specified file or directory not found.<filename> specified file name or directory name

<host>:bad port number -- <port>usage: open host-name [port]

Illegal port number was entered.<port> Port number


connect: No route to host Could not connect because no routing table to remote host.

Login failed. Login failed.

?Ambiguous help command <command> Several relevant help commands for specified text.<command> command name

Service not available, remote server has closed connection

Command not executed because connection with remote host cut off.

No control connection for command: Bad file descriptor

Command not executed because connection with remote host not controlled.

connect: Operation timed out Connection time ran out.

quit for Ctrl+Z pushed. ftp command ended by pressing [Ctrl+Z].

Not defined local address System IP address is undefined.

bind: Can't assign reguested address Illegal send source IP address is set.

<host>: Host name lookup failure Unknown host name was entered.<host> Remote host

Message Explanation

57

Chapter

6. Software Management

show versionppupdateftpbackupftprestoresynchronize

59

show version

show version

[Function]Displays the information on the software installed in this System and the board mounted on it.

[Input Format]show version [software]

[Parameters]software

Displays only the software information.

Omitted

Displays the information on the software installed in this System and the board mounted on it.


[Example]Figure 6-1: Display of Version

> show version softwareS/W: S-9182-11 08-00 [OS-R, Routing software]>

Figure 6-2: show version Command Display> show versionModel: GR4000-160ES/W: S-9182-11 08-00 [OS-R, Routing software] H/W: BCU0 HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME, Basic Control module, 0000] Serial No.: 0A0AAAAAA000311001 BCU1 HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME, Basic Control module, 0000] Serial No.: 0A0BBBBBB000311002 PRU0 HN-F9544-R22B [PRU-B, Packet Routing unit, 0000] Serial No.: 0A0CCCCCC000311001 PRU1 HN-F9544-R22B [PRU-B, Packet Routing unit, 0000] Serial No.: 0A0DDDDDD000311002 PRU2 ---------- PRU3 ---------- NIF00 HN-F9244-361T [NE1000-12T, 12-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, 0003] Serial No.: 0A0EEEEEE000311001 NIF01 HN-F9244-361T [NE1000-12T, 12-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, 0003] Serial No.: 0A0FFFFFF000311002 NIF02 ---------- NIF03 ---------- NIF04 ---------- NIF05 ---------- NIF06 ---------- NIF07 ----------BCU0/MC0: HN-F9244-66 [MC256, 256MB compact flash memory card] 00070000 S-9182-11 08-00 [OS-R, Routing software]BCU0/MC1: ---------- ----------

60

show version

BCU1/MC0: HN-F9244-66 [MC256, 256MB compact flash memory card] 00070000 S-9182-11 08-00 [OS-R, Routing software]BCU1/MC1: ---------- ---------->

Table 6-1: Version Display Explanation

Display item (Note

1)Display format Meaning

Model GR4000-40E 40E model

GR4000-80E 80E model

GR4000-160E 160E model

Serial No. (Note 5) ssssssssssssssssss Serial number

S/W S-918x-xx vvvv [OS-xxx,Routing software] (Note 2) PP model name, version, [abbreviated name, functional outline]

H/W

(Note 3) (Note 4)

BCUx HN-F9544-R5H8ME [BCU-RH8ME, Basic Control module, yyyy]

Basic control part forGR4000-80E, RM-CPU Pentium3(850MHz, 256MB), MIPS RM5261(250MHzx2) 256MB 128MB, CSWx1

HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME, Basic Control module, yyyy]

Basic control part forGR4000-160E, RM-CPU Pentium3(850MHz, 256MB), MIPS RM5261(250MHzx2) 256MB 128MB, CSWx1

PRUx HN-F9544-R22B [PRU-B, Packet Routing Module, yyyy]

Packet routing processor B router function (BGP available, full route)

HN-F9544-R23C [PRU-C, Packet Routing Module, yyyy]

Packet routing processor C router function (MPLS, BGP available, full route)

NIFxx HN-F9244-362T[NE100-48T, 48-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, yyyy]

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 48 lines

HN-F9244-361T [NE1000-12T, 12-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, yyyy]

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T 12 lines

HN-F9244-361S [NE1G-12S, 12-port 1000BASE-X(SFP), yyyy]

1000BASE-X 12 lines SFP

HN-F9244-361G [NE1G-6G, 6-port 1000BASE-X(GBIC), yyyy]

1000BASE-X 6 lines GBIC

HN-F9244-362L [NE10G-1LR, 1-port 10GBASE-LR, yyyy]

10GBASE-LR 1 line (2m - 10km)

HN-F9244-362E [NE10G-1ER, 1-port 10GBASE-ER, yyyy]

10GBASE-ER 1 line (2m - 40km)

HN-F9244-363LW [NE10G-1LW, 1-port 10GBASE-LW, yyyy]

10GBASE-LW 1 line (2m - 10km)

HN-F9244-363EW [NE10G-1EW, 1-port 10GBASE-EW, yyyy]

10GBASE-EW 1 line (2m - 40km)

HN-F9244-364SHP [NE1GSHP-4S, 4-port 1000BASE-X- SHAPER, yyyy]

1000BASE-X with SHP 4 lines SFP 1000 users x 4 QoS/PORT

BCUx/ MCx (Note 4) HN-F9244-66 [MC256, 256MB compact flash memory card]

Compact flash memory card 256MB

61

show version

(Note 1)

BCUx: x = a zero system or a one system

PRUx: x = the PRU number

NIFxx: xx = the NIF number

MCx: x = the MC number

(Note 2)

"x" included in item "S/W" shows the software type and option-license-specific information, and "v" shows the software version.

(Note 3) y in the display item "H/W" = the board's product ID.

(Note 4) When a board cannot be identified, "unknown" is displayed.

(Note 5) S of "Serial No." in the display number indicates the serial number of a board.

(Note 6)

Items "H/W" and "Serial No." show "------" if OBP power is off, for example, or if the hardware board is disconnected or when it is initialized.



[Precautions]Item "S/W" shows the information of the active or standby software if this command is inserted in an active or standby unit, respectively.

62

ppupdate

ppupdate

[Function]Updates the new software from ftp, zmodem, on the MC.

[Input Format]ppupdate [test][no-display][-f]<file-name>{primary|secondary|slot0|slot1} {active|standby}

[Parameters]test

Makes the same check as during execution. However, it does not actually update software.

no-display

Does not display the message when executing.

-f

Processes without confirmation when executing.

<file-name>

Specifies filename that executes updating.

{ primary | secondary | slot0 | slot1 }

Specifies MC that executes updating.

primary: Current MC.

secondary: Preliminary MC.

slot0: Specifies MC inserted into MC slot #0.


{ active | standby }

Specifies the mode in which updating is executed

active: Specifies active.

standby: Specifies standby.


[Example]Update the software.> enable [Enter] key pressing# ppupdate baup11.tgz [Enter] key pressingGR4000 Software update startCurrent version is x-xxxx-xx 01-00New version is x-xxxx-xx 01-01 :Update done.#

[Precautions]Confirm sufficient free space on destination MC before transferring software. Ensure the free

63

ppupdate

space by deleting any unnecessary files if free space seems insufficient. The free space on the MC, the execution time, and the confirmation message required for the update differ depending on the system configuration (for example, the current version, the new version, etc.). Check the documentation for each version.

Transfer only one PP file. Since free space on the MC is limited, it cannot store more than one PP file at a time. Delete the old PP file after completing the update.


[Response Messages]"Table 6-2: ppupgrade Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the ppupgrade command.

Table 6-2: ppupgrade Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

Can't open file name Unable to open specified file. Specify correct file name.

Invalid contents of file name Content of specified file incorrect. Specify correct file.

MC space is not enough Not enough empty space in MC to update. Ensure space required for update by deleting unnecessary files.

Version mismatch Since the version is different, unable to update. Specify update file suitable for MC software version.

Update sequence mismatch The applicable order of an update file is incorrect. Apply another update file first.

64

ftpbackup

ftpbackup

[Function]Saves copy of the operating software to the ftp server of the remote. The stored name is "MCbackup.tgz".

[Input Format]ftpbackup { primary|secondary|slot0|slot1 } <hostname> <user-id> <file-name>

[Parameters]{ primary | secondary | slot0 | slot1 }

Specifies the MC from which software is copied.

primary: Specifies the current MC

secondary: Specifies the preliminary MC

slot0: Specifies the MC inserted into MC slot #0.

slot1: Specifies the MC inserted into MC slot #1.

<hostname>

Specifies the host name of the ftp server.

<user-id>

Specifies the login user ID of the ftp server

<file-name>

Specifies the backup destination file path name of the ftp server.


[Example]Save the copy of software on the MC, inserted into MC slot #1, in the ftp server> enable [Enter] key pressing# ftpbackup slot1 ftpserver guest /var/tmp/ [Enter] key pressingPassword:#



[Response Messages]"Table 6-3: ftpbackup Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the ftpbackup command.

Table 6-3: ftpbackup Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

ftpbackup:No system mc is mounted. The specified MC is not installed.

65

ftpbackup

[Precautions]1. If connecting to the specified host fails, "Exec failed." is only displayed. In this case,

confirm that the specified host name is correct and that the connection to the host is established.

2. The software saved by the "ftprestore" command can be returned on the MC.

3. When an IP address is set to the system itself by using router-local-address (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, local-address"), it is used as a transmission source IP address during communication with the ftp server.

ftpbackup:Exec failed. Command execution fails.

ftpbackup:Write failed. Software transfer fails. Confirm the received area and the communication line status.

<host-name>: Unknown host The host name specified by <host-name> is invalid.

Login incorrect.Login failed.

Login to the specified host is not permitted. Login fails.

<path>: No such file or directory. No directory specified by <path> exists.

<path>: Permission denied. Access to the directory specified by <path> is not permitted.

MCbackup.tgz:Permission denied. No right to access the transferred MCbackup.tgz.

<path>: Not a directory. <path>is not a directory.

connection Time out. The communication with an ftp server failed.Confirm the communication with an ftp server.

Message Explanation

66

ftprestore

ftprestore

[Function]Restores the file stored in the remote server with the ftpbackup command (See "ftpbackup") to preliminary MC.

[Input Format]ftprestore <hostname> <user-id> <file-name>

[Parameters]<hostname>

Specifies host name of ftp server.

<user-id>

Specifies login user ID of ftp server.

<file-name>

Specifies store destination file path name on ftp server.

For the path name, specify the full path name or directory name of stored file. When directory name is specified the last of path name is "/"), "MC backup.tgz" is assumed as the file name.


[Example]Restores backup information to preliminary MC by specifying file name.

Figure 6-3: Restore by Specifying File Name> enable [Enter] key pressing# ftprestore ftpserver guest /var/tmp/MCbackup.tgz [Enter] key pressingPassword:#

Restores backup information to preliminary MC by specifying directory.

Figure 6-4: Restore by Specifying Directory> enable [Enter] key pressing# ftprestore ftpserver guest /var/tmp/ [Enter] key pressingPassword:#



[Response Messages]"Table 6-4: ftprestore Command Response Messages" shows the response messages of ftprestore command. "Table 6-5: Response Message Example from Peer's FTP Server" shows the message example returned from the peer when command execution failed by the decision

67

ftprestore

of peer's ftp server. This message may differ depending on the specifications of peer's ftp server. See the specifications for details.

Table 6-4: ftprestore Command Response Messages

Table 6-5: Response Message Example from Peer's FTP Server

[Precautions]1. When the connection to specified host failed, only "Exec failed." may be displayed. In this

case, confirm that the specified host name is correct and that connection to host can be established.

2. To execute this command, formatting of the MC is required in advance.

3. When an illegal file is specified as the transmission source file or command execution is not terminated normally, illegal data may be left on the MC. In this case, re-format the MC and re-execute this command.

4. When communication failed during file transmission with the ftp server, the command response may not be returned. In this case, terminate the command by entering [Ctrl+C] and confirm the communication with the ftp server.

5. If an IP address is set to the system itself by using the operational configuration definition information router-local-address (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, local-address"), the IP address is used as the transmission source IP address during communication with an ftp server.

Message Explanation

ftprestore:No secondary mc is mounted. The preliminary MC is not installed.

ftprestore:Exec failed. Command execution fails.

/secondaryMC: write failed, file system is full Transmission of software has failed. Confirm the free space of destination.

<host-name>: Unknown host The host name specified by <host-name> is invalid.

Login incorrect.Login failed.

Login to the specified host is not permitted. Login fails.

connection Time out. The communication with an ftp server failed.

Message Explanation

550 <path>: No such file or directory. The specified directory or file in <path> does not exist.

550 <path>: Not a plain file. The specified name in <path> is not a file.

550 <path>: Permission denied. Access to the specified directory or file in <path> is not allowed.

68

synchronize

synchronize

[Function]Copies the contents of the active MC to the specified MC. The contents to be copied are as follows:

1. Information file related to the redundant operation.

2. Configuration definition information file

3. Password file

4. User account

5. Home directory

6. File under /usr/home/share

7. System DUID information file of IPv6DHCP server

[Input Format]synchronize [{userfile | diff}] <targetMC>


[Parameters]userfile

Copies the files made under the home directory and under /usr/home/share.

diff

Displays the synchronization status between the specified MC and the router. Specifies to judge whether the synchronization is needed.

<targetMC>

Specifies the MC to be copied.

secondary (preliminary MC in the active system)

slot0 (MC slot0 in the active system)

slot1 (MC slot1 in the active system)

standby: primary (current MC in the standby system)

standby: secondary (spare MC in the standby system)

standby: slot0 (MC slot0 in the standby system)

standby: slot1 (MC slot1 in the standby system)

[Example]Synchronizes the current MC in the standby system.# synchronize standby:primary [Enter] key pressing

Displays a message to confirm whether synchronization is to be executed.Synchronize OK? (y/n): _

When 'y' is entered, synchronization is executed.

When 'n' is entered, synchronization is not executed and back to the command prompt.#

69

synchronize


[Response Messages]Table 6-6: synchronize Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. Only the system administrator can execute the command.

2. When S/W version of the MC mismatches, the command cannot be executed.

3. When user account is incorrect, it is the same as the currently operating user account. Therefore, the user account of the specified MC may be deleted.

4. The command is not for copying of the MC. Use the copy mc command to copy the MC. (See "copy mc")

5. When the command is executed to the MC in the standby BCU system, it may take some time to execute the command.

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. This command cannot be executed in the BCU of the standby system.

Can't execute against primary MC. Cannot be executed to the current MC.

Can't execute for software version mismatch. Cannot be executed because S/W versions of the MC are mismatched.

Can't execute against standby's MC for this system. Cannot be executed to the MC of the standby system in this system.

Can't execute against standby's MC because operation mode is simplex now.

Cannot be executed to the MC of the standby system because the system is in the simplex mode now.

Synchronization files open failed. Opening the synchronized files fails.

Synchronization files copy failed. Copying the synchronized files fails.

There is nothing mismatch items. Need not synchronize.

All the items match. Synchronization is not necessary.

There are some mismatch items. But need not synchronize.

Some items mismatched, but synchronization is not necessary.

There are some mismatch items. Please execute synchronize.

Some items mismatched. Execute the synchronization.

Configuration file is already editing, configuration file do not copy.

Copy of the configuration file fails because configuration file to be copied is open.

Configuration file copy failed because cached configuration file create failed.

Copy of the configuration file fails because cache cannot be copied to the configuration file.

Configuration file do not copy to standby BCU because standby BCU is not ready.

Copy of the configuration file fails because the BCU of the standby system is not the operation status.

Configuration file do not modified to standby BCU because configuration file is editing in standby BCU.

Copy of the configuration file fails because the configuration file of the BCU of the standby system is open.

Configuration file do not modified to standby BCU because standby BCU is not ready.

Change of the configuration file fails because communication with the RM in the standby system is unavailable.

Configuration file copy failed. Copy of the configuration file fails because of some other factor.

70

synchronize

6. When diff option is specified, NG may be displayed in the item of "home directory" because. history file in the home directory is also the objects to be compared.

7. When you log in to the standby BCU, execute the command after the logout.

8. Alternation between active and standby may be suppressed while information is being reflected on the standby BCU (about 40 seconds) after this command is inserted.

71

Chapter

7. MC Maintenance

copy mcformat mcshow mcset mc disableset mc enable

73

copy mc

copy mc

[Function]Copies all data in the current MC to the preliminary MC.

[Input Format]copy mc [{-f | file-unit}]

[Parameters]-f

Specifies command execution without a confirmation message.

file-unit

This parameter must be specified when copying between MCs having different capacities.

Default

This parameter not required to be specified when copying between MCs that have the same capacity.


[Example]Copy the contents of the current MC to the preliminary MC.

Insert the MC you will copy to into the preliminary MC slot, and enter as follows:>copy mc [Enter] key pressing

The MC copy confirmation message is displayed.Copy OK? (Primary MC -> Secondary MC) (y/n):_

When you enter 'y', the MC is copied.

If an error occurs, the error message is displayed.

When you enter 'n', the command prompt is displayed and the MC is not copied.

Displays a message indicating that the command is being executed at the time point of 15 seconds elapsed after having started the command execution.executing...

Thereafter, ' . ' is displayed additionally in 15-second interval until the command execution is finished.executing.........


[Response Messages]Table 7-1: copy mc Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

Can't gain access to primary MC card. Current MC disconnected or access to current MC failed.

Can't gain access to secondary MC card. Reserve MC disconnected or access to reserve MC failed.

illegal parameter or ATA size is unmatched. Copy source MC and copy destination MC not same capacity.

74

copy mc

[Precautions]• The standby system's current MC and preliminary MC are not available for copy source

and copy destination.

• If the copy destination MC is not formatted for this System when the file-unit parameter is specified, an error is generated.

An error occurs when the capacity of the copy destination MC is insufficient.

If a file already exists in the copy destination MC, the file with the same path name as the copy source is overwritten. The dump file under dump directory is not copied.

• When a file-unit parameter is not specified, a format mc command is not required before this command is entered.

If the copy operation with this command fails, the MC format may have been destroyed. In this case, enter the format mc command, initialize the MC, and execute copy mc again.

• The current directory cannot be recognized if this command is executed when it is located in a preliminary MC. In this case, specify the home directory using a cd command (See "cd.") or move the directory by specifying a full path.

• A temporary failure may occur in the MC when the execution result of this command is "Cannot execute (A command cannot be executed due to other factors)." In this case, execute an mc copy command again. The MC has been damaged if this error occurs during re-execution. Replace the MC.

ATA not format. Preliminary MC disconnected or access to reserve MC failed.

Can't accept mc command. copy mc command or format mc command being executed, so cannot execute command. (See "format mc.")

Can't execute. Cannot be executed for some cause not defined.

Message Explanation

75

format mc

format mc

[Function]Initializes the MC for this System.

[Input Format]format mc [-f]

[Parameters]-f

Specifies command execution without a confirmation message.


[Example]Insert the MC to be initialized into the preliminary MC slot and enter:>format mc [Enter] key pressing

After the format command is executed, the initialization confirmation message is displayed.MC initialize OK? (y/n):_

When you enter 'y', the MC is initialized.

If there is an error, the error message is displayed.

When you enter 'n', the command prompt is displayed and the MC is not initialized.

Displays a message indicating that the command is being executed at the time point of 15 seconds elapsed after having started the command execution.executing...

Thereafter, ' . ' is displayed additionally at 15-second intervals until the command execution is finished.executing.........


[Response Messages]Table 7-2: format mc Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• The MC needs to be initialized using this command only in the following cases.

1. When contents of MC were destroyed and the system will not start up.

2. When contents of MC were destroyed and the copy mc command cannot be executed.

3. Copy destination MC: when the file-unit parameter was specified with the copy mc

Message Explanation

Can't gain access to secondary MC. Preliminary MC disconnected or access to reserve MC failed.

Can't accept mc command. copy mc command or mc format command being executed, so cannot execute command. (See "copy mc.")

Can't execute. Cannot be executed for some cause not defined

76

format mc

command. (See "copy mc.")

• Using this command will delete all data in the MC (software, configuration definition, etc.).

• The preliminary MC slot number can be confirmed using the show mc command. (See "show mc.")

• The current directory cannot be recognized if this command is executed when it is located in a preliminary MC. In this case, specify the home directory using a cd command (See "cd.") or move the directory by specifying a full path.

77

show mc

show mc

[Function]Displays the format of the MC and the installed PP name.

[Input Format]show mc

[Parameters]None


[Example]Figure 7-1: Example of MC information display Command

>show mc Slot0 : primary Slot , mc-enabled HN-F9244-66 [MC256] , GR4000 format , 00070000 30,866kB used (user Area: 30,866kB , dump Area: 0kB) 200,514kB free (user Area: 175,046kB , dump Area: 25,468kB) 231,380kB total(user Area: 205,912kB , dump Area: 25,468kB) Slot1 : secondary Slot , mc-enabled HN-F9244-66 [MC256] , GR4000 format , 00070000 30,866kB used (user Area: 30,866kB , dump Area: 0kB) 200,514kB free (user Area: 175,046kB , dump Area: 25,468kB) 231,380kB total(user Area: 205,912kB , dump Area: 25,468kB)

Table 7-3: show mc Command Display Explanation

Display item

Content Detailed information

Slot* MC information on slot*

-

Slot status primary Slot: Current slotsecondary Slot: preliminary slot

MC status mc-enabled: MC access enabledmc-disabled: MC access prohibitedmc-disconnect: MC disconnected

Type Name and abbreviation of MC *1

Installation conditions GR4000 format: Format existsno GR4000 format: Formatting incomplete

Used capacity *2 File capacity used on MC *3

user area: Used capacity in user areadump area: Used capacity in dump area

Unused capacity *2 File capacity unused on MC *3

user area: Used capacity in user areadump area: Used capacity in dump area

78

show mc

*1: When cannot be determined, 'unknown' is displayed.

*2:

The values of used capacity and unused capacity represent the total value of each capacity in the user area and the dump area.

*3:

Displays the used capacity and unused capacity on the MC that is secure. When 95% or more of the capacity is used, the unused capacity may be displayed with a minus sign.

In this case, delete user files to secure the capacity.


[Response Messages]Table 7-4: show mc Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• Neither the current MC nor the preliminary MC of the BCU standby system is available

for display.

• The used and unused capacities secured by the file system on the MC are shown.

Total capacity Aggregate total of MC file system used capacity and unused capacity *3

user area: Aggregate total of used and unused capacity in the user areadump area: Aggregate total of used and unused capacity in the dump area

Message Explanation


Display item

Content Detailed information

79

set mc disable

set mc disable

[Function]Prohibits the card access until the MC is removed. After removal, access prohibition is automatically canceled.

[Input Format]set mc disable <TargetMC>

[Parameters]<TargetMC>

Specifies the target MC.

secondary

Specifies preliminary MC.

slot0

Specifies MC slot 0.

slot1



[Example]>set mc disable secondary


[Response Messages]Table 7-5: set mc disable Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• Confirm that the relevant MC is not disabled when executing the command to access the

MC.

• If this command is executed when current directory is on the reserve card, the current directory cannot be recognized. In this case, move the directory by specifying home directory or full pass using cd command. (See "cd.")

• This command cannot be executed for the current MC. "A command cannot be executed due to other factors ("Can't execute")" is output as a response message when this command is executed.

Message Explanation


Can't gain access to secondary MC card. Preliminary MC disconnected or access to preliminary MC failed.


80

set mc enable

set mc enable

[Function]Cancels the MC's card access.

[Input Format]set mc enable <TargetMC>

[Parameters]<TargetMC>

Specifies the target MC.

secondary

Specifies preliminary MC.

slot0


slot1



[Example]>set mc enable secondary


[Response Messages]Table 7-6: set mc enable Command Response Message

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation



Can't execute. Cannot execute due to undefined factors.

81

Chapter

8. File Operation

show running-config (show configuration)show startup-configcopy running-configcopy startup-configcopy backup-configerase startup-configcdpwdlsdircatcpmkdirmvrmrmdirdeleteundeletesqueezechmodzmodem

83

show running-config (show configuration)

show running-config (show configuration)

[Function]Displays operational configuration definition information.

[Input Format]show running-configshow configuration

[Parameters]None




[Precautions]It may take much time to execute a command when there are a lot of operational configuration definition information items.

84

show startup-config

show startup-config

[Function]Displays the current configuration definition information during system activation.

[Input Format]show startup-config

[Parameters]None




[Precautions]None

85

copy running-config

copy running-config

[Function]Creates the backup file (preliminary configuration definition information file) of operational configuration definition information.

[Input Format]copy running-config {startup-config | <filename>}copy <filename> running-config

[Parameters]startup-config

Stores the operational configuration definition information as startup configuration definition information while the system is starting.

<filename>

Specifies the name of a preliminary configuration definition information file.


[Example]Operational configuration definition information is stored as startup configuration definition information.# copy running-config startup-config#

[Influence on User Communication]The port in operation is restarted when a preliminary configuration definition information file is reflected onto the operational configuration definition information.

[Response Messages]"Table 8-1: copy running-config Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the copy running-config command.

Table 8-1: copy running-config Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. A configuration definition information file at the saving destination cannot be saved when

it has no write authority. Save the information file after the write authority was set using chmod command (See "chmod").

2. After the operational configuration definition information stored in memory is edited, the contents of the edited information are automatically copied to the standby BCU when parameter startup-config is specified to execute a command. The contents of the edited information are not copied to the standby BCU when the software version of the active BCU does not match that of the standby BCU, and when a router is single-operated using the set mode (See "set mode").

3. In the double-operated system, when this command is executed without editing the

Message Explanation

Copy command is failed. Because configuration file is editing.

Configuration definition information is being edited now. Operate after completion of such editing.

86

copy running-config

operational configuration definition information stored in memory, the message that the replacement of mode was suppressed may be displayed because a difference temporarily occurs in the configuration definition information of the active and the standby BCUs.

4. Whether configuration definition information was edited and saved can be recognized using configuration command status (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, status").

5. If the configuration definition command apply (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, apply") has not yet been executed after the IP routing protocol information was changed, inputting this command causes the configuration definition command apply to be executed automatically before execution of itself, and the IP routing protocol information changed is reflected in operation.

6. This command may cause an error if the NIF to be operated is not in the operational state. In such a case, insert the configuration definition command exit (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, quit (exit)") to terminate the configuration definition edition mode. Use the show nif command to confirm that the state of the NIF to be operated is active, and then execute this command to move to the configuration definition edition mode.

7. Do not enter this command when CP is in the start state (the "READY LED" is off).

87

copy startup-config

copy startup-config

[Function]Copies current configuration definition information file to that of specified MC. Changes also the operational configuration definition information in memory at the same time if the destination of the copying is an MC being used for operation.

[Input Format]copy startup-config <device>

[Parameters]<device>

Destination MC name (copied to /config/system.cnf of MC specified)

slot0: Active MC0

slot1: Active MC1

primary: Active current MC

secondary: Active preliminary MC

standby:slot0: Standby MC0


standby:primary: Standby current MC

standby:secondary: Standby preliminary MC

Slot0/slot1 indicates which physical location the MC is implemented on. Primary/secondary indicates the logical implementation in a system.


[Example]A configuration definition information file in active operation is used for standby operation.# copy startup-config standby:primary

[Influence on User Communication]The port in operation restarts if copying is reflected on operational configuration definition information.

[Response Messages]Table 8-2: copy startup-config Command Response Message

[Precautions]1. If the configuration definition information file specified has an error, the content of the

error is shown, and the file is not copied. In such a case, edit the error in the configuration definition information file with an editor, etc.

2. If the configuration definition is copied to the active current MC, a message is displayed

Message Explanation



88

copy startup-config

saying that the port in operation will restart. If the command is executed, the configuration definition specified is used for operation and the port in operation restarts. Take the proper precautions if you have logged in via the network.

3. Copying configuration definition to the active current MC of a double-operated system causes some temporary difference between the active and standby configuration definition information. This may result in the display of a message indicating that alternation between active and standby has been suppressed.

4. If copying configuration definition information to the current standby MC is tried, a message is displayed indicating that the standby system will restart. If the command is executed, the configuration definition specified is used for operating the standby system, and the standby system restarts automatically.

5. If the configuration definition information file is being edited, you cannot use copy startup-config command. First, close such file being edited and then use the copy startup-config command to exchange the configuration definition information file.

6. To change the operational configuration definition information stored in memory and copy it to the standby system, first, store such information changed in the MC by using the configuration definition command save (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, save (write)"), then copy it to the standby system by using the copy startup-config command.

7. This command copies the current configuration definition information file stored in the MC to a destination specified. Take care if you have changed operational configuration definition information stored in memory but not yet saved it to the MC.

8. If the CP, PRU, or NIF to be operated is not in the operational state, the message "NIF board is not mounted" (unknown type of package mounted) is displayed and no configuration definition information can be copied. In such a case, execute the copy startup-config command again after confirming that the CP, PRU, or NIF to be operated has come into the operational state.

9. If configuration definition command apply (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, apply") has not yet been executed after IP routing protocol information was changed, inputting this command causes the configuration definition command apply to be executed automatically before execution of itself, and the IP routing protocol information changed is reflected in operation.

10. If free space is running short in the MC, you cannot copy configuration definition information. Use the show mc command to check free space in the user domain. Copying requires the same size space as the current configuration definition information file (/config/system.cnf). About 12MB of free space is needed for the maximum size of such information.


89

copy backup-config

copy backup-config

[Function]Copies specified current configuration definition information file to that of the specified MC. Changes also the operational configuration definition information in memory at the same time if the destination of the copying is an MC being used for operation.

[Input Format]copy backup-config <filename> <device>

[Parameters]<filename>

Source configuration definition information file name (a file of file name "primary" cannot be specified.)

<device>

Destination MC name (copied to /config/system.cnf of MC specified)

slot0: ActiveMC0

slot1: ActiveMC1

primary: Active current MC

secondary: Active preliminary MC



standby:primary: Standby current MC

standby:secondary: Standby preliminary MC

slot0/slot1 indicates physical location MC is implemented on. primary/secondary indicates logical implementation in a system.


[Example]A configuration definition information file "original.cnf" is used for operation.# copy backup-config original.cnf primary

[Influence on User Communication]The port in operation restarts if copying is reflected on operational configuration definition information.

[Response Messages]Table 8-3: copy backup-config Command Response Message

Message Explanation



90

copy backup-config

[Precautions]1. If the configuration definition information file specified has an error, the content of the

error is shown, and the file is not copied. In such a case, edit the error in the configuration definition information file with an editor, etc.

2. If the configuration definition is copied to the active current MC, a message is displayed saying that the port in operation will restart. If the command is executed, the configuration definition specified is used for operation and the port in operation restarts. Take the proper precautions if you have logged in via the network.

3. Copying configuration definition to the active current MC of a double-operated system causes some temporary difference between the active and standby configuration definition information. This may result in the display of a message indicating that alternation between active and standby has been suppressed.

4. If copying configuration definition information to the current standby MC is tried, a message is displayed indicating that the standby system will restart. If the command is executed, the configuration definition specified is used for operating the standby system, and this system restarts automatically.

5. If the configuration definition information file is being edited, you cannot use copy backup-config command. First, close such file being edited and then use the copy backup-config command to exchange the configuration definition information file.

6. To change the operational configuration definition information stored in memory and copy it to the standby system, first, store such information changed in the MC by using the configuration definition command save (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, save (write)"), then copy it to standby system by using the copy backup-config command.

7. Copies the current configuration definition information file stored in the MC to the destination specified, if /config/system.cnf is specified as copying source. Take care if you have changed operational configuration definition information stored in memory but not yet saved it to the MC.

8. If the CP, PRU, or NIF to be operated is not in the operational state, a message "NIF board is not mounted" (unknown type of package mounted) is displayed and no configuration definition information can be copied. In such a case, execute the copy backup-config command again after confirming that the CP, PRU, or NIF to be operated has come into the operational state.

9. If the configuration definition command apply (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, apply") has not yet been executed after the IP routing protocol information was changed, inputting this command causes the configuration definition command apply to be executed automatically before execution of itself, and the IP routing protocol information changed is reflected in operation.

10. If free space is running short in the MC, you cannot copy configuration definition information. Use the show mc command to check free space in the user domain. Copying requires the same size space as the current configuration definition information file (/config/system.cnf) and the configuration definition information being edited. About 12MB of free space is needed for the maximum size of such information.


91

erase startup-config

erase startup-config

[Function]Returns the contents of a current configuration definition information file to the initial setting.

[Input Format]erase startup-config

[Parameters]None


[Example]Returns the contents of a current configuration definition information file to the initial setting.# erase startup-configDo you wish erase current configuration file (y/n):

Do you wish erase current configuration file (y/n):#



[Precautions]1. When this command is executed, all ports in operation stop. For logging in via a network,

note that the session is disconnected when this command is executed.

2. This command cannot be used during editing of a configuration definition information file. Close the configuration definition information file during editing, and then return the configuration definition information file to the initial setting using this command.

3. Initializing the configuration definition of a double-operated system causes some temporary difference between active and standby configuration definition information. This may result in the display of a message indicating that alternation between active and standby has been suppressed.

4. If the configuration definition subcommand apply (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, apply") has not yet been executed after the IP routing protocol information was changed, inputting this command causes the configuration definition subcommand apply to be executed automatically before execution of itself, and the IP routing protocol information changed is reflected in operation.

92

cd

cd

[Function]Moves the current directory position.

[Input Format]cd [<directory>]

[Parameters]<directory>

Specifies the directory name at the moving destination. During default setting, the directory position is moved to the home directory of a local user.


93

pwd

pwd

[Function]Displays the path name of current directory.

[Input Format]pwd

[Parameters]None


94

ls

ls

[Function]Displays the file directory that exists in the current directory.

[Input Format]ls [<option>] [<names>]

[Parameters]<option>

During default setting, this parameter lists the contents of the current directory.

-a: Displays the contents of the current directory including hidden files.

-l: Displays the detail information related to the file directory.

<names>

Specifies the file name or directory name.


95

dir

dir

[Function]Displays the file list on the MC for this System deleted in the restorable format When /all, summer or /deleted parameters are omitted, this command works as the same function with the ls command (See "ls").

[Input Format]dir /all [summary]dir /deleted [{ primary | secondary | slot0 | slot1 }]

[Parameters]/all

Displays the file list on the current directory. The files deleted using delete are displayed with the index added. Displays deleted file names (the files deleted by the delete command) (See "delete") in brackets ( [ ] ).

summary

Displays the file list on the current directory. Displays the files deleted by the delete command by adding index. Displays the deleted files in brackets ( [ ] ). During default setting, a file list is displayed including detail information.

/deleted

Displays all deleted files on the specified MC by adding index. Displays deleted file as full path name in brackets ( [ ] ).


Specifies the MC that displays a deleted file.

primary: Specifies current MC.

secondary: Specifies preliminary MC.



During default setting, a file in the MC of the current route is displayed.


[Example]Displays the file of the current directory on the MC including deleted file:

Figure 8-1: Display of Files by /all and summary Parameter> dir /all summary [Enter] key pressingDirectory of ./:userfile1 userfile2 userfile3[userfile4]>

Displays the files of the current directory on the MC within detailed information. An index No. is added to a deleted file:

Figure 8-2: Display of Files by only /all Parameter> dir /all [Enter] key pressing

96

dir

Directory of ./: - -rw-r--r-- user user 123117 Jan 27 14:18 userfile1 - -rw-r--r-- user user 344 Jan 27 14:55 userfile2 6 -rw-r--r-- user user 16 Jan 27 17:57 [userfile3] >

Displays deleted files on the MC of the current route with additional information and index Nos.:

Figure 8-3: Display of Deleted Files> dir /deleted [Enter] key pressingDirectory of /mc0: 4 user2 user 5555 Jan 27 11:10 [/usr/home/user2/testfile] 6 user1 user 16 Jan 27 17:57 [/usr/home/user1/usefile4]>

Displays deleted files on the specified MC with additional information and index No.:

Figure 8-4: Display of Deleted Files> dir /deleted slot1 [Enter] key pressingDirectory of slot1: 1 user1 user 234566 Jan 26 09:25 [/usr/home/user1/test1] 2 user2 user 3736 Jan 26 14:31 [/usr/home/user2/test1] 3 user3 user 1317060 Jan 26 14:39 [/usr/home/user3/test1] 4 user3 user 76830 Jan 26 14:42 [/usr/home/user3/test2]>

[Display Explanation]Table 8-4: Contents of Display during /all Option Specification

Position (Digit)

Item Explanation

1 - 2 Index No. Displays index No. (1 - 64) of deleted file.

4 - 13 File attribute Symbol meanings:d: Directory attributer: With read authorityw: With write authorityx: With execution authorityDisplayed position meanings:+0 digit: Directory attribute+1 disit: Read authority of owner+2 disit: Write authority of owner+3 disit: Execution authority of owner+4 disit: Read authority of group+5 disit: Write authority of group+6 disit: Execution authority of group+7 disit: Read authority of other+8 disit: Write authority of other+9 disit: Execution authority of other

15 - 22 Owner name Displays owner name of file.

24 - 31 Group name Displays group name of file.

33 - 40 File size Displays file size in byte.

42 - 51 Date of file update Displays date of file update.

53 - File name Displays file name.

97

dir

Table 8-5: Contents of Display during deleted Option Specificationa


[Response Messages]"Table 8-6: dir Command Response Message" shows the response messages displayed by the dir command.

Table 8-6: dir Command Response Message

Position (Digit)

Item Explanation

1 - 2 Index No. Displays index No. (1 to 64) of deleted file.

4 - 9 Owner name Displays owner name of file.

11 - 16 Group name Displays group name of file.

18 - 25 File size Displays file size in byte.

27 - 38 Date of file update Displays date of file update.

40 - File name to delete Displays file name to delete.

Message Explanation

dir: Current directory is not MC. The current directory is not MC. Move to the correct directory.

98

cat

cat

[Function]Displays the contents of the specified file.

[Input Format]cat [<option>] <filename>


-n: The contents of a file are displayed with the line number added.

<file name>

Specifies the file name to be displayed.


99

cp

cp

[Function]Copies a file.

[Input Format]cp [<option>] <file name1> <file name2>


-r: Copies a file to the directory.

-i: Confirms whether a file or directory can be overwritten when it already exists at the destination to which a file is copied.

<file name1>

Specifies the file from which a file is copied.

<file name2>

Specifies the file to which a file is copied.


100

mkdir

mkdir

[Function]Creates a new directory.

[Input Format]mkdir [<option>] <directory>


-p: Creates it as required when a parent directory does not exist.

<directory>

Specifies the newly created directory name.


101

mv

mv

[Function]Moves a file and changes the file name.

[Input Format]mv [<option>] <file name1> <file name2>mv [<option>] <directory1> <directory2>mv [<option>] <names> <dir>


-f: Moves a file forcibly without response request.

<file name1>

Specifies the file name from which a file is moved (the file name before a name is changed).

<file name2>

Specifies the file name to which a file is moved (the file name after a name is changed).

<directory1>

Specifies the directory name from which a file is moved (the file name before a name is changed).

<directory2>

Specifies the file directory name to which a file is moved (the file name after a file is changed).

<names>

One or more file names or directory names from which files are moved.

<dir>

Specifies the file to which a file is copied.


102

rm

rm

[Function]Deletes the specified file.

[Input Format]rm [<option>] <file name>


-r: Deletes all files below the specified directory.

<file name>

Specifies the file name or directory name to be deleted.


103

rmdir

rmdir

[Function]Deletes the specified directory.

[Input Format]rmdir <directory>

[Parameters]<directory>

Specifies directory name to be deleted.


104

delete

delete

[Function]Deletes the file on the MC for this System in the restorable format. Up to 64 files per MC can be deleted.

[Input Format]delete <file-name>

[Parameters]<file-name>

Specifies the file name to be deleted.


[Example]Delete the file in the restorable format.

Figure 8-5: delete File> delete userfile [Enter] key pressing>


[Response Messages]"Table 8-7: delete Command Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the delete command.

Table 8-7: delete Command Messages

[Precautions]1. The delete command is effective to the file on the MC. It cannot operate the file on Ram

disk (memory).

2. The delete command cannot be used when there is not enough space on the MC to store the file in restorable format.

3. Use the undelete command to restore a file deleted by the delete command (See

Message Explanation

delete: Delete command can not be used this MC. (<code>)

Delete command cannot be used in this MC. (<Internal code>).

delete: Directory is specified. Directory is specified.

delete: No MC file is specified. The specified file does not exist.

delete: No such file or directory. The specified file does not exist or the current directory is not valid.

delete: Not enough MC space. The space area in the MC for executing this command is insufficient.

delete: Permission denied. There is no authority to delete the specified file.

delete: Specify file name. Specify file name.

105

delete

"undelete").

4. Use the squeeze command to completely delete a file deleted by the delete command (See "squeeze").

5. Use the dir command to confirm a file has been deleted by the delete command (See "dir").

6. The operation is out of guarantee if the delete command is executed to an MC other than this System.

106

undelete

undelete

[Function]Restores a file on the MC for this System that was deleted by the restorable format.

[Input Format]undelete <index> [{ primary | secondary | slot0 | slot1 }]

[Parameters]<index>

Specifies the index No. of the file to be restored. Index No. is a unique No. in the unit of file allocated to the deleted file when the file is displayed by using the dir/all or dir/ delete command (See "dir").


Specifies the MC to which the file to be restored exists.





During default setting, MC of current route is assumed.


[Example]Restores a deleted file that was deleted with delete command.

Figure 8-6: File Restoration> dir /all [Enter] key pressing Directory of ./: - -rw-r--r-- user user 123117 Jan 27 14:18 userfile1 - -rw-r--r-- user user 344 Jan 27 14:55 userfile2 - -rw-r--r-- user user 22310 Jan 27 17:38 userfile3 6 -rw-r--r-- user user 16 Jan 27 17:57 [userfile4]> undelete 6>


[Response Messages]"Table 8-8: undelete Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the undelete command.

Table 8-8: undelete Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

undelete: Current directory is not MC. The current directory is not MC. Move to the correct directory.

107

undelete

[Precautions]1. This command is effective for a file on the MC deleted by the delete command (See

"delete"). A file deleted by the rm command (See "rm") or other cannot be restored.

2. When there is no directory to store the restored file on the MC, the file cannot be restored.

3. To confirm the index of the deleted file to be restored by the undelete command, use the dir command.

4. A file completely deleted by the squeeze command (See "squeeze") cannot be restored by the undelete command.

5. When specifying of the MC is omitted to execute the undelete command and the current directory is not the MC, this command fails.

6. The operation is out of guarantee if the undelete command is executed to an MC other than this System.

undelete:Directory is not found for undelete file. There is no directory to undelete the specified file. Make the directory to store the file.

undelete: Exist same name file or directory. A file or directory of the same name already exists in the directory for the specified file.

undelete: Invalid index value. Specify decimal value for index.

undelete: No such file or directory. The current directory is invalid.

undelete: Not found undelete file. The specified file does not exist.

undelete:Permission denied of directory for undelete file.

There is no authority to write to the directory to which the specified file is stored.

undelete: Permission denied. There is no access authority to the current directory or the specified file.

undelete:Specify correct deleted index number. Specify the correct index number to the file to be deleted.

undelete: Specify correct index number [1-64]. Specify a number from 1 - 64 for the index number.

undelete: Specify index number. Specify the index No.

undelete:Undelete command can not be used this MC. (<code>)

Undelete command cannot be used with this MC. (<Internal code>).

Message Explanation

108

squeeze

squeeze

[Function]Deletes completely the deleted file (by the delete command ) in the restorable format on the MC for this System.

[Input Format]squeeze [{ primary | secondary | slot0 | slot1 }]

[Parameters]{ primary | secondary | slot0 | slot1 }

Specifies the MC that erases a deleted file.





During default setting of MC specification, a deleted file in the MC of the current route is erased.


[Example]Deletes completely a file deleted by the delete command.

Figure 8-7: squeeze File> squeeze [Enter] key pressingAll deleted files will be erased. (y/n)?:ySqueezing...Done>


[Response Messages]"Table 8-9: squeeze Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed by the squeeze command.

Table 8-9: squeeze Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

Deleted files will be erased. OK ? (y/n): Deletes deleted file. Enter "y" (yes) or "n" (no).

Squeezing Squeezing Deleting

Done Deleting is completed.

Canceled Deleting is canceled.

squeeze: Current directory is not MC. Current directory is not MC.

109

squeeze

[Precautions]1. The squeeze command is available to the file on the MC.

2. The file deleted by the squeeze command cannot be restored by the undelete command (See "undelete").

3. The operation is out of guarantee if the squeeze command is executed to an MC other than this System.

squeeze: No such file or directory. Current directory is invalid. Move to the current directory.

squeeze: Permission denied. There is no access authority in the current directory. Move to the current directory.

squeeze:Squeeze command can not be used this MC.(<code>)

The squeeze command cannot be used by the target MC.

Message Explanation

110

chmod

chmod

[Function]Changes the access right of the specified file or directory.

[Input Format]chmod [<option>] <mode> <file name>


-R: Changes the access right of a file or directory recursively.

<mode>

Specifies access right. (The access right can be specified using an absolute value or symbol.)

<file name>

Specifies file name.


111

zmodem

zmodem

[Function]Transfers files between this System and consoles connected to it using RS232C.

[Input Format]zmodem getzmodem put <file name>

[Parameters]get

Transfers file from console to this System.

put <file name>

Transfers file from this System to console.


[Example]The following examples use hyper terminal communications software under Microsoft Windows 95.

1. To transfer filename/config/system.cnf from this System to the console: Select "Transfer > Reception of the file" in the hyper terminal software from the console. Decide "the place to save the received file" in the file receiving window and choose Zmodem for "Protocol used". When you execute the following command after closing the file receiving window by clicking Close, the file transfer begins.zmodem put /config/system.cnf [Enter] key pressing

2. To transfer backup.cnf from the console to this System:zmodem get [Enter] key pressing

Select "Transfer > File transmission" in the hyper terminal software from the console. Enter backup.cnf in the file transmission window and choose Zmodem for "Protocol". The file transfer begins when you click the Transmit button.


[Response Messages]"Table 8-10: zmodem Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the zmodem command.

Table 8-10: zmodem Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

<file>: No such file. Transferred file not found. <file> file name

Execute only console machine. Command can be executed only from the console, not from the remote operation terminal.

ttyname error. Cannot recognize terminal type.

Receive skipped : <file> (already exists) Receiving is stopped because the file of the same name already exists. <file> file name

112

zmodem

[Precautions]1. This command is executable only from the console, not from the remote operation

terminal.

2. When the file transfer is interrupted due to cable problems, etc., while executing this command, an error is returned:

• in zmodem get due to a transfer interruption of one minute.

• in zmodem put due to a transfer interruption of one minute.

3. When the file transfer is executed, the control code is displayed on the screen and may be disregarded. it will not disrupt the file transfer operation. Disregard it. The character displayed on the screen is not especially significant.

4. The zmodem communication settings are as follows:

• Character length = 8 bits

• Transmission rate = 9600 bps/4800 bps/2400 bps

• Stop bit length = 1 bit /2 bits

• Parity = None

Receive skipped : <file> (permission denied) Receiving is stopped because executed user has no right to write the file or directory. <file> file name

Message Explanation

113

Chapter

9. Utility

diffgrep (egrep,fgrep)morelessvisorttailhexdump

115

diff

diff

[Function]Compares the two files specified and displays the difference.

[Input Format]diff [<option>] <file name1> <file name2>diff [<option>] <directory1> <directory2>


-i: Ignores the difference in upper- and lower-case letters.

-r: Applied to the common subdirectory recursively (when a directory is specified).

<file name1> <file name2>

Specifies the file name to be compared.

<directory1> <directory2>

Specifies the directory name to be compared.


116

grep (egrep,fgrep)

grep (egrep,fgrep)

[Function]Searches the specified file and outputs lines including the specified pattern.

(An egrep command can use more formal representation formats than a grep command. An fgrep command specifies only a fixed-length character string as a pattern and searches it at high speed.)

[Input Format]grep[<option>] <pattern> [<file name>]


-n: Puts line numbers at the beginning of each line of a search result.

-i: Searches a file without distinguishing upper- and lower-case letters.

<pattern>

Specifies a search character string.

<file name>



117

more

more

[Function]Displays the contents of the specified file by one screen.

[Input Format]more [<option>] <file name>


Specifies option.

<file name>



118

less

less

[Function]Displays the contents of the specified file by one screen.

[Input Format]less [<option>] <file name>


-m: Displays the percentage of the current line in a prompt at all times.

-N: Displays line numbers at the beginning of each line.

<file name>



119

vi

vi

[Function]Edits the specified file.

[Input Format]vi [<option>] <file name>


-R: Opens a file in the read-only mode.

<file name>

Specifies the file name to be edited. A file is newly created when it does not exist.


120

sort

sort

[Function]Sorts all lines of the specified file and displays the result.

[Input Format]sort [<option>] <file name>


-r: Sorts lines in the reverse order.

<file name>



121

tail

tail

[Function]Outputs the lines following the specified position of the specified file.

[Input Format]tail [<option>] <file name>


-n: Outputs the n line(s) from the end.

<file name>



122

hexdump

hexdump

[Function]Displays a hexadecimal dump.

[Input Format]hexdump [<option>] <file name>


-b: Displays for each byte in octonary.

-c: Displays for each byte using a character.

<file name>



123

PART 3: System Operation and Maintenance

Chapter

10. System Management

show systemclear counters systemclear control-countershow power-supplyreloadclose rmEthernetfree rmEthernettest interfaces rmEthernetno test interfaces rmEthernetshow tech-supportshow tcpdump (tcpdump)ttcpshow pru resources

125

show system

show system

[Function]Displays the operation status in the RM/CP.

[Input Format]show system

[Parameters]None


[Example]The examples of operation status are shown as follows.

Figure 10-1: Display Example of Standard Operation> show system2003/01/11 19:30:15System : GR4000-160E1, S-9182-11 08-00 [OS-R]Node : Name=System Name Contact=Contact Address Locate=Location Node Info : Duplex Mode PRU-Resource : router-b1 IP Routing Entry : Unicast : current number=5 , max number=256000 Multicast : current number=0 , max number=8192 ARP : current number=2 , max number=128000 IPv6 Routing Entry : Unicast : current number=2 , max number=32000 Multicast : current number=0 , max number=8192 NDP : current number=2 , max number=32000 FAN : Active No=FAN0(1) , FAN0(2) , FAN0(3) , FAN1(4) , FAN1(5) , FAN1(6) Speed=Normal POW0 : Active POW1 : Active POW2 : Disconnect POW3 : Disconnect BCU0 : Active RM-CPU : Active HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME] 0000 Boot : 2003/01/11 19:27:42 , Power ON , 0 times restart Lamp : ACTIVE LED=green , READY LED=green , EMA SUPPRESS LED=light off , ALARM LED=light off , ERROR LED=light off , 7seg=light off Board : CPU=Intel Pentium 3 850MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) Temperature : Normal(27degree) RM Ether : unused CP-CPU : Active Boot : 2003/10/11 19:27:42 , Power ON , 0 times restart Board : CPU=RM5261 250MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) MC0 : Primary Slot , MC-Enabled HN-F9244-66[MC256] , GR4000 Format , 00070000 29,563kB used (User Area: 29,563kB , Dump Area: 0kB) 200,181kB free (User Area: 176,181kB , Dump Area: 24,000kB) 229,744kB total(User Area: 205,744kB , Dump Area: 24,000kB) MC1 : Secondary Slot , MC-Disconnect

126

show system

BCU1 : Standby RM-CPU : Active HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME] 0000 Boot : 2003/01/11 19:27:43 , Power ON , 0 times restart Lamp : ACTIVE LED=light off , READY LED=green , EMA SUPPRESS LED=light off , ALARM LED=light off , ERROR LED=light off , 7seg=light off Board : CPU=Intel Pentium 3 850MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) Temperature : Normal(28degree) CP-CPU : Active Boot : 2003/01/11 19:27:43 , Power ON , 0 times restart Board : CPU=RM5261 250MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) MC0 : Primary Slot , MC-Enabled HN-F9244-66[MC256] , GR4000 Format , 00070000 29,563kB used (User Area: 29,563kB , Dump Area: 0kB) 200,181kB free (User Area: 176,181kB , Dump Area: 24,000kB) 229,744kB total(User Area: 205,744kB , Dump Area: 24,000kB) MC1 : Secondary Slot , MC-Disconnect PRU0 : Active HN-F9544-R22B [PRU-B] Lamp : LED=green Memory : size=131,072kB(128MB) FDB : current number=2 , max number=128000 PRU1 : Active HN-F9544-R22B [PRU-B] Lamp : LED=green Memory : size=131,072kB(128MB) FDB : current number=2 , max number=128000 PRU2 : Disconnect PRU3 : Disconnect >

Figure 10-2: Display Example of Abnormality in Standby CP-CPU> show system2003/01/11 19:30:15System : GR4000-160E1, S-9182-11 08-00 [OS-R]Node : Name=System Name Contact=Contact Address Locate=Location Node Info : Duplex Mode PRU-Resource : router-b1 IP Routing Entry : Unicast : current number=5 , max number=256000 Multicast : current number=0 , max number=8192 ARP : current number=2 , max number=128000 IPv6 Routing Entry : Unicast : current number=2 , max number=32000 Multicast : current number=0 , max number=8192 NDP : current number=2 , max number=32000 FAN : Active No=FAN0(1) , FAN0(2) , FAN0(3) , FAN1(4) , FAN1(5) , FAN1(6) Speed=Normal POW0 : Active POW1 : Active POW2 : Disconnect POW3 : Disconnect BCU0 : Active RM-CPU : Active HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME] 0000 Boot : 2003/01/11 19:27:42 , Power ON , 0 times restart Lamp : ACTIVE LED=green , READY LED=green , EMA SUPPRESS LED=light off , ALARM LED=light off , ERROR LED=light off , 7seg=light off Board : CPU=Intel Pentium 3 850MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) Temperature : Normal(27degree)

127

show system

RM Ether : Unused CP-CPU : Active Boot : 2003/10/11 19:27:42 , Power ON , 0 times restart Board : CPU=RM5261 250MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) MC0 : Primary Slot , MC-Enabled HN-F9244-66[MC256] , GR4000 Format , 00070000 29,563kB used (user Area: 29,563kB , dump Area: 0kB) 200,181kB free (user Area: 176,181kB , dump Area: 24,000kB) 229,744kB total(user Area: 205,744kB , dump Area: 24,000kB) MC1 : Secondary Slot , MC-Disconnect BCU1 : Falut RM-CPU : Active HN-F9544-R5M8ME [BCU-RM8ME] 0000 Boot : 2003/01/11 19:27:43 , Power ON , 0 times restart Lamp : ACTIVE LED=light off , READY LED=green , EMA SUPPRESS LED=light off , ALARM LED=light off , ERROR LED=light off , 7seg=light off Board : CPU=Intel Pentium 3 850MHz , Memory=262,144kB(256MB) Temperature : Normal(28degree) CP-CPU : Fault MC0 : Primary Slot , MC-Enabled HN-F9244-66[MC256] , GR4000 Format , 00070000 29,563kB used (user Area: 29,563kB , dump Area: 0kB) 200,181kB free (user Area: 176,181kB , dump Area: 24,000kB) 229,744kB total(user Area: 205,744kB , dump Area: 24,000kB) MC1 : Secondary Slot , MC-Disconnect PRU0 : Fault PRU1 : Fault PRU2 : Disconnect PRU3 : Disconnect >

[Display Explanation]Table 10-1: show system Command Display Explanation (1/4)

Item Content Display Information

System System model System model

Software information Software type, version, and abbreviation

Node Node information -

Name System name User-defined name

Contact Contact location User-defined contact location

Locate Installation location User-defined installation location

Node Info Basic control mechanism configuration Simplex mode: Simplex configurationDuplex mode: Duplex configuration

PRU-Resource PRU accommodation pattern Display of pattern of accommodation by PRU

IP Routing EntryIPv6Routing EntryFDB

Number of current entries Number of IP routing entries currently registered.

Maximum number of entries Number of IP routing entries that can be registered.

FAN Main fan operation status Fan number in operation status *1

128

show system

*1:

Fan number is displayed by the consecutive number from 0. The table below shows the correspondence with names in operation log or cabinet.

Table 10-2: Correspondence of Fan Number and Operation Log or Cabinet

Table 10-3: show system Command Display Explanation (2/4)

Main fan rotation speed Normal: normal speedHigh: high speed

POW Installed status of power supply Active: normalFault: no supply/abnormal voltage

System Model Correspondence of Fan Unit

Command Display Cabinet

GR4000-80E1 FAN0(1) Fan unit, front

GR4000-80E2 FAN0(2) Fan unit, middle

FAN0(3) Fan unit, rear

GR4000-160E1 FAN0(1) Lower fan unit, front

GR4000-160E2 FAN0(2) Lower fan unit, middle

FAN0(3) Lower fan unit, rear

FAN1(4) Upper fan unit, front

FAN1(5) Upper fan unit, middle

FAN1(6) Upper fan unit, rear


BCU BCU information -

BCU operation status Active: Operational as active system.Standby: operating as standby system.Fault: problem occurring.Closed: maintenance in progressDisconnect : disconnected.Configuration Discord: Not in sync with active system due to mismatch of configuration definition information.Software Version Discord: Not in sync with active system due to mismatch of S/W version.

RM-CPU RM-CPU operation status Active: in operationFault: problem occurring.

BCU board information BCU type name, abbreviation, and product ID

Boot RM start time RM start time

RM start factors Power ON: start with power switch on.Command Reboot: reactivation (reboot command)Fatal: reactivation (problem occurred).Default Restart: reactivation by default restartHardware Reset: reactivation by reset switch


129

show system

*2: Displays "light off" when not lit.


RM reboot frequency RM reboot frequency

Lamp LED display light off: turned off.yellow: yellow lightgreen blink: blinking green light.green: green lightred: red light

7Seg display FAULT codes value *2

Board CPU information Type of CPU and clock

RM connection memory size RM connection memory size

Temperature

Temperature information

Temperature information Normal: normal, 2 oC to 43 oCCaution: caution, to 2 oC, 43 oC to 58oC Critical: warning, 58 oC to 65 oCFault: abnormal, 65 oC or more

Not support - -


RM Ether Status Active: in operationFault: problem occurringClosed: maintenance in progressUnused: configuration definition information undefinedTest: line being tested

Line speed 10BASE-T half: 10BaseT half duplex10BASE-T half (auto): 10BaseT half duplex10BASE-T full: 10BaseT full duplex10BASE-T full (auto): 10BaseT full duplex100BASE-T half: 100BaseTx half duplex100BASE-T half (auto): 100BaseTx half duplex100BASE-T full: 100BaseTx full duplex100BASE-T full (auto): 100BaseTx full duplex

MAC address Port MAC address

Description Shows the content of description configuration definition information defined for the corresponding RM Ethernet. Nothing is displayed if no description configuration definition information has been defined.

CP-CPU CP-CPU information Active: in operationFault: problem occurring.

Boot CP start time CP start time

Board CPU information Type of CPU and clock

CP connection memory size CP connection memory size

MC*3 Slot MC information -


130

show system

*3: Displays 'unknown' when identification is impossible.

*4: Displayed only when MC status is enabled.

*5:

Shows usage capacity and non-usage capacity secured in the MC file system. When usage capacity exceeds 95% of total capacity, unused capacity may be displayed with a minus sign. In this case, delete user file and secure unused capacity.


MC status MC-Enabled: MC access enabled.MC-Disabled: MC access prohibited.MC-Disconnect: MC disconnected.

Device status Primary Slot: device in useSecondary Slot: spare device

Type*4 MC type name, abbreviation *3

Installation conditions *4 GR4000 format: format completeNo GR4000 format: format incomplete

Usage capacity *4 Usage capacity in file system on MC *5

Non-usage capacity *4 Non-usage capacity in file system on MC *5

All capacity *4 Aggregate total of used and unused capacity of the MC file system *5

User Area: Aggregate total of used and unused capacity in the user areaDump Area: Aggregate total of used and unused capacity in the dump area


PRU Pattern name of hardware table resource of PRU.

Preset pattern name of hardware table resource of PRU.

PRU information of PRU number.

-

PRU operation status Active: in operationInitialize: initializing.Fault: problem occurring.Closed: maintenance in progress.Disconnect : disconnectedLocked: Operation is locked in configuration definition.Unknown: Acquisition of PRU information failed.

PRU board information Type, abbreviation of PRU board.

Lamp LED Control lamp information PRU LED lamp color'light off': turned off'yellow': yellow light'blink': blinking green light'green': green light'red': red light

Memory size Connection memory size Total memory of relevant PRU.


131

show system


[Response Messages]Table 10-6: show system Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation



132

clear counters system

clear counters system

[Function]Clears the statistical information counter of the whole system to "0".

[Input Format]clear counters system

[Parameters]None


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 10-7: clear counters system Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• The value of the MIB information acquired using SNMP is not cleared to "0" even if a

statistical information counter is cleared to "0".

Message Explanation



133

clear control-counter

clear control-counter

[Function]Clears the error retry counters of RM, CP, PRU, NIF, and Line to 0.

[Input Format]clear control-counter

[Parameters]None


[Precautions]• Number of restarts due to NIF or line troubles is indicated by the trouble retry count shown

by show nif command (see "show nif (Ethernet)") or by show interfaces command (see "show interfaces (Ethernet)"), respectively.

134

show power-supply

show power-supply

[Function]Displays voltage of each package.

[Input Format]show power-supply [bcu [<System>] | pru <PRU No.> | nif <NIF No.> ]

[Parameters]<System.>

Specifies the relevant system in the case of a duplex configuration.

standby

Specifies standby system.

active

Specifies active system.

None

Specifies active system.

<PRU No.>

Specifies relevant PRU No.

<NIF No.>

Specifies relevant NIF No.

Omitted

Specifies all the packages.


[Example]Voltage is displayed for all the packages.>show power-supply[Enter] key pressing Active BCU Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.5V 1.48V 1.8V 1.83V 2.5V 2.50V 3.3V 3.28V 5V 4.93V Standby BCU Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.5V 1.48V 1.8V 1.83V 2.5V 2.50V 3.3V 3.28V 5V 4.93V PRU0 Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.27V 1.27V

135

show power-supply

1.5V 1.52V 1.8V 1.83V 2.5V 2.48V 3.3V 3.28V 5V 4.93V PRU1 Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.27V 1.27V 1.5V 1.52V 1.8V 1.83V 2.5V 2.48V 3.3V 3.28V 5V 4.93V PRU2 Voltage Reading : Disconnected PRU3 Voltage Reading : Failure NIF0 Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.5V 1.52V 2.5V 2.48V 3.3V 3.28V 5V 4.93V NIF1 Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.5V 1.52V 1.8V 1.83V 2.5V 2.48V 3.3V 3.28V A1.8V 1.82V A3.3V 3.34V A5V 5.05V A-5.2V -5.24V NIF2 Voltage Reading : Sample Point Voltage 1.5V 1.50V 2.5V 2.48V 3.3V-1 3.31V 3.3V-2 3.32V 5V-1 5.00V 5V-2 4.98V NIF3 Voltage Reading : Disconnected NIF3 NIF4 Voltage Reading : Disconnected NIF4 NIF5 Voltage Reading : Disconnected NIF5 NIF6 Voltage Reading : Disconnected NIF6 NIF7 Voltage Reading :

136

show power-supply

Disconnected NIF7>

[Display Explanation]Table 10-8: show power-supply Command Display Explanation

[Response Messages]Table 10-9: show power-supply Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• This command cannot be executed on the standby BCU.

• Correct voltage of active BCU is not displayed after inputting the "close standby" command to turn off the standby BCU. To get the correct voltage displayed, remove the standby BCU after inputting the "close standby" command, or put the standby BCU into operation by inputting the "free standby" command.


Sample Point Sample Point Specified location for measuring voltage.• The sample point beginning with

A indicates an analog power supply.

• xxV-1 or xxV-2 indicates system 1 or 2 in the measurement position.

Voltage Voltage Voltage measured.Contact the maintenance person when the difference between the measured voltage and the voltage at a sample point exceeds 8%.

Message Explanation

Disconnected standby BCU. Standby BCU is not connected.

Illegal PRU -- <PRU No.>. PRU number is out of range. <PRU No.>PRU number

Not Operation PRU<PRU No.>. Specified <PRU No.> is not operational.

Disconnected PRU<PRU No.>. Specified <PRU No.> is not connected.

Not power supply PRU<PRU No.>. Specified <PRU No.> is not turned on.

Illegal NIF -- <NIF No.>. NIF number is out of range. <NIF No.>NIF number

Not Operation NIF<NIF No.>. Specified <NIF No.> is not operational.

Disconnected NIF<NIF No.>. Specified <NIF No.> is not connected.

Not power supply NIF<NIF No.>. Specified <NIF No.> is not turned on.



Can't read information. Cannot read information.

137

reload

reload

[Function]Restarts system or CP. Also, switches the active or standby system to the other if restart of the entire active system in the duplex configuration is specified.

[Input Format]<Format 1>

reload [{secondary | stop}] [{no-dump-image | dump-image}] [-f] [<System>]

<Format 2>reload cp [{no-dump-image | dump-image}] [-f] [<System>]

[Parameters]secondary

Restarts software with MC slot 1 preferred.

no-dump-image

Collects no log and dump.

dump-image

Collects a log and dump.

-f

Executes a command without a confirmation message.

stop

Stops the System without restarting it.

<System>

Specifies the mode to be treated for restart in double configuration.

standby

Specifies the standby mode.

active

Specifies the active mode. Switches active or standby system to the other if system is restarted; not if CP is restarted.

None

• In the case of <Format 1>

Collects a log and dump and restarts the whole system.

• In the case of <Format 2>

Collects a log and dump and restarts the CP of whole system.


[Example]Restart the whole system in the active mode.>reload active [Enter] key pressing

138

reload

A confirmation message for collecting and restarting log information is displayed when a reload command is activated.Writing log information to MC and restart (y/n):_

When you enter 'y', a restart acceptance message is displayed and log information is written in the MC for restart. The message below is displayed when dump information has been already collected.act:old dump file(cp00.cmd 01/01 00:00) delete OK? (y/n):_

When you enter 'y', the conventional dump file is deleted.

When you enter 'n', the current state returns to the command input wait state without restart.

When you enter 'n', a confirmation message is displayed without restart.Restart OK? (y/n):_

When you enter 'y', a restart acceptance message is displayed and the System is restarted with the log information not written in the MC. When you enter 'n', the current state returns to the command input wait state without restart.


[Response Messages]Table 10-10: reload Command Response Messages

[Precautions]When the whole system is restarted, communication is interrupted during restart. Do not touch it because an MC is accessed during restart.

The execution result of a command for each state in the standby mode is shown in "Table 10-11: Execution Result During Restart of Whole Router" when the restart of the whole system is specified as a parameter.

Table 10-11: Execution Result During Restart of Whole Router

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. In the specified parameter, this command cannot be executed on the standby BCU.

Disconnected standby BCU. Standby BCU was not installed or the access to the standby BCU failed. Check the state of the standby mode.

Now, system is simplex mode. A command cannot be executed to the standby BCU because the System is in the simplex mode.


Can't execute restarting of standby BCU because standby BCU is not ready.

Standby BCU is un-installed, or access to the standby BCU has failed. Confirm the status of the standby BCU.

State In Standby Mode Execution Result of Reload Command During Restart Specification of Whole System

Package not installed. Only the active mode is restarted.

Failure A command cannot be executed. (*1)

Normal (during simplex operation). The whole System is restarted.

Normal (during duplex operation). The whole System is restarted.

Maintenance The whole System is restarted.

139

reload

(*1)

Specify standby mode 'active' in parameter <System> when the system is restarted with the standby mode put into the failure state.

The standby mode is restarted when it is specified as the mode to be restarted during simplex operation.

The command for RM-PK stopped using a reload stop command may display the messages below as an execution result or error message.

show system and standby state display of MIB information: fault.

reload stop standby and error message display of show logging standby:

Disconnected standby BCU.

Error message display of free standby: standby BCU is already active.

140

close rmEthernet

close rmEthernet

[Function]Sets an RM Ethernet port temporarily from the operation state to the blocking state without changing the operational configuration definition information stored in memory.

[Input Format]close rmEthernet

[Parameters]None


[Example]Sets an rmEthernet port to closed status. > close rmEthernet >


[Response Messages]Table 10-12: close rmEthernet Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• This command does not alter configuration information, including the one in memory.

• When the system is restarted after this command is executed, the closed status will be cancelled.

• To return the RM Ethernet port closed by this command to operation status, use the free rmEthernet command (See "free rmEthernet").

Message Explanation / Action

Not operational interface rmEthernet. rmEthernet not in operation status.

Line test executing. Line test is in progress.

Can't accept command (system is busy). Command cannot be accepted (because system is busy).



No such interface -- rmEthernet. rmEthernet is not found.

141

free rmEthernet

free rmEthernet

[Function]Returns the RM Ethernet port closed by rmEthernet command to operation status, use the close rmEthernet command (See "close rmEthernet").

[Input Format]free rmEthernet

[Parameters]None


[Example]Returns rmEthernet command to operation status. > free rmEthernet >


[Response Messages]Table 10-13: free rmEthernetCommand Response Messages

[Precautions]• This command does not alter configuration information, including the one in memory.


interface rmEthernet:administratively freed. rmEthernet was made free.

Not operational interface rmEthernet. rmEthernet not in operation status.



rmEthernet is already active. rmEthernet has already been put into the operation state.

No such interface -- rmEthernet. rmEthernet is not found.

142

test interfaces rmEthernet


[Function]Starts the line test of an RM Ethernet port.

To carry out a line test, the relevant line needs to be defined by configuration definition information.

[Input Format]test interfaces rmEthernet internal [pattern <TestPatternNo>]

[Parameters]internal

Specifies the module internal loop-back test.

pattern <Test Pattern No.>

Specifies the test pattern number (1-4). When omitted, the test pattern used is number 3.

0: Repeats test patterns 1 through 4 in order.

1: all 0xff

2: all 0x00

3:

"** THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG.0123456789 **" repeating pattern

4: The pattern of NIF data transformation detection.



[Response Messages]test interfaces rmEthernet command response messages are shown in "Table 10-14: test interfaces rmEthernet Command Response Messages".

Table 10-14: test interfaces rmEthernet Command Response Messages



Illegal test pattern -- <TestpatternNo>. Test pattern number is out of range.<TestpatternNo> Test pattern number

Test already executing. Line test is already in progress.

No configuration rmether. rmEthernet is not defined in configuration definition information.

Not start condition. Test not in start-enable status.


143


[Precautions]• If the relevant line is in operation when the test starts, operation of that line temporarily

stops so the test can be carried out. After the line test, operation automatically resumes. That is, the line being tested is not operational until the test is over. Take the proper precautions.

• After the line test starts, it is repeatedly carried out until a line test stop occurs.

144

no test interfaces rmEthernet

no test interfaces rmEthernet

[Function]Stops the line test of an RM Ethernet port and displays the test result.

To carry out a line test, the relevant line needs to be defined by configuration definition information.

[Input Format]no test interfaces rmEthernet

[Parameters]None



[Response Messages]no test interfaces rmEthernet command response messages are shown in "Table 10-15: no test interfaces rmEthernet Command Response Messages".

Table 10-15: no test interfaces rmEthernet Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• When line test results are shown, total numbers of Receive-OK and Receive-NG may be

less than those of Send-OK by one occasionally. This is because the results are displayed after transmission was interrupted by timing when the test was stopped, holding the receiving side that is waiting for test frame sent to it.



Test not executing. Line test is not in progress.

No configuration rmether. rmEthernet is not defined in configuration definition information.


145

show tech-support

show tech-support

[Function]Extracts the information indicating the state of hardware and software that technical support requires.

[Input Format]show tech-support [page][<password>][no-config][detail][ftp]

[Parameters]page

Displays the extracted information on the console terminal screen by a one-page console terminal screen. To display the next one-page information, press the space key. To display the next one-line information, press the [Enter] key. The function of this parameter is invalidated when an ftp parameter is specified.

<password>

Enter the password when the password of the system administrator mode is set.

A password can be omitted when the password of the system administrator mode is not set. The execution result of the command (e.g., show running-config command) exclusively used for the system administrator mode is not extracted when the password of the system administrator mode is set or when a password is incorrectly input or omitted.

no-config

Extracts no configuration definition information. Configuration definition information is extracted during default setting of this parameter.

detail

Extracts the detail information indicating the state of hardware and software.

ftp

Stores the text file of the extracted information and the dump file and core file in the MC in the remote FTP server. The dump file and core file are linked to one binary file. When this parameter is specified, the extracted information is not output on the screen. Enter the information for setting the connection with the FTP server according to the response message when this parameter is specified.

Default

The basic information indicating the state of hardware and software is extracted and displayed on the console terminal screen.


[Example]1. Example of show tech-support

The basic information indicating the state of hardware and software is extracted and displayed on the console terminal screen.

Figure 10-3: Example of Extracted Information Displayed on Screen> show tech-support [Enter] key pressing########## Tech-Support Log ##########Tue Apr 15 15:48:53 2003

146

show tech-support

S/W: S-9182-11 08-01 [OS-R, Routing software] ########## version -a ##########Model: GR4000-80ES/W: S-9182-11 08-01 [OS-R, Routing software]H/W: RM0 HN-F9544-R5H8ME [BCU-RH8ME, Basic Control module, 0000] Serial No.: 0A HBN03A000R01002CL026 PRU0 HN-F9544-R22B [PRU-B, Packet Routing Processor, 0001] Serial No.: 0J HBN04B000R410032T001 PRU1 ---------- Serial No.: -------- NIF00 HN-F9244-361T [NE1000-12T, 12-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, 10000000] Serial No.: 0D0HBP03Z000C8009335058 NIF01 ---------- Serial No.: -------- NIF02 ---------- Serial No.: -------- NIF03 ---------- Serial No.: --------RM0/MC0: HN-F9531-MC64 [BMC64, 64MB compact flash memory card] 001c0001 S-9182-11 08-01 [OS-R, Routing software]RM0/MC1: ---------- ----------########## End of version -a ########## ########## information system ##########2003/04/15 15:48:53System: GR4000-80E, S-9182-11 08-01 [OS-R]Node : Name= Contact= : : : (Omitted) : : :Common-buffer : 256 256 34 0Huntfree-memory : 234 260 23 0########## End of buffer cp all show ########## Tue Apr 15 15:48:55 2003########## End of Tech-Support Log ##########>

2. Example of show tech-support ftp

The basic information indicating the state of hardware and software is extracted and saved in the FTP server together with the dump file and core file in MC. The file name is specified in "support".

Figure 10-4: Example of Execution when Saving Extracted Information in FTP Server> show tech-support ftp [Enter] key pressingSpecify Host Name of FTP Server. : [Enter] key pressingSpecify Host Name of FTP Server. : ftpserver.hitachi.co.jp [Enter] key pressingSpecify User ID for FTP connections. : user1 [Enter] key pressingSpecify Password for FTP connections. : <Password of user1> [Enter] key pressingSpecify Path Name on FTP Server. : /usr/home/user1 [Enter] key pressing

147

show tech-support

Specify File Name of log and Dump files: support [Enter] key pressingCheck and Extract Dump Files in a Standby BCU?(y/n) y [Enter] key pressingTue May 28 18:33:16 2002Trasfered support.txt .Executing.............................................................................................................................................................................Operation normal end.########## Dump files' Information ##########***** ls -l /dump0 *****total 1368-rwxr-xr-x 1 root wheel 1316167 Apr 23 21:14 rmdump-rwxr-xr-x 1 root wheel 52077 Apr 23 21:14 dpdump***** ls -l /standby/dump0 *****total 1368-rwxr-xr-x 1 root wheel 1316167 Apr 23 21:14 rmdump-rwxr-xr-x 1 root wheel 52077 Apr 23 21:14 dpdump########## End of Dump files' Information #################### Core files' Information ##########***** ls -l /primaryMC/usr/var/core ********** ls -l /standby/primaryMC/usr/var/core *****No Core Files########## End of Core files' Information ##########Trasfered support.tgz .Executing..................................................................................................................................................................Operation normal end.>

[Display Explanation]Table 10-16: show tech-support Command Display Explanation

Item Content

########## <Information Type> ########## Indicates the top section for each type of extracted information. The type of information is displayed in <Information Type>. The contents of <Information Type> are as follows:Dump files' information: List of existent dump filesCore files' information: List of existent core filesTech-Support Log: Basic information indicating the state of hardware and software.Tech-Support Detail log: Detail information indicating the state of hardware and software.

########## End of <Information Type> ########## Indicates the end section for each type of extracted information. The type of information is displayed in <Information Type>.

########## <Command Name> ########## The name of the command executed for information extraction is displayed in <Command Name>. The execution result of the command displayed in <Command Name> is displayed after this display. For the contents of the display, see the [display description] of each command displayed in <Command Name>.

148

show tech-support


[Response Messages]Table 10-17: show tech-support Command Response Messages

########## End of<Command Name> ########## This message indicates the end section of the execution result of the command displayed in <Command Name>. The name of the command executed for information extraction is displayed in <Command Name>.

Message Explanation

Sorry, already execute show tech-support Other users are executing show tech-support.

Password for Administrater Mode Invalid. The password of the system administrator mode entered using a <password> parameter is incorrect.

Is the Password retyped?(y/n) Reenter the password of the system administrator mode? Select 'y' to reenter the password. Select 'n' to continue a command with the password incorrectly entered.

Specify Password for Administrater Mode.: Enter the password of the system administrator mode.

Specify Host Name of FTP Server. : Specify the host name. The host name entered for this message is reflected on <Host Name> of the subsequent response messages.

Specify User ID for FTP connections. : Specify the login user name. The login user name entered for this message is reflected on <User ID> of the subsequent response messages.

Specify Password for FTP connections. : Enter the password of User ID entered for response message "Specify User ID for FTP connection. : ".

Specify Path Name on FTP Server. : Specify the transmission destination directory name. The transmission destination directory name entered for this message is reflected on <Path> of the subsequent response messages.

Specify File Name of log and Dump files: Specify the file name of the log and dump files. If the file name is not entered, a 14-digit numeric character for which the command execution date was used is specified as the file name. The file name entered for this message is reflected on <File Name> of the subsequent response messages.

Check and Extract Dump Files in a Standby BCU?(y/n) Check and extract the dump file in the standby MC? Select 'y' to check the dump and core files in the standby MC and save them in the FTP server. Select 'n' to save only active dump and core files in the FTP server.

Exec failed. The execution of a command failed.

Write failed. The transmission of a file failed. Check the free capacity of the transmission destination and the state of a communication line.

Operation nomal end. The transmission of a file was terminated normally.

<Host Name>: Unknown host The host name (<Host-name>) is invalid.

Login incorrect.Login failed. Login to the specified host is not recognized. Login failed.

<Path>: No such file or directory. The directory of <Path> does not exist.

Item Content

149

show tech-support

[Precautions]1. The display time on the screen is as described below when displaying the extracted

information on the screen (without an ftp parameter).

• The screen display time is five minutes if a parameter is not specified when displaying the extracted information on the screen of the console terminal connected to RS-232C. It is about 15 minutes if a detail parameter is specified.

• The screen display time is 30 seconds if a parameter is not specified when displaying the extracted information on the screen of a remote operation terminal. It is about two minutes if a detail parameter is specified.

2. The transmission time of files to the FTP server is as described below when saving the dump and core files and the extracted information in the FTP server (with the ftp option specified).

• The transmission time is one to three minutes when transmitting only the dump and core files in the active mode.

• The transmission time is 20 to 45 minutes when transmitting the dump and core files in the active and standby modes.

3. When an IP address is set to the whole system using a config system local-address command (See "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 1, local-address"), it is used as a transmission source IP address during communication with the FTP server.

4. Only dump and core files that exist in the directories below are saved in the FTP server when an ftp parameter is specified.

• Dump file storage directory

/dump0, /standby/dump0

• Core file storage directory

/primaryMC/var/core, /standby/primaryMC/var/core

<Path>: Permission denied. Access to the directory specified by <Path> is not permitted.

<File Name>:Permission denied. The file of response message <File Name> already exists in the transmission destination directory. The file has no update authority. Change the authority of the file in the transmission destination directory or change the file name to be entered.

<Path>: Not a directory. <Path> is not a directory.

connection Time out. The communication with the ftp server failed.Check the communication with the ftp server.

Message Explanation

150

show tcpdump (tcpdump)


[Function]This is a command to monitor packets sent or received by this System.

By using this command, you can check the state of communication to/from this System on layer 3 (IPv4/IPv6/ARP)) section by monitoring, for example, packets sent to this System requesting remote access, or packets of routing protocol sent from this System.

The table below shows a list of packets that can be monitored/analyzed.

Table 10-18: List of Packets That Can Be Monitored And Analyzed

[Input Format]<I/F Packet Monitoring>

show tcpdump interface <Interface Name> [no-resolv | no-domain] [abs-seq] [no-time] [brief | detail | extensive | debug] [hex | hex-ascii] [count <count>] [snaplen <snaplen>] [writefile <File Name>] [<expression>]

<Display of Packet Monitoring File>show tcpdump readfile <File Name> [no-resolv | no-domain] [abs-seq] [no-time] [brief | detail | extensive | debug] [hex | hex-ascii] [count <count>] [writefile <File Name>] [<expression>]

Note: You can enter "tcpdump" instead of "show tcpdump". Enter using the parameters below when entering as tcpdump.tcpdump -i <Interface Name> [-n | -N] [-S] [-t] [-q] [-v[v[v]]] [-x | -X] [-c <count>] [-s <snaplen>] [-w <File Name>] [<expression>]tcpdump -r <File Name> [-n | -N] [-S] [-t] [-q] [-v[v[v]]] [-x | -X]

No. Address family Type Description

1 IPv4 TCP Analyzes various types of tcp communication, such as bgp and telnet.

UDP Analyzes various types of udp communication, such as snmp and rip.

ICMP Analyzes ping etc.

OSPF Analyzes ospf routing protocol.

IGMP Analyzes igmp and dvmrp.

PIM Analyzes multicast pim.

IP-in-IP Analyzes IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel etc.

2 IPv6 TCP Analyzes various types of tcp communication, such as bgp4+ and telnet.

UDP Analyzes various types of udp communication, such as snmp and ripng.

ICMP6 Analyzes ping etc.

OSPF6 Analyzes ospf routing protocol.

PIM Analyzes multicast pim.

IP-in-IP Analyzes IPv4 over IPv6 tunnel etc.

3 ARP(UNSPEC) ARP Analyzes ARP protocol.

151

[-c <count>] [-w <File Name>] [<expression>]

[Parameters]interface <Interface Name> (-i <Interface Name>)

Monitors I/F with <Interface Name> specified.

readfile <File Name> (-r <File Name>)Reads a packet from <File Name> (created with "writefile" option).

no-resolv (-n)Converts no addresses (host address, port No., etc.) to names.

no-domain (-N)Shows no domain names of hosts. Displays, for example, "server" instead of "server.hitachi.co.jp".

abs-seq (-S)Shows TCP sequence No. with an absolute value instead of relative one.

no-time (-t)Shows no time information in each dump line.

brief (-q)Displays protocol information such as TCP and UDP by omitting parts of it in a simpler way than usual. Layer-2 section (address family) is not displayed.

detail (-v)Displays in a way that is a little more detailed than usual.

For example, information of IP packets, such as time to live, identification, total length, and options, are shown. Information of integrity checking of packets is added, too, such as checking of checksum of IP and ICMP headers.

extensive (-vv)Displays in a more detailed way than "detail".

For example, additional fields of NFS response packets are shown.

debug (-vvv)Displays in the most detailed way.

For example, sub-options of telnet protocol are shown, too.

hex (-x)Displays each packet in hex except link layer.

hex-ascii (-X)Displays ASCII characters when a hex is shown.

count <count> (-c <count>)Ends communication after receiving <count> packets.

If omitted, communication is ended by using [Ctrl+C].

snaplen <snaplen> (-s <snaplen>)Takes out <snaplen> bytes from each packet instead of the default 96 bytes. Specify a minimum value necessary to get protocol information. Set "4" or a larger value to <snaplen>, because this System handles the layer-2 section of a packet as a 4-byte Null/

152

Loopback header including an address family.

The rear part of a packet truncated by the limitation imposed by <snaplen> is output and displayed in a format, "[|<proto>]". (<proto> is the name of a protocol corresponding to the level where truncation has occurred.)

If <snaplen> is set to "0", the length required to take the entire packet is used (65535).

writefile <File Name> (-w <File Name>)Writes monitored information in <File Name> instead of analyzing and displaying packets.

<File Name> can be shown later with an option, "readfile <File Name>".

<expression>Selects the type of packet to be dumped. Monitors only the packets where <expression> is "true" if <expression> is specified.

Specify this parameter to monitor only the packets required when this System is sending/receiving a great deal of packets.

Shown below is an example of specifying <expression>:

Specify one basic element, or a combination of more than one basic element, for <expression>.

The basic element consists of combinations of <proto>, <dir>, <type>, and <id>.

These combinations are made by adding <type> in front of <id>, or adding further modifiers such as <dir>, <proto>, <proto>, and <dir> in front of <type> so that no inconsistency may occur.

Shown below are some patterns of the basic element:

Patterns of the basic element

<type> <id>

<dir> <type> <id>

<proto> <type> <id>

<proto> <dir> <type> <id>

<id>Shows the names or numbers of addresses and port numbers.

Example: 10.10.10.10, serverA, 23, telnet

<type>This modifier shows the types of what <id> is about. You can specify "host", "net", or "port" for <type>.

Example: host serverA, net 192.168, port 22

If modifier <type> is omitted in a combination with other modifiers, "host" is assumed to be specified.

Example: "src serverA" means "src host serverA".

<dir>This modifier identifies the direction of communication from and/or to <id>.

You can specify any of the following directions: src, dst, src or dst, src, and dst.

Example: src serverA, dst net fe80::/64, src or dst port telnet

153

If modifier <dir> is not specified, "src or dst" is assumed to be specified.

Example: "port telnet" means "src or dst port telnet".

<proto>This modifier puts a limitation on the range of protocols usable.

Available protocols include: ip, ip6, tcp, and udp.

Example: ip6 src fec0::1, ip net 192.168, tcp port 23

If no <proto> modifier is specified, all the protocols in a range which is not inconsistent with <type> are assumed to be specified.

Example: "port 53" means "tcp port 53 or udp port 53".

Example of basic elements

dst host <host>True if the IPv4/IPv6 address of a packet is <host>.

src host <host>True if the IPv4/IPv6 sender of a packet is <host>.

host <host>True if the IPv4/IPv6 address or sender of a packet is <host>.

You can also add either ip or ip6 in front of each conditional formula showing a host as listed above, thus restricting IPv4/IPv6.

Example: ip host <host>

Example: ip6 src host <host>

dst net <net>/<len>True if the IPv4/IPv6 destination address of a packet is included in the <net> network of "netmask" of <len> bits specified.

src net <net>/<len>True if the IPv4/IPv6 sender address of a packet is included in the <net> network of "netmask" of <len> bits specified.

net <net>/<len>True if the IPv4/IPv6 destination address of a packet is included in the <net> network of "netmask" of <len> bits specified.

dst port <port>True if the packet is of either ip/tcp, ip/udp, ipv6/tcp, or ipv6/udp, and the port No. of address is <port>.

src port <port>True if the packet is of either ip/tcp, ip/udp, ipv6/tcp, or ipv6/udp, and the port No. of sender is <port>.

port <port>True if the packet is of either ip/tcp, ip/udp, ipv6/tcp, or ipv6/udp, and the port No. of address or sender is <port>.

You can also add either tcp or udp in front of each conditional formula showing <port> as listed above, thus restricting tcp/udp.

Example: tcp src port <port>

154

Moreover, the basic elements include the following, which have no <id> specified:

ip proto <protocol>True if a packet is an IPv4 packet under the protocol number <protocol>.

ip6 proto <protocol>True if a packet is an IPv6 packet under the protocol number <protocol>.

ip multicastTrue if a packet is multicast under IPv4.

ip6 multicastTrue if a packet is multicast under IPv6.

ip, ip6, arp (specify either one)

True if a packet is ip, ip6, or arp.

tcp, udp, icmp, icmp6 (specify either one)

True if a packet is tcp, udp, icmp, or icmp6.

Combination of basic elements

A complex filtering conditional formula is made by combining the basic elements with and, or, and not.Use a pair of parentheses ( ) to group a conditional formula.

Example: host server1 and not ( port ssh or port http ) This indicates what is "host server1" and is not "port ssh or port http".

You can omit any explicit modifier.

Example: tcp dst port ftp or ssh or domain

This is equivalent to the "tcp dst port ftp, tcp dst port ssh, or tcp dst port domain".

Examples of specifying <expression>

host serverA

Monitors packets sent to/from serverA.

tcp port telnet

Monitors packets used in telnet communication.

not tcp port ssh

Monitors packets used in other than ssh communication.

host serverA and tcp port bgp

Monitors packets sent to/from serverA by bgp communication (IPv4 and IPv6).

ip6 and host serverA and tcp port bgp

Monitors packets sent to/from serverA by bgp communication (IPv6).

ip and not net 192.168.1/24

Monitors IPv4 packets whose address or sender is not network 192.168.1/24.

udp port 520 or 521

Monitors packets in rip/ripng communication (IPv4/IPv6).

ip6 proto 89

155


Monitors packets in OSPF communication (IPv6).


[Example][Display Explanation]• When monitoring IPv4/IPv6 packets

Figure 10-5: When Monitoring IPv4/IPv6 Packets

Table 10-19: IPv4/IPv6 Packet Monitor Display

• When monitoring ARP packets

Figure 10-6: When Monitoring ARP Packets

Table 10-20: ARP Packet Monitor Display

No. Content Description

1 Time stamp Displays the time stamp showing when the packet was captured (not displayed if "no-time" was specified).

2 Protocol Displays the protocol name and packet length (except NULL/LOOPBACK header 4byte). (Not displayed if "brief" was specified.)

3 IP address pair Displays the address pair of sender and destination. Alternately, displays plural address pairs for encapsulated packets like tunnel packets.

4 Protocol of a higher layer

Displays the protocol of a higher layer, such as ICMP and TCP, corresponding to the packet.

5 Monitoring statistics Displays the number of packets received.

6 Monitoring statistics Displays the number of packets missed.


1 Time stamp Displays the time stamp showing when the packet was captured (not displayed if "no-time" was specified).

2 Protocol Displays the arp and packet length (except NULL/LOOPBACK header 4byte) (not displayed if "brief" was specified).

3 Protocol of a higher layer

Displays the ARP protocol.

156

• A case where tcpdump is executed with a parameter change when a ping is sent (IPv4 and IPv6) to this System - myhost.hitachi.co.jp(20.20.20.20), v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp(fec0::2) - from both hostA.hitachi.co.jp (10.10.10.10) and v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp (fec0::1).

Figure 10-7: Execution results of interface <Interface Name># show tcpdump interface eth23tcpdump: listening on eth2320:23:10.113591 ip 84: hostA.hitachi.co.jp > myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo request20:23:10.113692 ip 84: myhost.hitachi.co.jp > hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo reply20:23:10.213696 ip6 56: v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp > v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp6: echo request20:23:10.213765 ip6 56: v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp > v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp6: echo reply ^C4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

Figure 10-8: Execution results if names are not inverse-indexed by specifying "no-resolv"

# show tcpdump interface eth23 no-resolvtcpdump: listening on eth2320:23:10.113591 ip 84: 10.10.10.10 > 20.20.20.20: icmp: echo request20:23:10.113692 ip 84: 20.20.20.20 > 10.10.10.10: icmp: echo reply20:23:10.213696 ip6 56: fec0::1 > fec0::2: icmp6: echo request20:23:10.213765 ip6 56: fec0::2 > fec0::1: icmp6: echo reply ^C4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

Figure 10-9: Execution results if host or lower-level names (domain names) are not shown by specifying "no-domain"

# show tcpdump interface eth23 no-domaintcpdump: listening on eth2320:23:10.113591 ip 84: hostA > myhost: icmp: echo request20:23:10.113692 ip 84: myhost > hostA: icmp: echo reply20:23:10.213696 ip6 56: v6hostA > v6myhost: icmp6: echo request20:23:10.213765 ip6 56: v6myhost > v6hostA: icmp6: echo reply ^C4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

Figure 10-10: Execution results if "ip6" is specified for <expression># show tcpdump interface eth23 ip6tcpdump: listening on eth2320:23:10.213696 ip6 56: v6hostA > v6myhost: icmp6: echo request20:23:10.213765 ip6 56: v6myhost > v6hostA: icmp6: echo reply ^C4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

4 Monitoring statistics Displays the number of packets received.

5 Monitoring statistics Displays the number of packets missed.


157

Figure 10-11: Execution results if "count <count>" is specified# show tcpdump interface eth23 count 3tcpdump: listening on eth2320:23:10.213696 ip6 56: v6hostA > v6myhost: icmp6: echo request20:23:10.213765 ip6 56: v6myhost > v6hostA: icmp6: echo reply20:23:10.213696 ip6 56: v6hostA > v6myhost: icmp6: echo request4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

Figure 10-12: Execution results if "no-time" is specified to display no time-stamp for each line

# show tcpdump interface eth23 no-timetcpdump: listening on eth23ip 84: hostA.hitachi.co.jp > myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo requestip 84: myhost.hitachi.co.jp > hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo replyip6 56: v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp > v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp6: echo requestip6 56: v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp > v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp6: echo reply ^C4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

Figure 10-13: Execution results if a file-name is specified with "writefile" to save dump in the file

# show tcpdump interface eth23 writefile mydumptcpdump: listening on eth23^C4 packets received by filter0 packets dropped by kernel

Figure 10-14: Execution results if a file-name is specified with "readfile" to read dump in the file and display it

# show tcpdump readfile mydump20:23:10.113591 ip 84: hostA.hitachi.co.jp > myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo request20:23:10.113692 ip 84: myhost.hitachi.co.jp > hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo reply20:23:10.213696 ip6 56: v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp > v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp6: echo request20:23:10.213765 ip6 56: v6myhost.hitachi.co.jp > v6hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp6: echo reply

Figure 10-15: Execution results if "readfile" is specified to read dump and <expression> is specified to show only "icmp"

# show tcpdump readfile mydump icmp20:23:10.113591 ip 84: hostA.hitachi.co.jp > myhost.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo request20:23:10.113692 ip 84: myhost.hitachi.co.jp > hostA.hitachi.co.jp: icmp: echo reply


158

[Response Messages]Table 10-21: show tcpdump Command Response Messages

Message Meaning

tcpdump: illegal Interface name -- <Interface Name>.

Specified I/F name, <Interface Name>, is invalid.

tcpdump: syntax error Grammar of specified filtering condition, <expression>, is invalid.

tcpdump: expression rejects all packets Specified filtering condition, <expression>, filters all the packets; change the condition.

tcpdump: unknown ip proto 'XXX' You cannot specify the proto name XXX in the filtering condition, <expression>. Specify a protocol number.

tcpdump: unknown port 'XXX' You cannot specify the port name XXX in the filtering condition, <expression>. Specify a port number.

tcpdump: WARNING: no IPv4 address assigned Displayed if no IPv4 address is assigned.

tcpdump: listening on <Interface Name> I/F <Interface Name> is being monitored.

tcpdump: invalid packet count <count> Value <count> is invalid.

tcpdump: invalid snaplen <snaplen> Value <snaplen> is invalid.

tcpdump: pcap_loop: truncated dump file The file read in is truncated halfway.

tcpdump: XXX host filtering not implemented Host filter of XXX is not supported.

tcpdump: 'XXX' modifier applied to host Modifier XXX was added to host (invalid).

tcpdump: 'XXX' modifier applied to YYY host Modifier XXX was added to host YYY (invalid).

tcpdump: unknown osi proto 'XXX' Unknown osi protocol XXX was assigned.

tcpdump: 'XXX proto' is bogus Specified protocol XXX is invalid.

tcpdump: unknown network 'XXX' Unknown network name XXX was assigned. Indicate it with an address.

tcpdump: unknown host 'XXX' Unknown host name XXX was assigned. Indicate it with an address.

tcpdump: illegal qualifier of 'port' Invalid port condition was assigned.

tcpdump: port 'XXX' is YYY Specified port XXX is under YYY protocol.

tcpdump: unknown protocol: XXX Unknown protocol XXX was assigned.

tcpdump: non-network bits set in "XXX" XXX having no host-bit 0 was assigned.

tcpdump: mask length must be <= XXX Mask length must be XXX or less.

tcpdump: Mask syntax for networks only Mask can be assigned only with "net" modifier.

tcpdump: unknown host 'XXX' for specified address family

Host XXX cannot resolve address with the specified address family.

tcpdump: XXX resolved to multiple address XXX resolved plural addresses.

tcpdump: invalid qualifier against IPv6 address Invalid modifier was assigned for an IPv6 address.

tcpdump: inbound/outbound not supported on linktype 0

Assignment of "inbound/outbound" is not supported.

tcpdump: no VLAN support for data link type 0 Assignment of VLAN is not supported.

tcpdump: bad dump file format Invalid file format

159

[Precautions]• This command allows you to monitor mainly packets processed by software, such as a

routing protocol, sent to or from this System.

• The command does not allow you to monitor any packets that are not sent to or from this System (such as packets transferred by IPv4/IPv6, MPLS or multicasting, or tunnel-processed packets). It does not allow you to monitor either any packets sent to or from this System, if they have been filtered or if they are not processed by software (such as various packets on layer 2 including PPP).

• The command allows you to monitor a packet's layer-3 section or higher, but no layer-2 section such as an Ethernet header. The layer-2 section is replaced by a header of the Null/Loopback data link type, regardless of the type of I/F name, <Name>.

• Information in the Null/Loopback header section shows an address family (ip/ip6/arp). (As for this System, the displayed "arp" corresponds to address family "unspec".)

• Null/Loopback header length is 4 bytes. If 4 bytes or smaller value is specified for <snaplen>, [|null] is displayed.

• If no "no-resolv" option is assigned, it will take a longer time until monitored situations are displayed in case the "dns-resolver" setting in configuration definition information has any problem.

• If traffic volume is great, packets monitored may be missed occasionally (counts of "packets dropped by kernel" are shown after monitoring is completed). In such a case, specify <expression> so as to monitor only required packets.

tcpdump: archaic file format Obsolete file format

tcpdump: bogus savefile header Invalid file header

tcpdump: invalid ip6 address XXX IPv6 address XXX is invalid.

tcpdump: illegal token: XXX Invalid XXX was assigned.

tcpdump: illegal char: XXX Invalid XXX was assigned.

tcpdump: WARNING: SIOCGIFADDR: Operation not permitted

Invalid I/F name was assigned. Terminate with [Ctrl+C].

tcpdump: link layer applied in wrong context Monitor on layer 2 is not supported.

tcpdump: ethernet addresses supported only on ethernet, FDDI or token ring

Monitor on layer 2 is not supported.

tcpdump: only IP multicast filters supported on ethernet/FDDI

Put "ip" or "ip6" in front if specifying multicast.

tcpdump: fread: No such file or directory Cannot read the file. (Extremely short file was specified, for example.)

tcpdump: fwrite: No space left on device Cannot write the file. (Disk capacity is running short, for example.)

tcpdump: XXX: No such file or directory Cannot find XXX.

tcpdump: XXX: Permission denied Access was not given to XXX.

tcpdump: XXX: Is a directory XXX is a directory. (Specify a file name.)

tcpdump: parse error Grammar of specified filtering condition, <expression>, is invalid.

tcpdump: No match. Specified file is not found.

Message Meaning

160

ttcp

ttcp

[Function]Measures the throughput in the TCP/UDP level between two points. Traffic can be generated between arbitrary hosts, but ttcp must be supported in both the hosts.

This function is used for test during failure occurrence or network construction. Notice that this function may influence the operation of this System when it is used during normal operation.

[Input Format]ttcp -t [<options>] [<trans-options>] <host>ttcp -r [<options>] [<recv-options>]

[Parameters]-t

Operates in the ttcp transmission mode.

-r

Operates in the ttcp reception mode.

[<options>]

-l <buf_len>

Specifies the size of the data to be transmitted and received once in bytes. The value that can be set using this option is 1 - 100000 when tcp is used. It is 1 - 65507 when udp is used. The value is set to 8192 when this option is not specified.

-u

Transmits and receives data using udp. tcp is used when this option is not specified.

-p <port_num>

Specifies the transmission destination and reception port numbers. The value that can be specified using this option is 1024 - 65535. The value is set to 5001 when this option is not specified.

-v

Displays the detailed statistical information.

-b <sock_buf_len>

Specifies the size of a socket buffer in bytes. The value that can be set using this option is 1 - 100000. The value is set as shown below when this option is not specified.

In the tcp mode, this value is reflected in the initial window size.

-f <fmt>

Specifies the unit when outputting the measurement result. The value that can be specified in <fmt> and the unit when outputting the measurement result are as shown below. The unit is displayed in kB when this option is not specified.

Item Transmission side Reception side

tcp 8192 8192

udp 9216 41600

161

ttcp

[<trans-options>]

-S

Reads transmission data from the standard input. The pattern of the data to be transmitted is automatically generated when this option is not specified.

-n <n_buf>

Specifies the number of data items to be transmitted. The number of data items is set to 2048 when this option is not specified.

-D

Prohibits the use of Nagle algorithm in TCP (TCP_NODELAY). As a result, the data smaller than MSS (Max Segment Size) is also transmitted immediately. However, this option is ignored when it is specified simultaneously with a -u option.

<host>

Specifies the remote side, that transmits data, by using an IP address or host name. An IPv4 address can be specified as an IP address.

[<recv-options>]

-S

Displays all received data on the screen. The received data is not displayed on the screen when this option is not specified.

However, do not specify this option when a -u option is specified. The reception side maintains the data wait state even if the transmission side terminates the transmission of data.

[User Level]Administrator mode

[Example]1. Generate a data pattern automatically and measure the throughput between hosts A and B

in the tcp mode.

Automatically generate the data pattern to be transmitted with terminal A having IP address 192.168.0.1 as the transmission side. Moreover, specify a -v option to display detailed statistical information.

Receive data without displaying the screen with terminal B having IP address 192.168.0.2 as the reception side and measure the throughput between hosts A and B. The reception side must be first started during measurement.

<fmt> k K m M g G

Unit kbit kB Mbit MB Gbit GB

162

ttcp

2. Measure the throughput between hosts A and B in the udp mode.

Specify a -u option on the transmission and reception sides and execute ttcp in the UDP mode.

On the transmission side, use a -f option to display the measurement result in Gbit. On the reception side, use a -f option to display the measurement result in Mbit. Generate a data pattern automatically without specifying a -S option.

[Display Explanation]The display contents of a ttcp command are shown in the table below.

163

ttcp

Table 10-22: ttcp command display

Item Content Display information

buflen=<buf_len> Transmission/reception size Displays the maximum size <buf_len> of data, which can be transmitted and received once, in bytes.

nbuf=<n_buf> Number of transmission times Displays the number of times <n_buf> by which data is transmitted.

align=<align>/<offset> Buffer area information The position shifted from the multiple value of <align> by <offset> corresponds to the top address of a buffer area.

port=<port_num> Port No. Displays the port number <port_num> on the reception side used for transmission and reception.

sockbufsize=<sock_buf_len> Socket buffer size Displays the size of a socket buffer <sock_buff_len> in bytes. However, the size of a transmission buffer is displayed on the transmission side, and that of a reception buffer is displayed on the reception side.

tcp or udp Transmission/reception mode Displays whether to use tcp or udp.

-><host> Transmission destination Displays the transmission destination <host> of data.

socket Socket generation Indicates that a socket was generated.

sndbuf Size of a transmission socket buffer

Indicates that the size of a transmission socket buffer was changed.

rcvbuf Size of a reception socket buffer Indicates that the size of a reception socket buffer was changed.

nodelay TCP_NODELAY Indicates that the use of Nagle algorithm in TCP was prohibited. (TCP_NODELAY)

connect Connection completion Indicates the connection to the object host.

accept from <host> Connection acceptance Indicates that the connection from <host> was accepted.

<sum_data>bytes in <r_second> real seconds

Total data size and execution real time

Displays the total of the transmitted and received data size <sum_data> in bytes. Displays the real time <r_second> required for transmission and reception in seconds.

=<data_per_sec> <fmt>/sec+++

Average data transmission/reception size (based on real time)

Displays the average size <data_per_sec> of the data, transmitted and received per real time of one second, in the unit <fmt> specified using a -f option.

<sum_data>bytes in <c_time>CPU seconds

Total data size and execution CPU time

Displays the transmitted and received data size <sum_data> in bytes. Displays the CPU time <c_time> required for transmission and reception in seconds.

<data_per_csec> <fmt>/cpu sec Average data transmission/reception size (based on CPU time)

Displays the average size <data_per_csec> of the data, transmitted and received per CPU time of one second, in the unit <fmt> specified using a -f option.

<io>I/O calls Number of I/O call times Transmission side: Displays the number of data write times <io> to a socket.Reception side: Displays the number of data read times <io> from a socket.

164

ttcp


CP congestion may occur when large volumes of data items are transmitted. When CP congestion occurs, the packets transmitted from other application are discarded. This influences a routing protocol or ftp and telnet communications. CP congestion also occurs when large volumes of data items are received. This influences ftp and telnet communications.

[Response Messages]The response messages of a ttcp command are shown in the table below.

Table 10-23: ttcp Command Response Messages

msec/calls=<t_per_call> Average I/O call interval Displays the average I/O call interval <t_per_call> in millisecond.

calls/sec=<c_per_sec> Average I/O call times Displays the number of I/O call times <c_per_sec> per second.

user Execution time of user instructions

Displays the time required for the execution of user instructions in seconds.

<S>sys Execution time of OS instructions Displays the time <S> required for the execution of OS instructions in seconds.

<R>real Program execution real time Displays the real time <R> required for the execution of ttcp in seconds.

% Ratio of CPU time to real time during ttcp execution

Displays the ratio of CPU time to execution real time.( = ( + <S> ) / <R> )

<X>i + <D>d Status of memory used Displays the total <X> of the memory size in a text area and the total <D> of the memory size in data and stack areas in kB.

<M>maxrss Maximum RSS Displays the maximum value of the physical memory size <M>, that a process uses, in kB.

<F>+<R>pf Number of page fault times Displays the page fault count <F> when no I/O interrupt exists and the page fault count <R> when I/O interrupt exists.

<C>+csw Number of process switch times Displays the process switch count <C> that a process actively executes and the process switch count that a process inactively executes.

buffer address <addr> Top address of buffer area Displays the top address <addr> of a buffer area.

Message Explanation Remarks

bad hostname: Connection refused The host name cannot be solved, so no connection can be done.

Transmission side

bad hostname: Undefined error An undefined error occurred during host name solution.

-

socket: Too many open files in system. The number of opened files in the whole system is too many.

-

bind: Address already in use The specified port has already been used. Reception side

bind: Permission denied There is no authority to use the specified port. Reception side

Item Content Display information

165

ttcp

[Precautions]• CP congestion may occur when large volumes of data items are transmitted. When CP

congestion occurs, the packets transmitted from other application are discarded. This influences a routing protocol or ftp and telnet communications. CP congestion also occurs when large volumes of data items are received. This influences ftp and telnet communications.

• The transmission of packets is intermittently interrupted when CP congestion occurs. Therefore, it takes time to terminate a test. The throughput result gets worse extremely.

• It is necessary to start the reception side first when executing ttcp and measuring throughput.

• When buffer size is specified on the transmission side in the udp mode using a -l option, an IO error occurs if the buffer size specified is larger than the socket buffer size specified using a -b option. The upper limit value is 9216 when a -b option is not specified.

• Do not specify a -S option on the reception side when performing measurement in the udp mode. When this option is specified, the reception side maintains the data wait state even if the transmission side terminates the transmission of data. In this case, the data wait state can be exited by pressing the Ctrl + C keys on the reception side. However, the measurement result is not displayed.

connect: Connection refused The connection to the host was refused. Transmission side

connect: No route to host The routing table to the host does not exist, so no connection can be done.

Transmission side

connect: Permission denied The specified IP address is illegal. Transmission side

connect: Can't assign requested address The specified port number is invalid. Transmission side

connect: Operation timed out Time-out occurred during connection. Transmission side

connect: Network is unreachable. No connection can be done to the network having the object host.

Transmission side

accept: Too many open files in system. The number of opened files in the whole system is too many.

Reception side

getpeername: Connection reset by peer. Disconnection was done by the transmission side after accepted.

Reception side

IO: Broken pipe A pipe was broken during data transmission. Transmission side

IO: Socket is not connected No socket is connected. -

IO: Permission denied There is no authority to transmit data to the specified host.

Transmission side

IO: Message too long The data to be transmitted is too large. Transmission side

malloc: Cannot allocate memory The buffer area of the specified size cannot be secured.

-

malloc: Result too large The size of the specified buffer area is too large. -

Message Explanation Remarks

166

ttcp

• Transmission is terminated by pressing the Ctrl + D key when a -S option is specified on the transmission side and when transmission data is entered manually.

• When data is automatically generated in the udp transmission mode, data size is automatically adjusted to 5 bytes if the transmission data size is set to less than 4 bytes using a -l option.

• Data may not be properly measured on the reception side when a -S option is specified in the udp transmission mode and when transmission data is read from a file by redirect.

167

show pru resources

show pru resources

[Function]Displays the number of entries in H/W table of PRU.

[Input Format]show pru resources [<PRU No>]

[Parameters][<PRU No>]

Specifies PRU No.. As for the range of values of PRU No. you can assign, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]"). If omitted, all the PRU in this System are assumed to be specified.


[Example] Example of show pru resources> show pru resources Current selected PRU resource : router-b1 PRU 0: PRU-B connected Resources Maximum Current used ipv4 unicast routing : 393216 16 ipv4 multicast routing: 8192 1024 arp : 131072 2 ipv6 unicast routing : 65536 0 ipv6 multicast routing: 8192 512 ndp : 32768 0 PRU 1: disconnected Total : Resources Maximum Current used ipv4 unicast routing : 393216 16 ipv4 multicast routing: 8192 1024 arp : 131072 2 ipv6 unicast routing : 65536 0 ipv6 multicast routing: 8192 512 ndp : 32768 0

[Display Explanation]Information about the number of entries in H/W table of PRU is shown in the following format:Current selected PRU resource: <Pattern Name> PRU <PRU No.>: <PRU Type> <status>Resources Maximum Current used<PRU H/W table type>: <Maximum number of entries in PRU> <Number of entries used in PRU> Total :Resources Maximum Current used<PRU H/W table type>: <Maximum number of entries in system> <Number of entries used in system>

168

show pru resources


[Response Messages]Table 10-24: show pru resources Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Item Content

Detail Information Meaning

Current selected PRU resource: <Pattern Name>

Displays the pattern name of the number of entries in the preset H/W table of PRU.

PRU<PRU No.>: <PRU type><status>

<PRU No.> PRU number

<PRU type> PRU type

<status> connected: Connected already.disconnected: Not yet connected.

<PRU H/W table type> ipv4 unicast routing IPv4 unicast routing table

ipv4 multicast routing IPv4 multicast routing table

arp ARP table

ipv6 unicast routing IPv6 unicast routing table

ipv6 multicast routing IPv6 multicast routing table

ndp NDP table

<Maximum number of entries in PRU>

Displays the maximum number of entries in H/W table of PRU.

<Number of entries used in PRU>

Displays the number of entries in the H/W table of PRU currently used.

Total Displays the number of entries per system if parameter <PRU No.> is omitted.

<Maximum number of entries in system>

Displays the maximum number of entries in H/W table for the entire system.

<Number of entries used in system>

Displays the number of entries in H/W table currently used for the entire system.

Message Meaning

Illegal PRU--<PRU No.>. PRU number is out of range. <PRU No.> PRU number


Not operational PRU <PRU No.>. <PRU No.> is not operational.

No operational PRU. No operational PRU.


169

Chapter

11. PRU/NIF Management

close prufree prushow nif (Ethernet)clear counters nif (Ethernet)close niffree nif

171

close pru

close pru

[Function]Sets the PRU board temporarily from the operation state to the blocking state. As a result, the PRU board can be inserted or extracted.

[Input Format]close [-f] pru <PRU No.>

[Parameters]-f

When this parameter is specified, executes a command without a confirmation message.

pru <PRU No.>

Specifies the PRU No. to be set to closed status. For the range of PRU No. that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Set PRU 0 to closed status.close pru 0

A confirmation message is displayed.close pru 0 OK? (y/n):

If 'y' is entered here, PRU 0 enters closed status.


[Response Messages]Table 11-1: close pru Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• This command does not operate configuration definition information, including the one in

memory.


• To return the PRU board closed by this command to operation status, use the free pru command. (See "free pru.") To restart the operation after hot-plugging, use the free pru command.


Illegal PRU -- <PRU No.>. PRU number is out of range. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is disconnected. Specified PRU was closed. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is already closed. Specified PRU is closed. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is locked. Specified PRU is locked. <PRU No.> PRU number


172

close pru

• When a PRU is closed, any NIF or Line accommodated in that PRU will also be closed.

173

free pru

free pru

[Function]Returns a PRU board which is temporarily closed with the close pru command (See "close pru.") to operation status.

Restarts operation of a port that was hot-swapped using the close pru command.

[Input Format]free pru <PRU No.>

[Parameters]pru <PRU No.>

Specifies the PRU No. to be returned to operation status. For the range of PRU No. that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Return a PRU 0 to operation status.free pru 0


[Response Messages]Table 11-2: free pru Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• When this command is used, the operation configuration definition saved in memory is not

changed.

• When the PRU that was closed returns to operation status, the NIF or Line connected to that PRU returns to operation status.



PRU <PRU No.> is disconnected. Specified PRU is not connected. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is already initializing. Specified PRU is already initializing. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is already active. Specified PRU is in the operational state. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is failed. Specified PRU is not in the operational state. <PRU No.> PRU number

PRU <PRU No.> is locked. Specified PRU is locked status. <PRU No.> PRU number

Cannot execute, number of PRU board exceeds system limit.

Cannot be executed because the number of PRU boards that can be mounted on a system is exceeded.

174

show nif (Ethernet)

show nif (Ethernet)

[Function]Displays Ethernet NIF information and Line summary information.

[Input Format]show nif [<NIF No.>]

[Parameters]<NIF No.>

Specifies NIF number. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]". When NIF number is omitted, displays status of all NIF in this System.


[Example]1. Displays the NIF information and the summary information of Line.

"Figure 11-1: Ethernet NIF Specification Run Results" shows the run results.

Figure 11-1: Ethernet NIF Specification Run Results>show nif 02003/02/23 12:00:00NIF0: active 12-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T retry:2 Average:103Mbps/20Gbps Peak:150Mbps at 08:10:30Line0: active up 100BASE-TX full 00:00:87:40:0a:01 Average out:20Mbps Average in:10Mbps description: test lab area networkLine1: active up 10BASE-T half 00:00:87:40:11:03 Average out:0Mbps Average in:0Mbps description: computer managment floor networkLine2: active down 100BASE-TX full(auto) 00:00:87:a0:01:11 Average out:2Mbps Average in:1MbpsLine3: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a1 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine4: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a2 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine5: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a3 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine6: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a4 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine7: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a5 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine8: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a6 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine9: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a7 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine10: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a8 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20MbpsLine11: initialize 100BASE-TX half(auto) 00:00:87:01:40:a9 Average out:50Mbps Average in:20Mbps>

[Display Explanation]NIF information is displayed in the format below. "Table 11-3: Ethernet NIF Display

175

show nif (Ethernet)

Explanation" explains each entry.

NIF<NIF No.>: <NIF status> <NIF type> retry: <Counts>

Average:<Average use band>bps/<NIF maximum line band> Gbps Peak:<Maximum use band>bps at <hh>:<mm>:<ss>

Line summary information is in the form below. "Table 11-4: Ethernet Line Summary Display Explanation" explains each entry.

Line<Line No.>: <Line status> <Line type> <MAC address>

Average out: <Transmission side average use band >bps Average in:<Reception side average use band >bps description: <additional explanation>

Table 11-3: Ethernet NIF Display Explanation

Item Content

Detail information Meaning

NIF<NIF No.> NIF number

<NIF status> active In operation (operating normally).

initialize Being initialized.

fault Problem occurring.

closed Command being obstructed.

unused Configuration information not set up. (non-mounting)

mismatch Configuration information incompatible.

The relevant NIF is incompatible with the configuration definition information of Line.

A 16k interface mode is set to system management information with the relevant NIF as NE100-48T.

locked Being blocked using configuration definition information (Not dependent on mounting and non-mounting.).

<NIF type> 48-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, 48 port model

12-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, 2 port model

12-port 1000BASE-X(SFP) 1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-SX, SFP 12 port model

6-port 1000BASE-X(GBIC) 1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LH, GBIC 6 port model

4-port 1000BASE-XSHAPER(SFP) 1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-SX, SFP 4 port model (SFP with shaper)

1-port 10GBASE-LR 10GBASE-LR, 1 port model

1-port 10GBASE-ER 10GBASE-ER, 1 port model

1-port 10GBASE-LW 10GBASE-LW, 1 port model

1-port 10GBASE-EW 10GBASE-EW, 1 port model

retry:<Counts> NIF fault retry count. If count value is 4, NIF is stopped due to fault.

176

show nif (Ethernet)

Table 11-4: Ethernet Line Summary Display Explanation

Average:<Average use band/ NIF maximum line band> bps

Displays average use band per NIF for one minute before command was entered, in "bps". (Use line band per NIF / Maximum line band per NIF)

Peak: <Maximum use band> bps at <hh>:<mm>:<ss> >

Displays maximum value and time per NIF of use line band for 24 hours before command was entered.0 Mbps is displayed for this value if not even 1 bit is transmitted and 1 Mbps is displayed if from 1 bit up to but not including 1.5 Mbit are transmitted.

Item Content


Line<Line No.> Line number

<Line Status> active up Operating normally.

active down Line problem occurring.

initialize Being initialized, or awaiting negotiation (auto negotiation function operating).

test Line being tested.

fault Problem occurring.

closed Command obstructed.

unused Configuration definition information not set up.

mismatch Configuration definition information incompatible

locked Being blocked using configuration definition information.

<Line type> 10BASE-T half 10BASE-T half duplex

10BASE-T half(auto) 10BASE-T half duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

10BASE-T full 10BASE-T full duplex

10BASE-T full(auto) 10BASE-T full duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

100BASE-TX half 100BASE-TX half duplex

100BASE-TX half(auto) 100BASE-TX half duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

100BASE-TX full 100BASE-TX full duplex

100BASE-TX full(auto) 100BASE-TX full duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

Item Content


177

show nif (Ethernet)


[Response Messages]Table 11-5: show nif (Ethernet) Command Response Messages

1000BASE-T full 1000BASE-T full duplex(Note) Displayed only if 1000base-t is assigned to auto_negotiation parameter for line testing.

1000BASE-T full(auto) 1000BASE-T full duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

1000BASE-LX full 1000BASE-LX full duplex

1000BASE-SX full 1000BASE-SX full duplex

1000BASE-LH full 1000BASE-LH full duplex

1000BASE-LX full(auto) 1000BASE-LX full duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

1000BASE-SX full(auto) 1000BASE-SX full duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

1000BASE-LH full(auto) 1000BASE-LH full duplex(line type/speed shown above resulted from automatic recognition.)

10GBASE-LR 10GBASE-LR

10GBASE-ER 10GBASE-ER

10GBASE-LW 10GBASE-LW

10GBASE-EW 10GBASE-EW

<MAC address> MAC address of relevant Line

Average out:<Transmission side average use band > bps

Displays average use band on the transmission side of the relevant line for one hour before command was entered, in "bps".

Average in:<Reception side average use band> bps

Displays average use band on the receiving side of the relevant line for one hour before command was entered, in "bps".

description:<description>

Shows the content of description configuration definition information.The description configuration definition information allows for specification of the purpose of use of the corresponding line, etc., as comments.Nothing is displayed if no description configuration definition information has been defined.

Message Explanation


Not operational NIF <NIF No.>. <NIF No.> is not operational.

Item Content


178

show nif (Ethernet)

[Precautions]None

No operational NIF. Not operational NIF.


Message Explanation

179

clear counters nif (Ethernet)


[Function]Clears the statistics information counter of Ethernet under control of NIF to "0".

[Input Format]clear counters nif [<NIF No.>]


Specifies NIF number. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]". When NIF number is omitted, displays status of all NIF in this System.


[Example]Clears the NIF and the statistics information counter under control of NIF to "0".

Figure 11-2: Screen of Statistics Information Clear Results of Specified NIF of Ethernet>clear counters nif 0>


[Response Messages]Table 11-6: clear counters nif (Ethernet) Command Response Messages


statistical information counter is cleared to "0".

• The counter value in statistical information is cleared to "0" in any of the following cases:

• CP, PRU, or NIF is restarted.

• Any hardware problem in CP or PRU.

• If a direction is issued to close NIF or PRU, then another direction to release closure. (Note 1)

(Note 1) The following operations apply to this case:

Message Explanation

Illegal NIF -- <NIF No.>. NIF number is out of range. <NIF No.> NIF number



No operational NIF. Not operational NIF.


180


• A direction is issued to close PRU of upper level with close pru command (see "close pru"), then another direction to release closure with "free pru" command (see "free pru").

• A direction is issued to close PRU of upper level with disable command (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)"), then another direction to release closure with delete disable command (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)").

• A direction is issued to close NIF with close nif command (see "close nif"), then another direction to release closure with free nif command (see "free nif").

• A direction is issued to close NIF with disable command (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)"), then another direction to release closure with delete disable command (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)").

181

close nif

close nif

[Function]Sets the NIF board temporarily from the operation state to the blocking state. This allows you to replace the NIF board while online.

[Input Format]close [-f] nif <NIF No.>

[Parameters]-f

When this parameter is specified, executes a command without a confirmation message.

nif <NIF No.>

Specifies NIF number to be set to closed status. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Set NIF 0 to closed status.close nif 0

A confirmation message is displayed.nif 0 close OK? (y/n):

If 'y' is entered here, NIF 0 enters closed status.


[Response Messages]Table 11-7: close nif Command Response Messages


NIF <NIF No.> is disconnected. Specified NIF is not connected. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is already closed. Specified NIF is closed status. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is failed. Specified NIF is not in operation status. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is locked. Specified NIF is locked status. <NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is disconnected.

PRU that controls specified NIF is disconnected. <PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is closed.

PRU that controls specified NIF is already closed.<PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is initializing.

PRU that controls specified NIF is initializing. <PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is failed.

PRU that controls specified NIF is not in operational status.<PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is locked.

PRU that controls specified NIF is locked status.<PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

182

close nif


changed.


• To return the board or interface closed by this command to operation status, use the free command (see "free nif".). Also use it to restart operation after hot-swapping.

• When an NIF is closed, any line accommodated in that NIF will also be closed.

Socket open error. Socket creation failed.

Can't accept command (system is busy). Command cannot be accepted because system is busy.




183

free nif

free nif

[Function]Returns a NIF board which is temporarily closed with the close nif command (See "close nif") to operation status.

Use this command to resume operation of the NIF board replaced online with close nif command.

[Input Format]free nif <NIF No.>

[Parameters]nif <NIF No.>

Specifies the NIF number to be returned to operation status. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Return a NIF0 to operation status.free nif 0


[Response Messages]Table 11-8: free nif Command Response Messages


NIF <NIF No.> is disconnected. Specified NIF is not connected. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is initialized. Specified NIF is initializing. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is already active. Specified NIF is in operation status. <NIF No.> NIF number

No configuration NIF <NIF No.>. Specified NIF is not defined. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is failed. Specified NIF is not in operation status.<NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is locked. Specified NIF is locked status. <NIF No.> NIF number

NIF <NIF No.> is during the close process. Specified NIF is during the close process. <NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is disconnected.

PRU that controls specified NIF is disconnected. <PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is closed.

PRU that controls specified NIF is already closed.<PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is initializing.

PRU that controls specified NIF is initializing. <PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is failed.

PRU that controls specified NIF is not in operation status.<PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

PRU <PRU No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is locked.

PRU that controls specified NIF is locked status.<PRU No.> PRU number,<NIF No.> NIF number

184

free nif


changed.

• When the NIF that was closed returns to operation status, the Line connected to that NIF returns to operation status.

CP <CP No.> that controls NIF <NIF No.> is initializing.

CP that controls specified NIF is initializing.<CP No.> CP number, <NIF No.> NIF number


185

Chapter

12. Message Log

show loggingclear loggingshow logging consoleset logging consoleshow warning

187

show logging

show logging

[Function]Displays and controls logs collected with this System.

Two kinds of logs are controlled by this command. One is the operation log, which collects the input command character strings, command response messages, and various event messages. The other one is the type log, which collects the events that occurred and orders them by code. Each log is independently displayed and controlled.

For the detail information of the content displayed as command execution results, see "Message Log Reference, 1.4 Confirmation of the log."

[Input Format]show logging [<Kind>] [<Command Classification>] [<Object>]

[Parameters]<Kind>

reference

Specifies the log for each type.

Default

Specifies the operation log.

<Command Classification>

-h

Displays the log without header information.

Default

Displays the log with the header information added.

<Object>

standby

Specifies the log of standby BCU.

Default

Specifies the log of active BCU.


[Example]Displays the log of active BCU.> show logging [Enter] key pressing

"Figure 12-1: Operation Log Display" shows the execution result.

This command string displays the status of type log in the active BCU.> show logging reference [Enter] key pressing

"Figure 12-2: Type Log Display" shows the execution result.

Figure 12-1: Operation Log Display> show loggingEVT 12/24 12:35:25 E4 LINEWAN NIF:1 LINE:1 07590701 1450:000000000000

188

show logging

Unable to set up the PPP connection due to LCP configuration option negotiation loop. Check the PPP configuration data.KEY 12/24 12:37:30 user1:ping 192.111.214.10...>

Figure 12-2: Type Log Display> show logging referenceE3 RM 00000101 1001:00000000000010/11 12:31:11 10/01 21:01:22 2E4 LINEWAN NIF:1 LINE:1 00000201 1400:000000000000 10/11 12:32:02 10/11 12:32:02 1>


[Response Messages]Table 12-1: show logging Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• An operation log is displayed from the latest message or operation in descending order of

time. Therefore, the latest information is displayed first. However, the reboot factor log of RM is collected after the activation log of RM and precedes the activation log of RM in time. For the log that is simultaneously generated, the descending order of time may be reversed.

• The log for each type is collected in the order in which each event was generated first. For the generated event, however, information is summarized for each type that is the same. Therefore, the display order using a command is not necessarily the order of event generation.

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. This command cannot be executed on the standby BCU with the specified parameter.

Disconnected Standby BCU. Standby BCU is not mounted or access to the standby BCU has failed.


Can't execute log command of standby BCU because standby BCU is not ready.

Standby BCU is not mounted or access to the standby BCU has failed. Confirm the status of the standby BCU.

189

clear logging

clear logging

[Function]Erases the log collected using this System.

[Input Format]clear logging [<Kind>] [<Object>]

[Parameters]<Kind>

reference

Specifies the log for each type.

Omitted

Specifies the operation log.

<Object>

standby

Specifies the log of standby BCU.

Omitted

Specifies the active BCU log.


[Example]Erase the operation log of active BCU.> clear logging [Enter] key pressing

Erase the log of active BCU for each type.> clear logging reference [Enter] key pressing


[Response Messages]Table 12-2: clear logging Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• In the duplex configuration, you cannot delete the active BCU system's operation log or

type log from the standby BCU system.

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. The command cannot be executed on the standby BCU with the specified parameter.

Disconnected Standby BCU. Standby BCU is not mounted or access to the standby RM has failed.


Can't execute log command of standby BCU because standby BCU is not ready.

Standby BCU is not mounted or access to the standby BCU has failed. Confirm the status of the standby BCU.

190

show logging console

show logging console

[Function]Displays the contents of information (the event level in which the screen display is suppressed) that is set using a set logging console command.

[Input Format]show logging console

[Parameters]None


[Example]Display the contents of the current setting.

1. For setting for displaying the whole system message.> show logging console [Enter] key pressing System message mode : Display all

2. For mode for suppressing the screen display of a system message of less than event level E6.> show logging console [Enter] key pressing System message mode : E6


[Response Messages]Table 12-3: show logging console Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation/Action


191

set logging console

set logging console

[Function]Controls the screen display of a system message in units of event levels. The display of a system message can be suppressed that may be frequently displayed because of its system configuration.

[Input Format]set logging console [disable <Event level> | enable]

[Parameters]disable <Event level>

Sets so that the screen display of a system message of less than the specified event level (E3 - E9) is suppressed.

enable

Sets so that the whole system message is displayed on the screen.


[Example]Set so that the whole system message is displayed on the screen.> set logging console enable [Enter] key pressing

Suppress the screen display of a system message of less than event level E5.> set logging console disable E5 [Enter] key pressing


[Response Messages]Table 12-4: set logging console Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None



192

show warning

show warning

[Function]Displays warning messages. See "Operations - Device Management Overview, 3.1(12) Warning Messages".

[Input Format]show warning

[Parameters]None



[Response Messages]Table 12-5: show warning Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None




193

Chapter

13. E-Mail Report

show report-emailclear report-emailset report-emailtest report-emailshow trace report-emailclear trace report-email

195

show report-email

show report-email

[Function]Displays an e-mail report function's operation state and the reported failure information during report suppression.

[Input Format]show report-email

[Parameters]None


[Example]Displays an e-mail report operation state and the reported failure information during report suppression.

The result of execution is shown in "Figure 13-1: Display of E-Mail Report Status".

Figure 13-1: Display of E-Mail Report Status> show report-emailStatus: ActiveReported e-mail: 2002/03/21 16:33:31 ERR E8 RP RP:0 01500201 1130 2002/03/21 16:35:41 ERR E6 NIF NIF:2 82010102 1240

[Display Explanation]Description of E-Mail report state is shown in "Table 13-1: Display of E-Mail Report State".

Table 13-1: Display of E-Mail Report State


[Response Messages]Table 13-2: show report-email Command Response Messages

Item Description

Detail Meaning

Status Active In operation

Disabled (by command) Operation is being stopped using an operation command.

Unused Configuration definition information not set up.

Reported E-Mail Reported failure information (Extraction of date and log information)

Message Explanation

Can't execute this command in standby rm. This command cannot be executed on the standby RM.


196

show report-email

[Precautions]• To use this function, the user must make a contract with our company's GR4000 Product

Support Service (PSS). Consult our business group for the PSS contract. Moreover, it is necessary to connect this System to the network environment that allows e-mail to be transmitted via the Internet.

197

clear report-email

clear report-email

[Function]Clears the failure information, reported using e-mail, during report suppression.

[Input Format]clear report-email

[Parameters]None


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 13-3: clear report-email Command Response Messages



Message Explanation

Can't execute. Cannot be executed.

198

set report-email

set report-email

[Function]Sets an e-mail report function's operation state.

[Input Format]set report-email { disable timeout <Minutes> | enable }

[Parameters]disable timeout <Minutes>

Puts an e-mail report function into the stop state and automatically specifies the time required to return it to the operation state (in number of minutes). The time value that can be specified is from 1 - 1440. No default setting exists. Therefore, be sure to specify the time value.

enable

Sets an e-mail report function to the operation state.


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 13-4: set report-email Command Response Messages



• An e-mail report function's operation state is always set to the operation stop state using an e-mail report function when an e-mail report function is disabled using configuration definition report information.

Message Explanation

No configuration of "report". The configuration definition's e-mail report information is not set.



199

test report-email

test report-email

[Function]Transmits e-mail to the Maintenance Service Center as an e-mail report function's test report.

[Input Format]test report-email

[Parameters]None


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 13-5: test report-email Command Response Messages



Message Explanation

No configuration of "report". The configuration definition's e-mail report information is not set.



200

show trace report-email


[Function]Displays an e-mail report function's transmission result (E-Mail trace).

[Input Format]show trace report-email [ { <Entry No.> } | all ]

[Parameters]Default

Displays summary information. Displays the collected E-Mail trace entry number, collection date, and transmission destination mail address.

<Entry No.>

Specifies the E-Mail trace entry number and displays the detail information. The entry number corresponds to the summary information displayed when this parameter is omitted. The entry number that can be specified is from 1 - 10.

all

Displays all detail information of collected E-Mail trace entry.


[Example]1. When the entry number is specified

The E-Mail trace detail information of entry number 1 is displayed.

Figure 13-2: E-Mail Trace Display Screen (for detail information)> show trace report-email 1 Date: Mon, 11 Nov 2002 22:06:19 +0000 () Transmission: NG To: XXXXXCause: Rejected from SMTP server :Domain service not available, closing transmission channel(Code 421)Length(include e-mail header): 121120 bytesContent(extract): HELO XXXXXMAIL FROM:<XXXXX>RCPT TO:<XXXXX>DATAMessage-Id: <XXXXX>From: XXXXXDate: Mon, 11 Nov 2002 22:06:19 +0000 ()To: XXXXXSubject: CALL ASSIST(/HN-9533-13MH/1234/)...Model: GR4000-10HS/W: S-9181-61 07-00 [ROUTE-OS6, Routing software]H/W: RM0 HN-F9533-5M8H [BCU-M850H, Basic Control module, 0000]...ERR 11/11 22:06:18 E7 RM 01200002 1001:000000000000 RM software error occured during operation....

2. When the entry number is omitted

201


The reported E-Mail entry number and its failure information are displayed as E-Mail trace summary information.

Figure 13-3: E-Mail Trace Display Screen (for summary information)> show trace report-emailNo. Trace entry1 Date: Mon, 11 Nov 2002 22:06:19 +0000 () Transmission: NG To: XXXXX2 Date: Mon, 11 Nov 2002 22:07:03 +0000 () Transmission: NG To: XXXXX3 Date: Mon, 11 Nov 2002 23:15:58 +0000 () Transmission: NG To: XXXXX...


[Response Messages]Table 13-6: show trace report-email Command Response Messages


Support Service (PSS). Consult our business group for the PSS contract. Moreover, it is necessary to connect this System to a network environment that allows E-Mail to be transmitted via the Internet.

Message Explanation



202

clear trace report-email

clear trace report-email

[Function]Clears the collected e-mail report function's transmission result (E-Mail trace).

[Input Format]clear trace report-email

[Parameters]None


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 13-7: clear trace report-email Command Response Messages


Support Service (PSS). Consult our business group for the PSS contract. Moreover, it is necessary to connect this System to a network environment that allows E-Mail to be transmitted via the Internet.

Message Explanation



203

Chapter

14. Resource Information

show rm cpushow cp cpushow cp bufferclear cp buffershow processesshow memorydfdu

205

show rm cpu

show rm cpu

[Function]Display the usage rate information of CPU in RM.

[Input Format]show rm cpu { [days] | [hours] | [minutes] | [seconds]}

[Parameters]days

Displays usage statistics collected every day for the past month.

hours

Displays usage statistics collected every hour for the past day.

minutes

Displays usage statistics collected every minute for the past hour.

seconds

Displays usage statistics collected every second for the past minute.

However, line usage rates are displayed in five-second increments.


[Example]Display the usage rate information of CPU in RM.

Figure 14-1: RM Usage Rates (per day)> show rm cpu days*** day ***date time cpu peak cpu averageMar 31 16:00:00-23:59:59 80 5Apr 01 00:00:00-23:59:59 50 4Apr 02 00:00:00-23:59:59 42 25 :Apr 29 00:00:00-23:59:59 70 5>

Table 14-1: Details of RM Usage Rates (per day)

Figure 14-2: RM Usage Rates (per hour)> show rm cpu hours*** hour ***date time cpu peak cpu averageApr 28 15:00:00-16:59:59 50 6 :Apr 28 23:00:00-23:59:59 70 7Apr 29 00:00:00-00:59:59 60 10

Item Content

cpu peak Maximum CPU usage rate during specified time

cpu average Average CPU usage rate during specified time

206

show rm cpu

Apr 29 01:00:00-01:59:59 30 20 : :Apr 29 14:00:00-14:59:59 40 3>

Table 14-2: Details of RM Usage Rates (per hour)

Figure 14-3: RM Usage Rates (per minute)> show rm cpu minutes *** minute ***date time cpu peak cpu averageApr 29 14:42:00-14:42:59 6 6Apr 29 14:43:00-14:43:59 30 20 : :Apr 29 15:41:00-15:41:59 50 10>

Table 14-3: Details of RM Usage Rates (per minute)

Figure 14-4: RM Usage Rates (per second)> show rm cpu seconds*** second ***date time cpu averageApr 29 14:43:14-14:43:23 20 10 5 4 70 9 80 30 7 50Apr 29 14:43:24-14:43:33 10 9 40 40 7 4 6 10 7 4Apr 29 14:43:34-14:43:43 20 10 5 4 52 9 80 30 7 50Apr 29 14:43:44-14:43:53 10 9 40 40 7 4 6 10 7 4Apr 29 14:43:54-14:44:03 20 10 5 4 63 9 80 30 7 50Apr 29 14:44:04-14:44:13 10 9 40 40 7 4 6 10 7 4>

Table 14-4: Detail of RM Usage Rates (per second)


Item Content



Item Content



Item Content

cpu average CPU usage rate per second during specified time

207

show rm cpu

[Response Messages]Table 14-5: show rm cpu Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Content



208

show cp cpu

show cp cpu

[Function]Displays CP CPU and Buffer Usage Rates.

[Input Format]show cp cpu { [days] | [hours] | [minutes] | [seconds]}

[Parameters]days

Displays usage statistics collected every day for the past month.

hours

Displays usage statistics collected every hour for the past day.

minutes

Displays usage statistics collected every minute for the past hour.

seconds

Displays usage statistics collected every second for the past minute.


[Example]Display CP's CPU and Buffer Usage Rates.

Figure 14-5: CP Usage Rates (per day)> show cp cpu days*** day ***date time cpu peak cpu average buffer peak buffer averageMar 31 16:00:00-23:59:59 80 5 70 10Apr 1 00:00:00-23:59:59 50 4 40 5Apr 2 00:00:00-23:59:59 42 25 35 28 :Apr 29 00:00:00-23:59:59 70 5 60 8>

Table 14-6: Details of CP Usage Rates (per day)

Figure 14-6: CP Usage Rates (per hour)> show cp cpu hours*** hour ***date time cpu peak cpu average buffer peak buffer averageApr 28 15:00:00-16:59:59 50 6 40 10

Item Content



buffer peak Maximum buffer usage rate during specified time

buffer average Average buffer usage rate during specified time

209

show cp cpu

:Apr 28 23:00:00-23:59:59 70 7 65 9Apr 29 00:00:00-00:59:59 60 10 55 15Apr 29 01:00:00-01:59:59 30 20 25 22 : :Apr 29 14:00:00-14:59:59 40 3 35 8>

Table 14-7: Details of CP Usage Rates (per hour)

Figure 14-7: CP Usage Rates (per minute)> show cp cpu minutes*** minute ***date time cpu peak cpu average buffer peak buffer averageApr 29 14:42:00-14:42:59 6 6 3 2Apr 29 14:43:00-14:43:59 30 20 20 15 : :Apr 29 15:41:00-15:41:59 50 10 30 20>

Table 14-8: Details of CP Usage Rates (per minute)

Figure 14-8: CP Usage Rates (per second)> show cp cpu seconds*** second ***date time cpu average buffer averageApr 29 14:43:14-14:43:23 20 10 5 4 40 9 80 30 7 50 10 8 5 2 90 0 90 24 6 20Apr 29 14:43:24-14:43:33 10 9 40 40 7 4 6 10 7 4 8 7 25 27 3 1 1 3 5 3Apr 29 14:43:34-14:43:43 20 10 5 4 48 9 80 30 7 50 15 5 3 2 90 5 65 28 5 35Apr 29 14:43:44-14:43:53 10 9 40 40 7 4 6 10 7 4 5 5 20 23 4 2 3 5 4 2Apr 29 14:43:54-14:44:03 20 10 5 4 37 9 80 30 7 50 10 8 2 2 70 5 78 25 5 35Apr 29 14:44:04-14:44:13 10 9 40 40 7 4 6 10 7 4 5 5 25 30 3 2 3 5 5 2>

Item Content





Item Content





210

show cp cpu

Table 14-9: Details of CP Usage Rates (per second)

(*1)

For several minutes after CP is started the cpu average and buffer average are not displayed, however, the message "No data" appears.


[Response Messages]Table 14-10: show cp cpu Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Item(*1) Content

cpu average CPU usage rate per second during specified time

buffer average Buffer usage rate per second during specified time

Message Content

Not operational CP <CP No.>. Specified CP is not operational. <CP No.> CP number.


211

show cp buffer

show cp buffer

[Function]Displays usage conditions of packet buffer and memory per CP and statistics information.

[Input Format]show cp buffer {all-data | memory | packet}

[Parameters]packet:

Displays usage status of packet buffer (packet sending/receiving buffer).

memory: Displays usage status of memory.

all-data: Displays usage status of packet buffer and memory.


[Example]• Displays all data

Display usage status of CP> show cp buffer all-dataPB: free MAX allowed hits misses 68413 32156 6565465468 6841546486Memory: free MAX allowed hits missesReceive-Control : 34518 86447 6874868455 463486468Generate-Control : 37846 32187 8764524345 8674614431Receive-Data : 55165 86712 64648462 15684500Generate-Data : 37869 68468 546486413 3546873308Header-buffer : 35416 32156 4866861810 64654161Common-buffer : 86123 98335 1204681246 76169683Huntfree-memory : 93324 4866 4884864056 844089844>

• Displays buffer specification

Display usage status of specified buffer>show cp buffer memoryMemory: free MAX allowed hits missesReceive-Control : 34518 86447 6874868455 463486468Generate-Control : 37846 32187 8764524345 8674614431Receive-Data : 55165 86712 64648462 15684500Generate-Data : 37869 68468 546486413 3546873308Header-buffer : 35416 32156 4866861810 64654161Common-buffer : 86123 98335 1204681246 76169683Huntfree-memory : 93324 4866 4884864056 844089844>

[Display Explanation]"Table 14-11: Display Contents" and "Table 14-12: Field Definitions" show the Display Contents and Field Definitions respectively.

212

show cp buffer

Table 14-11: Display Contents

Table 14-12: Field Definitions


[Response Messages]Table 14-13: show cp buffer Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Item Meaning

Receive-Control Descriptor Used for received control information packet

Generate-Control Used for generated control information packet

Receive-Data Used for received data packet

Generate-Data Used for generated data packet.

Header-buffer Used when creating and sending frame of 128 bytes or less.

Common-buffer Used for packet when sending plural times.

Huntfree-memory Hunt free memory: Memory area of consecutive area for lending functional block

Content Meaning

Free Free buffer count

MAX allowed Maximum buffer count

Hits Buffer request count (item cleared by clear)

Misses Request failure count (item cleared by clear)

Message Explanation


Socket open error. Failed to socket generation.


213

clear cp buffer

clear cp buffer

[Function]Clears the statistical information counter of a packet buffer and memory in units of CPs.

[Input Format]clear cp buffer {all-data | memory | packet}

[Parameters]packet:

Clears usage status of packet buffer (packet sending/receiving buffer).

Memory: Clears usage status of memory.

all-data: Clears usage status of packet buffer and memory.


[Example]• Clear of all information

Clears usage status of all CP.> clear cp buffer all-data>

• Clear of memory usage status

Clears usage status of memory> clear cp buffer memory>


[Response Messages]Table 14-14: clear cp buffer Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation




214

show processes

show processes

[Function]Displays information of current process of the operating system.

[Input Format]show processes memoryshow processes cpu

[Parameters]memory

Displays used memory state of more important process of operating system.

cpu

Displays used CPU state of more important process of operating system.


[Example]Displays used memory status of more important process.

Figure 14-9: Display of Memory Used State of the Process> show processes memory [Enter] key pressingPID From Text Static Alloc Stack Real Process 1 ?? 16 4 76 1 312 Init177 console 56 28 220 1 476 RFC Log Control180 console 16 4 268 1 484 System Log Control207 console 1240 256 96 3 160 Configuration Data210 console 76 56 16 1 100 Configuration Control221 console 64 20 68 2 372 Node Control222 console 44 8 80 1 352 Duplex Control224 console 64 16 68 2 420 Interface Control225 console 80 12 96 1 468 CP Manager243 console 52 56 16 1 268 CP Dump Control244 console 36 36 68 1 340 Node Command Control254 console 324 52 184 2 640 SNMP Agent257 console 212 196 64 5 552 RMON263 ?? 856 1272 1296 2 1016 Internet Routing Protocol280 console 180 208 1064 1 1192 Bridge289 console 360 68 600 4 860 IPX293 ?? 184 32 212 1 536 HTTP server298 ?? 36 4 48 3 260 Browser301 console 8 4 72 1 304 getty302 ?? 52 12 68 3 332 TELNET server307 192.168.4.51 4 4 136 7 296 process>

Displays used CPU status of more important process.

Figure 14-10: Display of CPU Used State of Process> show processes cpu [Enter] key pressingPID From 5Sec 1Min 5Min Runtime(ms) Process 1 ?? 0% 0% 0% 212 Init165 console 0% 0% 0% 185 RFC Log Control168 console 0% 0% 0% 222 System Log Control

215

show processes

195 console 0% 0% 0% 44 Configuration Data198 console 0% 0% 0% 12 Configuration Control209 console 0% 0% 0% 661 Node Control210 console 0% 0% 0% 305 Duplex Control212 console 0% 0% 0% 284 Interface Control213 console 0% 0% 0% 404 CP Manager214 console 0% 0% 0% 72 CP Dump Control215 console 0% 0% 0% 107 Node Command Control221 console 0% 0% 0% 11 CP Dump Control222 console 0% 0% 0% 19 CP Dump Control225 console 0% 0% 0% 551 SNMP Agent228 console 0% 0% 0% 473 RMON234 ?? 5.06% 0.39% 0.13% 8396 Internet Routing Protocol290 ?? 0% 0% 0% 177 HTTP server292 ?? 0% 0% 0% 5 HTTP server296 ?? 0% 0% 0% 41 Browser375 ?? 0% 0% 0% 247 Bridge440 ?? 0% 0% 0% 90 TELNET server447 192.168.111.50 0% 0.70% 0.02% 52 csh448 192.168.111.50 38.56% 13.00% 1.14% 246 ping449 console 0% 0% 0% 38 process>

[Display Explanation]The table below shows explanation of items in the show processes command execution.

Table 14-15: Explanations of Items in show processes Command Execution

Item Content Detailed Information of Display

PID Process number Displays process management number of each process.

From Input terminal consoleManagement terminal connects to serial port of the sysytem.IP address Connects from IP address displayed by remote.??No terminal related to the process.

Text Text size Displays text size of real process by the kB.

Static Static data size Displays static data area size of real process by the kB.

Alloc Dynamic data size Displays dynamic data area size of real process by the kB.

Stack Stack size Displays stack used rate of real process by the kB.

Real Size of used real memory Displays real memory size which real process is using by the kB.

Process Function name Displays real process by the function name.

5Sec CPU used rate for the past 5 seconds

Displays CPU used rate of real process for the past 5 seconds by %.

1Min CPU used rate for the past 1 minute Displays CPU used rate of real process for the past 1 minute by %.

5Min CPU used rate for the past 5 minutes

Displays CPU used rate of real process for the past 5 minutes by %.

Runtime Real CPU runtime Runtime Displays real CPU runtime of real process by the millisecond.

216

show processes


[Response Messages]Table 14-16: show processes Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation

process:Can't execute. Cannot be executed for some cause not defined.

217

show memory

show memory

[Function]Displays information of memory used currently of the system.

[Input Format]show memory [summary]

[Parameters]summary

Displays the actual installed capacity, used space, and free space of the physical memory in RM.

Omitted

Displays page information on more important process about the memory currently used in the system.


[Example]Displays the actual installed capacity, used space, and free space of the physical memory in RM.

Figure 14-11: Display of Information on Currently Physical Memory> show memory summary [Enter] key pressingphysical memory = 262144kB(256.00MB)used memory = 77416kB( 75.60MB)free memory = 184728kB(180.40MB)>

Displays page information on more important process about the memory currently used.

Figure 14-12: Display of Information on Currently Used Memory> show memory [Enter] key pressingPhysical Next Virtual Ref PID Process05A9D000 05AA1000 00025000 3 248 Node Control05AA1000 05AA3000 00026000 3 248 Node Control05AA3000 05AA4000 00027000 3 248 Node Control05AA4000 05B16000 00028000 3 248 Node Control05AA9000 05B5B000 00009000 1 253 CP Dump Control05ACA000 07A90000 00001000 1 254 Node Command Control05AD0000 059C9000 EFBFB000 3 252 CP Manager05ADB000 05ADD000 0001C000 3 253 CP Dump Control05ADD000 05ADE000 0001D000 3 253 CP Dump Control05ADE000 05B55000 0001E000 3 253 CP Dump Control05AE9000 05A6E000 00006000 1 253 CP Dump Control05AFD000 05AE9000 00005000 1 253 CP Dump Control05B03000 05B04000 EFBFE000 10 256 CP Dump Control05B04000 ------ EFBFF000 10 256 CP Dump Control05B06000 05B4B000 EFFBE000 1 256 CP Dump Control05B0F000 ------ EFE82000 1 254 Node Command Control05B11000 05B6A000 00004000 1 254 Node Command Control

[Display Explanation]The table below shows explanations of the items when summary is specified.

218

show memory

Table 14-17: Explanations of the Items When Summary Is Specified

The table below shows explanations of the items when summary is omitted.

Table 14-18: Explanations of the Items When Option is Omitted


[Response Messages]Table 14-19: show memory Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Item Content Detailed Information

physical memory Physical memory Displays the actual installed amount of the physical memory in RM.

used memory Used physical memory Displays the used space of the physical memory in RM.

free memory Free physical memory Displays the free space of the physical memory in RM.


Physical Physical memory address Displays the first physical memory address of the pages.

Next Next physical memory address Displays the first physical memory address of the next page.

Virtual Virtual address Displays the corresponding virtual address.

Ref Number of page reference Displays the number of page reference.

PID Process number Displays process number using the page.

Process Function name Displays process using the page by the function name.

Message Explanation

memory:Can't execute. Cannot be executed for some cause not defined.

219

df

df

[Function]Displays the free area of a disk.

[Input Format]df [<option>] [<file name>]


-t: Specifies the type of a file system.

<file name>

The file system in which this file or directory exist is displayed.


220

du

du

[Function]Displays the file capacity in a directory.

[Input Format]du [<option>] [<file name>]


-s: Displays only the total number of blocks.

<file name>

This file or directory is displayed.


221

Chapter

15. CP Maintenance Information

show trace (CP)debug trace (CP)no debug trace (CP)clear trace (CP)show trace framedebug trace frameno debug trace frameclear trace frameshow registerset register

223

show trace (CP)

show trace (CP)

[Function] Displays the CP trace.

[Input Format]show trace <kind>show trace status

[Parameters]status

Displays the CP trace collection state.

<kind>

Specifies the trace type below.

cp-program

program trace

cp-event

event trace


[Example]1. Display program trace

> show trace cp-program

2. Display trace collection status> show trace status

Figure 15-1: Display of Program and Event Trace> show trace cp-program Date SEQ Event FREE Data ASCII Code------------------ --- ---- ---- ------------------- --------------mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm 1 xxxx xxxx xxxxx xxxxx ____ ____ ____mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm 2 xxxx xxxx xxxxx xxxxx ____ ____ ____mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm 3 xxxx xxxx xxxxx xxxxx ____ ____ ____ xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx ____ ____ ____ xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx ____ ____ ____mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm 4 xxxx xxxx xxxxx xxxxx ____ ____ ____>

[Display Explanation]Table 15-1: Contents of show trace (cp-program/cp-event) Display Field


Date Trace collection time mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm(month/date hour:minutes: seconds.milliseconds)

SEQ Sequence number (not displayed when entered continually).

Value of 1-255

224

show trace (CP)

Figure 15-2: Display of trace collection status of all slot>show trace status *** Trace Status ***Program Event----------------- -----------------wrap on not wrap on>

Table 15-2: Contents of show trace status Display Field


[Response Messages]Table 15-3: show trace(CP) Messages

[Precautions]None

Event Event code (not displayed when entered continually). Value of hexadecimal number, four digits

FREE Free code (not displayed when entered continually). Value of hexadecimal number, four digits

Data Trace collection data. Value of hexadecimal number, eight digits x 2 (x 3 when entered continually)

ASCII Code ASCII Code data in Data field Strings


Program Program trace collection status wrap on: Collecting in wraparound mode. not wrap on: Collecting without wraparound. full stop off: Stopped for trace area occupy. off: Stopped. -: slot not found.

Event Event trace collection status

Message Explanation


Not operational CP. Specified CP is not operational.

Trace not executing. Trace not started.

No data. The amount of trace data is 0.




225

debug trace (CP)

debug trace (CP)

[Function] Starts the collection of a CP trace.

[Input Format]debug trace <kind> [<Mode>]

[Parameters]<kind>


cp-program

program trace

cp-event

event trace

<Mode>

Specifies collection mode.

wrap-around

Wraps around the trace area and continues the collection.

Omitted

Does not wrap around the trace area and stops when occupied.


[Example]Start program trace collection.> debug trace cp-program


[Response Messages]Table 15-4: debug trace(CP) Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation



Trace already executing. Activation of trace has already executed.



226

no debug trace (CP)

no debug trace (CP)

[Function] Stops the collection of a CP trace.

[Input Format]no debug trace <kind>

[Parameters]<kind>


cp-program

program trace

cp-event

event trace


[Example]Stop the extraction of program trace.> no debug trace cp-program


[Response Messages]Table 15-5: no debug trace(CP) Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation






227

clear trace (CP)

clear trace (CP)

[Function] Erases the extracted CP trace.

[Input Format]clear trace <kind>

[Parameters]<kind>


cp-program

Program trace

cp-event

Event trace


[Example]Clear program trace.> clear trace cp-program


[Response Messages]Table 15-6: clear trace(CP) Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation





228

show trace frame

show trace frame

[Function] Displays the trace of a frame processed by software.

[Input Format]show trace frame nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.>


Specifies NIF number. As for the value range of the NIF numbers you can assign, "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

line <Line No.>

Specifies Line number. As for the value range of the line numbers you can assign, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Frame trace of NIF number 0 and Line number 0 is displayed.

Figure 15-3: Display of show trace frame> show trace frame nif 0 line 0NIF0 Line0mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm Send Length:64 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXmm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm Receive Length:64 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXmm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm Receive Length:48 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

[Display Explanation]Table 15-7: Display of show trace frame

Item Content

NIF NIF number

Line LINE number

Collection time mm/dd hh:mm:ss.mmm (month/date hour:minutes: seconds.milliseconds)

Send/receive type Send or receive

Frame length Length

229

show trace frame


[Response Messages]Table 15-8: show trace frame Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• Junction performance of I/F which uses the trace function is reduced by several percent.

• "No data" may be shown if this command is executed in the case of no debug trace frame command is not executed beforehand after executing debug trace frame command.

• If you have completed extracting information with trace and return to standard operation, be sure to execute first the clear trace frame command to clear the trace function entirely. If this is not done, junction performance will remain at a low level.

Message Explanation


Command busy(engaged by other user). Command is being used by other users. Enter again.




No configuration NIF <NIF No.>. Specified NIF is undefined. <NIF No.> NIF number

Disconnected PRU <PRU No.>. Specified PRU is not connected. <PRU No.> PRU number

Disconnected NIF <NIF No.>. Specified NIF is not connected. <NIF No.> NIF number

Not operational NIF <NIF No.>. Specified NIF is not operational. <NIF No.> NIF number

Disconnected or no configuration Line <Line No.>. Specified LINE is disconnected or undefined. <Line No.> Line number

Not operational Line <Line No.>. Specified LINE is not operational. <Line No.> Line number



230

debug trace frame

debug trace frame

[Function] Starts to extract the trace of frames processed by software.

[Input Format]debug trace frame nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.>



line <Line No.>

Specifies Line number. As for the value range of the line numbers you can assign, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".



[Response Messages]Table 15-9: debug trace frame Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation














231

no debug trace frame

no debug trace frame

[Function] Stops to extract the trace of frames processed by software.

[Input Format]no debug trace frame nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.>



line <Line No.>

Specifies Lline number. As for the value range of the line numbers you can assign, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".



[Response Messages]Table 15-10: no debug trace frame Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation














232

clear trace frame

clear trace frame

[Function] Erases to extract the trace of frames processed by software.

[Input Format]clear trace frame

[Parameters]None



[Response Messages]Table 15-11: clear trace frame Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation








233

show register

show register

[Function] Displays register information of CP or PRU.

[Input Format]show register [-f] cp <start_address> [<length>] [file <file_name>]show register [-f] pru <PRU No.> <start_address> [<length>] [file <file_name>]

[Parameters]-f


cp

Specifies CP-CPU register.

pru

Specifies PRU register.

<PRU No.>

Specifies the PRU No.. As for the value range of the PRU number you can assign, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

<start_address>

Start addresses of register to be treated (in hexadecimal).

<length>

Length of data to be acquired (1-32768 bytes). (Default is 100 bytes.)

file <file_name>

File name by which the binary data is stored.


[Example]"Figure 15-4: Result of show register Command" shows the examples displayed after executing show register command. Specify parameter with due caution.

To acquire 20 bytes from the start address 0x80000000.

Figure 15-4: Result of show register Command>show register pru 1 0x80000000 20Check the specified address. OK? (y/n):y Address Data ------------ ----------------------------0x80000000 xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx 0x80000010 xxxxxx >

234

show register

[Display Explanation]


[Response Messages]Table 15-12: show register Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• Use the redirect function to store in the file using text format.

• The start address specifies the address seen from the CP/PRU.

• Regardless of the specified start address value, the access start position is located at the 4-byte boundary and the address unit is 4 bytes.

• CP/PRUoperation is not guaranteed when you specify a parameter that accesses an address where reading from the CPU is prohibited. Specify parameter with due caution.

Message Explanation


Illegal address value -- <start_address>. Specified start address is out of range. <start_address>start address


Not operational CP. Specified CP-CPU is not operational.

Not operational PRU <PRU No.>. Specified PRU is not operational. <PRU No.>PRU number

Can't access address <address>. Cannot access area in specified address. <address> Register address


<file_name>:can't make file. Cannot create file. <file_name> specified file name


235

set register

set register

[Function]CP or PRU register information is displayed.

[Input Format]set register [-f] cp <start_address> <data>set register [-f] pru <PRU No.> <start_address> <data>

[Parameters]-f


cp

Specifies CP-CPU register.

pru

Specifies PRU register.

<PRU No.>

Specifies the PRU No.. For the range of PRU number that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

<start_address>

Start addresses of register to be treated (in hexadecimal).

<data>

Sets data (hexadecimal number of 1 - 16 bytes long).


[Example]"Figure 15-5: Setting Register Information" shows the examples displayed after executing set register command.

To set CP number 1, start address 0x80000000, and 0x11223344556677.

Figure 15-5: Setting Register Information> set register cp 0x80000000 0x11223344556677Check the specified address. OK? (y/n):y>



[Response Messages]Table 15-13: set register Command Response Messages

Message Explanation


236

set register

[Precautions]• The start address specifies the address seen from the CP/PRU.

• Regardless of the specified start address value, the access start position is located at the 4-byte boundary and the address unit is 4 bytes.

• CP/PRUoperation is not guaranteed when you specify a parameter that accesses an address where reading from the CPU is prohibited. Specify parameter with due caution.

Illegal address value -- <start_address>. Specified start address is out of range. <start_address>start address


Not operational CP . Specified CP is not operational.

Not operational PRU <PRU No.>. Specified PRU is not operational. <PRU No.>PRU number

Can't access address <start_address>. Cannot access area in specified address.<start_address> Address



Message Explanation

237

Chapter

16. Dump Information

dump cpdump prudump nifset dumpshow dump statuserase dumpfileshow dumpfile

239

dump cp

dump cp

[Function]Extracts the memory dump information of CP.

[Input Format]dump [-f][-r] cp [<System>] [{secondary | directory <Directory>}]

[Parameters]cp

Extracts the dump information of CP.

-f


-r

Restarts CP and extracts the dump information. When this parameter is omitted, extracts the dump information without restarting.

<System>

Specifies the system for which the dump is extracted during the duplex configuration.

standby

Extracts the dump information of the standby CP.

active


None


secondary

Outputs a standard CP memory dump file to /secondaryMC/var/dump. During the default setting of this parameter, a memory dump file is output to /primaryMC/var/dump.

directory <Directory>

Specifies the directory path in which a standard CP memory dump file is stored. The directory path that can be specified is 280 characters or less.


[Example]Restart CP and extract dump information into the current MC.>dump -r cprestart CP OK? (y/n):yold dump file(cp00.cmd) delete OK? (y/n):yCP OK>

The CP dump confirmation message is displayed."restart CP OK? (y/n):_"

When 'y' is entered, the CP memory dump extraction begins. The System prompts you to delete

240

dump cp

a file which already exists in the specified directory,"old dump file(cp00.cmd) delete OK? (y/n):_"

is displayed. When you enter 'y', the previous memory dump file is deleted. When the extraction of all RP memory dump files is complete, the execution results are displayed: CP OK

The extracted memory dump file is stored in /primaryMC/var/dump with the filename rp0*.cmd. Execution results are shown in the following table.

Table 16-1: Dump Execution Results


[Response Messages]Table 16-2: dump cp Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• CP stops operation while parameters for restart are specified and dump is extracted. Hence

communication through the relevant CP is not enable.

• By default, the range of memory of CP from which dump is extracted is set to the standard range. To set the range of memory of CP to extract dump from (standard, or standard + extended), use set dump command (See "set dump".)

• Online dump extraction from CP (a way to extract dump without restarting CP) does not allow you to extract extended memory dump, even if you have set "standard + extended" for the range of CP's memory to extract dump from.

• When the expanded range of CP memory dump extraction is specified, it takes more time

No. Displayed character string Meaning of character string

1 OK Dump extracted normally.

2 Can't accept dump command Other dump being executed.

3 NG Other Error(Dump Failed) Cannot extract for some cause not defined.

Message Explanation

Directory length over. Specified path too long.

illegal directory name <directory>.the top of directory name is "/tmp".

Specify /tmp at head of specified directory name. <Directory> Directory name


Can't execute dump command(other dump executing). Other dump being executed.



MC card is full. Cannot execute dump processing due to MC capacity shortage.

<directory>: permission denied. No access permission in specified directory.<Directory> Directory name

<directory>: No such file or directory. No specified directory. <Directory> Directory name


241

dump cp

to restart CP than when specifying the standard range of memory dump extraction.

• The extracted CP memory dump file in the expanded range is stored in "/secondaryMC/var/dump" under the name of cp**el.cmd.

• Confirm that an MC is installed in preliminary MC when extracting the expanded CP memory dump file. If not, the expanded CP memory dump file is not extracted.

• For the expanded CP memory dump file, a CP dump file with the same name is automatically deleted when it exists in the same directory.

242

dump pru

dump pru

[Function]Extracts the memory dump information of PRU.

[Input Format]dump [-f][-r] pru <PRU No.> [{secondary | directory <Directory>}]

[Parameters]<PRU No.>

Specifies the PRU number that extracts memory dump. The value range of PRU number that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]."

-f


-r

Restarts PRU and extracts the dump information. When this parameter is omitted, extracts the dump information without restarting.

secondary

Outputs a standard PRU memory dump file to /secondaryMC/var/dump. During the default setting of this parameter, a memory dump file is output to /primaryMC/var/dump. During the default setting of this parameter, a memory dump file is output to /primaryMC/var/dump.


Specifies the directory path in which a standard PRU memory dump file is stored.The directory path that can be specified is 280 characters or less.


[Example]Extract dump of PRU number 4 into the current MC.>dump -r pru 4restart pru 4 OK? (y/n):yold dump file(pru04.cmd) delete OK? (y/n):yPRU No.4 OK>

The PRU dump confirmation message is displayed."restart pru 4 OK? (y/n):_"

When you enter 'y', the PRU memory dump extraction begins. If the same PRU memory dump file already exists in the specified directory,"old dump file(pru04.cmd) delete OK? (y/n):_"

appears. When you enter 'y', the previous memory dump file is deleted. When the extraction of all PRU memory dump files is complete, the execution results are displayed.PRU NO.4 OK

The extracted memory dump file is stored in "/primaryMC/var/dump" with the file name pru0*.cmd. The * indicates the specified PRU number. The content of execution results is shown in the table below.

243

dump pru

Table 16-3: Content of Dump Execution Results


[Response Messages]Table 16-4: dump pru Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• PRU stops operation while parameters for restart are specified and dump is extracted.

Hence communication through the relevant PRU is not enabled.

• If the space of the specified directory is running short while one or more dump files are being output, any dump information which could not be output is discarded. In this case, the dump file corresponding to the specified PRU is logged with a size "0".

• If the specified PRU is not connected, the standard PRU dump file is logged with a size "0". No file is created for an extended PRU dump file.

• By default, the range of memory of PRU from which dump is extracted is set to standard range. To set the range of memory of PRU to extract dump from (standard, or standard + extended), use set dump command (See "set dump".)

• Online dump extraction from PRU (a way to extract dump without restarting PRU) does not allow you to extract extended memory dump, even if you have set "standard + extended" for the range of PRU memory to extract dump from.




3 PRU is not connected Specified PRU is not connected.


Message Explanation



illegal directory name <directory>.the top of directory name is "/tmp".

Specify /tmp at head of specified directory name.<Directory> Directory name



Can't gain access to primary MC card. Current MC disconnected or access to the current MC failed.






244

dump pru

• When the expanded range of PRU memory dump extraction is specified, it takes more time to restart PRU than when specifying the standard range of memory dump extraction.

• The extracted PRU memory dump file in the expanded range is stored in "/secondaryMC/var/dump" under the name of pru**e1.cmd. The specified PRU number number is displayed in **.

• Confirm that an MC is installed in the preliminary MC when extracting the expanded PRUmemory dump file. If not, the expanded PRUmemory dump file is not extracted.

• For the expanded PRUmemory dump file, a PRUdump file with the same name is automatically deleted when it exists in the same directory.

245

dump nif

dump nif

[Function]Extract the memory dump of NIF.

[Input Format]dump [-f][-r] nif <NIF No.> [{secondary | directory <Directory>}]


Specifies NIF number that extracts memory dump. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual, (3) [Parameters]".

-f


-r

Restarts NIF and extracts the dump information. When this parameter is omitted, extracts the dump information without restarting.

secondary

Outputs a standard NIF memory dump file to /secondaryMC/var/dump. During the default setting of this parameter, a memory dump file is output to /primaryMC/var/dump.


Specifies the directory path in which a standard NIF memory dump file is stored. The directory path that can be specified is less than 280 characters.


[Example]Extract dump with NIF number 0 into the current MC.>dump -r nif 0restart nif 0 OK? (y/n):yold dump file(nif00.cmd) delete OK? (y/n):yNIF No.0 OK>

The NIF dump confirmation message is displayed."restart nif 0 OK? (y/n):_"

When you enter 'y', the NIF memory dump extraction begins. If the same NIF memory dump file already exists in the specified directory,"old dump file(nif00.cmd) delete OK? (y/n):_"

appears. When you enter 'y', the previous memory dump file is deleted. When the extraction of all NIF memory dump files is complete, the execution results are displayed.NIF No.4 OK

The extracted memory dump file is stored in "/primaryMC/var/dump" with the file name nif0*.cmd. The * indicates the specified NIF number. The content of execution results is shown in "Table 16-5: Content of Dump Execution Results".

246

dump nif

Table 16-5: Content of Dump Execution Results


[Response Messages]Table 16-6: dump nif Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• NIF stops operation while parameters for restart are specified and dump is extracted. So

communicate through the relevant NIF is not enable.

• If the space of the specified directory is running short while one or more dump files are being output, any dump information which could not be output is discarded. In this case, the dump file corresponding to the specified NIF is logged with a size "0".

• If the specified NIF is not connected, the standard NIF dump file is logged with a size "0". No file is created for an extended NIF dump file.



2 NIF is Inactive Specified NIF not operational.


4 Not configuration set Specified NIF undefined.

5 NIF is not connected Specified NIF disconnected.

6 PRU is Inactive PRU not operational.

7 CP is Inactive CP not operational.

8 PRU is not connected PRU disconnected.


Message Explanation






Can't gain access to secondary MC card. Preliminary MC disconnected or access to the preliminary MC failed.





247

set dump

set dump

[Function]Sets the range of CP and PRU dump extraction.

[Input Format]set dump {normal | expansion}

[Parameters]normal

Specifies the standard range of memory dump extraction.

expansion

Specifies the standard + expanded range of memory dump extraction.


[Example]Sets the range of CP and PRU dump extraction to standard + expansion.> set dump expansion


[Response Messages]Table 16-7: set dump Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• CP and PRU memory dump file collecting area is set to standard by default.

• As the CP and PRU memory dump collecting area setting is written in the MC, the setting value is effective even on/off the power.

• Even if you have set "standard + extended" memory dump with this command, execution of online dump (a way to extract dump without restarting the object) with this command results in no dump of extended memory extracted.

• If you specify extraction of extended memory dump, it takes more time to restart CP or PRU than the case where you specify extraction of standard memory dump.

• The expanded range of CP and PRU memory dump extraction can be confirmed using the show dump status command. (See "show dump status".)

• Confirm that an MC is installed in the preliminary MC when expansion is specified using this command. If not, the expanded CP and PRUmemory dump is not extracted.

Message Explanation




248

show dump status

show dump status

[Function]Displays the setting of a CP and PRU dump extraction range.

[Input Format]show dump status

[Parameters]None


[Example]Displays the range of the current CP and PRU dump extraction. > show dump status*** CP/PRU Dump set typestandard, expansion

[Display Explanation]Table 16-8: show dump status Command Display Content


[Response Messages]Table 16-9: show dump status Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Display item Explanation

standard Standard CP/ PRU memory dump

expansion Expanded CP/ PRU memory dump

Message Explanation




249

erase dumpfile

erase dumpfile

[Function]Deletes the RM/CP/ PRU/NIF dump file in each MC. The dump directories that can be deleted are "/primaryMC/var/dump", and "/secondaryMC/ var/dump".

[Input Format]erase dumpfile { all | <File name> } [secondary]

[Parameters]all

Specifies all the RM/CP/PRU/NIF dump files.

<filename>

Specifies the filename to be deleted. The file name formats that can be specified are shown below. # represents a numeric character from 0 to 9.

"cp.###"...CP trouble dump file

"cp.cmd"...CP command dump file

"cpe1.###"...Extended CP trouble dump file

"cpe1.cmd"... Extended CP command dump file

" pru##.###"..PRUtrouble dump file

" pru##.cmd"...PRUcommand dump file

" pru##e1.###"... Extended PRUtrouble dump file

" pru##e1.cmd"... Extended PRUcommand dump file

"nif##.###"...NIF trouble dump file

"nif##.cmd"...NIF command dump file

"rmdump"...RM dump file

"plndump"...PLN dump file

"dpdump"...DP dump file

"mdinfo"...RM self-diagnosis test dump file

secondary

This parameter specifies the dump directory, which deletes a dump file, in /secondaryMC/var/dump. When this parameter is omitted, /primary/MC/var/dump is displayed.


[Example]Deletes all the RM/CP/ PRU/NIF dump files in the current MC.> erase dumpfile all [Enter] key pressing

Deletes the trouble dump file pru01.000 in the current MC.> erase dumpfile pru01.000 [Enter] key pressing

[Related Command]dumpset dump

250

erase dumpfile

show dump status


[Response Messages]Table 16-10: erase dumpfile Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

<filename>: No such file or directory. Specified file does not exist, or the specified file is not a dump file.


Can't gain access to secondary MC card. Preliminary MC disconnected or access to the preliminary MC failed.


251

show dumpfile

show dumpfile

[Function]Displays the dump files stored in the directory for storing dump files.

[Input Format]show dumpfile [active/standby]

[Parameters]None

Shows all the dump files.

active

Shows the dump files of active system.

standby

Shows the dump files of the standby system.


[Example]Displays the dump files stored in MC.>show dumpfile [CR] key pressing Active: MC Slot 0: File Name cp00.000 Date 2003/01/16 15:21:11 Version S-9181-6B 08-00 Serial No. 0A1HBN03A000000031F001 Error Factor 0000 00001111 File Name nif01.cmd Date 2003/01/14 10:55:26 Version S-9181-6B 08-00 Serial No. 0A1HBN03A000000031F003 Error Factor Generated by dump command File Name cp00e1.000 Date 2003/01/16 15:21:11 Version S-9181-6B 08-00 Serial No. 0A1HBN03A000000031F001 Error Factor 0000 00001111 MC Slot 1: MC disconnected. Standby: MC Slot 0: File Name cp00.cmd Date 2003/01/1 09:11:11 Version S-9181-6B 08-00 Serial No. 0A1HBN03A000000031F005 Error Factor Generated by dump command

252

show dumpfile

File Name nif01.cmd Date 2003/01/14 10:55:26 Version S-9181-6B 08-00 Serial No. 0A1HBN03A000000031F003 Error Factor Generated by dump command File Name cp00.000 Date 2003/01/17 19:33:11 Version S-9181-6B 08-00 Serial No. 0A1HBN03A000000031F004 Error Factor 0000 00001111 MC Slot 1: MC disconnected.

[Display Explanation]Table 16-11: Content of show dumpfile Command Display

(Note) Any content whose reading from a dump file failed is shown with blanks.


[Response Messages]

[Precautions]You cannot execute this command from a standby BCU.

Display item Meaning Display detail information

File Name File name Dump file name

Date Date of dump extraction Date and time of the day dump was extracted.

Version Version information Software version

Serial No. Serial number Serial number

Error Factor Error factor xxxx xxxxxxxx: Content of error Generated by dump command: No error because extraction was done by using the command.

Message Explanation

MC disconnected. MC disconnected or access to MC failed.

Can't execute this command in standby bcu. This command cannot be executed on the standby RM.


253

Chapter

17. Duplex Management

close standbyfree standbyshow modeset modeclear modeswap bcu

255

close standby

close standby

[Function]Sets the standby BCU board temporarily from the operation state to the closed state. As a result, the standby BCU board can be inserted and extracted.

[Input Format]close [-f] standby

[Parameters]-f

Executes a command without a confirmation message when this parameter is specified.


[Example]Set the standby BCU to closed state.close standby

A confirmation message is displayed.close standby BCU OK? (y/n):

If 'y' is entered here, the standby BCU enters closed state.


[Response Messages]Table 17-1: close standby Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• Execution of this command does not change any operational configuration definition

information stored in memory.

• Restarting the system after executing this command releases closure state.

• If any trouble occurs in H/W or other part while this command is being executed before the standby BCU stops, stop processing is interrupted, and BCU may be restarted after the trouble is resolved. In such a case, insert this command again to stop the standby BCU.

• The voltage of active BCU is not displayed correctly, if show power-supply command is executed after executing this command with the power of the standby BCU off and the standby BCU connected.


Standby BCU is disconnected. Standby BCU is disconnected.

Standby BCU is already closed. Standby BCU is already closed.

Standby BCU is initializing. Standby BCU is initializing.




256

close standby

• Standby BCU may not normally stop when interrupt operation is performed by entering "Ctrl + C" or a free standby command is simultaneously executed while this command is being executed. In this case, enter this command again and stop standby BCU.

257

free standby

free standby

[Function]Returns the blocking state of the BCU board temporarily set using a close standby command to the operation state. This command is used to restart the operation of the board inserted and extracted using a close standby command. (See "close standby".)

[Input Format]free standby

[Parameters]None


[Example]Returns the standby BCU closed by this command to operation state.free standby


[Response Messages]Table 17-2: free standby Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• Execution of this command does not change any operational configuration definition

information stored in memory.

• When this command is executed against the standby BCU, it takes a few seconds to terminate the command.

• Standby BCU may not normally stop or restart when this command is executed while a close standby command is being executed. In this case, enter a close standby command. Then, after confirming that standby BCU has stopped, enter this command again and


Standby BCU is before replaced. Standby BCU is not replaced yet.

Standby BCU is disconnected. Standby BCU is disconnected.

Standby BCU is already closed. Standby BCU is already closed.

Standby BCU is already active. Standby BCU is in operation state.

Standby BCU is not closed. Standby BCU is not closed.

Standby BCU: administratively freed. But, configuration file mismatch between active and standby.

Standby BCU has been freed. But configuration definition information became inconsistent between active and standby systems. Make it consistent between both with copy startup-config command (see "copy startup-config").




258

free standby

restart standby BCU.

259

show mode

show mode

[Function]Displays the current operation mode and state concerning the items (simplex/duplex system operation, standard/redundancy power operation, and priority MC during system activation) on system operation.

[Input Format]show mode

[Parameters]Default


[Example]The currently set operation mode and state are displayed.> show mode [Enter] key pressingnode mode : duplex mode status: duplexpower mode : auto modeboot mode : active BCU slot0, standby BCU slot0

[Display Explanation]The list of the current operation mode and state displayed when this show mode command is executed is shown in the following table.

Table 17-3: Display Explanation of show mode Command

Display item

Content Display detail information

node mode Simplex/duplex operation mode

auto_duplex mode: Operation mode is set to the mode of operation in connected state.duplex mode: Operation mode set as duplex.simplex mode: Operation mode set as simplex.

status Operating state duplex: Duplex mode operating normally.simplex: Simplex mode operating normally.configuration discard: Configuration definition information mismatch between operation system and standby system.(Note)

software version discard: Software version mismatch between operation system and standby system. (Note)

license key discord: Inconsistency of software license key between active and standby systems. (Note) Software license key mismatch between operation system and standby system. (Note)

standby BCU fault: Standby BCU has a problem. (Note)

standby BCU disconnect: Standby BCU is disconnected. (Note)

standby BCU close: Standby BCU under hot-plugging. (Note)

power mode Power operation mode

auto mode: Operation mode is set to automatic.standard mode: Operation mode is set to standard.redundancy mode: Operation mode is set to redundancy.

260

show mode

(Note)

These may be displayed only when the operation modes are "duplex mode", or "auto_duplex mode"


[Response Messages]Table 17-4: show mode Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• This command can be executed only from the active BCU.

• Execution of this command may cause a command error if software versions of the active and standby systems differ from each other.

boot mode Priority MC during system activation

slot0: The priority MC during system activation is set to slot0.slot1: The priority MC during system activation is set to slot1.select (slot0): Set so that MC is selected at system boot-up. "Slot0" in parentheses indicates that the system boot-up when select is timed out is set to give priority to slot0.select (slot1): Set so that MC is selected at System boot-up. "Slot1" in parentheses indicates that the system boot-up when select is timed out is set to give priority to slot1.fault: The priority MC information cannot be displayed because the specified BCU is defective.disconnect: The priority BCU information cannot be displayed because the specified RM is disconnected.close: The priority BCU information cannot be displayed because the specified RM is being closed.

Message Explanation

modeset : Can't execute this command in standby BCU. This command cannot be executed on the standby BCU.

modeset : Can't execute. Cannot be executed for some cause not defined.

Display item

Content Display detail information

261

set mode

set mode

[Function]Sets the items (simplex/duplex system operation, standard/redundancy power operation, and priority MC during system activation) on system operation. The operation corresponding to the number of installed RM packages is automatically performed when the simplex/duplex system operation mode is not set using this command. (Duplex operation is performed when a system is activated with the two RM packages installed. Simplex operation is performed when a system is activated with only one RM package installed.)

[Input Format]set mode {auto_duplex | duplex | simplex} [node]set mode {standard | redundancy | auto} powerset mode [{active | standby | both}] {slot0 | slot1 | default} reloadset mode [{active | standby | both}] {enable | disable} reloadselect

[Parameters]auto_duplex

Sets operation mode of system to the mode of operation in connected state. If this mode is specified, system operates in simplex mode if one BCU board is connected, or in duplex mode if two boards are connected. In the latter case, alternation between active and standby is possible even if software versions of the active and standby systems differ from each other, or software license keys or configuration definition information differ from each other. If duplex mode has not been set, system operates in this mode.

duplex

Sets operation mode of the system to duplex mode. If this mode is specified, alternation between active and standby is suppressed if software versions of the active and standby systems differ from each other, or software license keys or configuration definition information differ from each other.

simplex

Sets the operation mode to simplex.

standard

Sets operation mode of power source to normal operation. This mode does not operate redundant operation of power source. Therefore, log is not output when redundant operation is stopped by start up or power source failure. (Power source failure log is output.)

redundancy

Sets operation mode of power source to redundant operation. This mode operates redundant operation of power source. When redundant operation is stopped by start up or power source failure, reports it by operation log.

auto

Sets operation mode of power source to automatic operation. This mode does not operate redundant operation of power source. Therefore, log is not output when redundant operation is stopped by start up or power source failure. (Power source failure log is output.)

active

Sets the priority MC during activation of an active system. The information of the set priority MC is directly stored even when the RM in which priority the MC was set is

262

set mode

switched from active mode to standby mode.

standby

Sets the priority MC during activation of a standby system. The information of the set priority MC is directly stored even when RM in which the priority MC was set is switched from standby mode to active mode.

both

Sets the priority MC during activation of active and standby system.

slot0

Sets the priority MC during system activation to slot0.

slot1

Sets the priority MC during system activation to slot1.

default

Restores system boot-up to initial state. Default gives priority to slot0.

enable

Sets to enable selection of an MC at system boot-up.

disable

Sets to disable selection of an MC at system boot-up.

node

Specifies operation mode of system.

power

Specifies operation mode of power source.

reload

Specifies the priority MC during system activation. Sets according to the operation state of the current system when active, standby, or both is not specified.

reloadselect

Specifies the MC select mode booting the system. If active, standby or both is not specified, the setting depends on the current operating condition of the system. The select mode times out at a fixed interval. If timed out, the system is booted up by the MC specified as the priority MC. This option is not supported by the browser.

Relation between power source configuration of system and operation mode are shown in the following table.

Table 17-5: Power Source Configuration and Operation Mode Response


[Example]Sets the operation mode to duplex.

Model Power source type Redundancy operation

GR4000-160E power (duplex) This model is made redundant by installing two power sources. By installing two power sources and setting operation mode to redundancy, outputs operation log at un-installation or failure of power source.

263

set mode

> set mode duplex node [Enter] key pressing

Sets the operation mode to simplex.> set mode simplex node [Enter] key pressing

When specifying operation mode and executing, if the MC that stores software of the same version with currently operating in the active and the standby preliminary MC slot, the message confirming whether to reflect the operation mode setting to the preliminary MC.> set mode duplex node [Enter] key pressingSynchronize modeset to secondary MC? (y/n): ... Confirmation message whether to reflect to active RM preliminary MCSynchronize modeset to standby's secondary MC? (y/n): ... Confirmation message whether to reflect to standby RM preliminary MC

If 'y' is entered here, setting of operation mode is reflected to the preliminary MC.

If 'n' is entered here, setting of operation mode is not reflected to the preliminary MC.


[Response Messages]Table 17-6: set mode Command Response Messages


• Command causes an error when attempting to set the duplex mode ("duplex" is specified as the parameter) while the standby BCU module is not installed (simplex configuration). Set the duplex mode after installing the standby BCU module.

• When you specify "duplex" while duplex mode is operational or "simplex" while simplex mode is operational, an error is returned.

• Initially (before executing set mode simplex (duplex)) and at the setting of "auto_duplex", the operation reflects the number of installed BCU modules. When only one BCU module is installed, simplex operation is executed; when two BCU modules are installed, duplex operation is executed. Set operation mode according to need.

Message Explanation


modeset : This system is duplex mode. Operation mode already set as duplex.

modeset : This system is simplex mode. Operation mode already set as simplex.

modeset : Disconnected standby BCU. Standby BCU system package not found. Enter command again after mounting the BCU standby system package.


modeset: Standby BCU is on fault. Standby BCU is defective. Enter the command again after the failure that occurred in the standby BCU is recovered.

modeset: Standby BCU is on close. Standby BCUis in the closed state. Enter the command again after the standby BCU is put into the active state.

modeset: Modeset ok. But, configuration file mismatch between active and standby.

The modeset command was received. However, there was a configuration definition information mismatch between active and standby. Match configuration definition information using the config copy command. (See "copy startup-config").

264

set mode

• If operation mode is set to "auto duplex", just addition or removal of a standby BCU package does not enforce change automatically to duplex or simplex operation. So if you added or removed a standby BCU package, set an operation mode as required.

• Operation mode set is written in the MC. Thus, once set, it functions according to its definition even if power is turned on/off. Accordingly, note that simplex operation is enforced even if the system starting up is connected to two BCU packages, if the MC has been defined to operate in simplex mode. To delete the definition written in the MC, execute the clear mode command (See "clear mode").

• The confirmation message of operation mode reflection is not displayed when an MC is not installed in the active and standby preliminary MC slot, or software of the same version with currently operating is not installed in the installed MC.

• If you specify "both" or none to the BCU for setting the MC preferred when the System starts up, a response message may appear saying that such specification becomes effective only for the active system. This is caused by the fact that such specification may not be effective for the standby system due to its state.

• For the priority MC setting during system activation, priority MC information is stored in a BCU package. Therefore, once the priority MC is set, it cannot be changed even if a system is activated in the previous version. To change the setting, set the priority MC again in the support version. Priority MC information becomes inconsistent between duplexing when a BCU package is replaced with a new package by inserting and pulling out an active line. The mode switching of duplexed BCU is suppressed due to the inconsistent software version, software license key or configuration definition information by the packaged MC, and the system may not operate as expected. In this case, set the priority MC information in the active and standby modes again.

• A command error may occur if this command is executed when the software versions of the active and standby modes are inconsistent.

• If the software version of the standby BCU does not support the expansion duplex mode option, this option cannot be used with the operating system.

• Set the set mode enable reloadselect commands after console connection to select the MC at the time of system boot-up.

265

clear mode

clear mode

[Function]Deletes the previously set operation mode and performs the operation corresponding to the number of installed BCU packages. In other words, simplex operation is performed when only one BCU package is installed. Duplex operation is performed when two BCU packages are installed. If operated in simplex mode alternation between active and standby is possible even if the software versions of the active and standby systems differ from each other, or the software license keys or configuration definition information differ from each other.

[Input Format]clear mode [node]

[Parameters]node

Specifies operation mode of the system.


[Example]Delete the previously set operation mode and performs the operation corresponding to the number of installed BCU packages. In other words, simplex operation is performed when only one RM package is installed. Duplex operation is performed when two BCU packages are installed.> clear mode node [Enter] key pressing


[Response Messages]Table 17-7: clear mode Command Response Messages


• When the active and standby software versions do not match, a command error may occur if this command is executed.

Message Explanation



266

swap bcu

swap bcu

[Function]The BCU operation and standby systems in the duplex configuration are exchanged.

[Input Format]swap bcu

[Parameters]None


[Example]The BCU operation and standby systems in the duplex configuration are exchanged. >swap bcu [Enter] key pressing


[Response Messages]Table 17-8: swap bcu Command Response Messages

[Precautions]The list below indicates the conditions where this command cannot be executed.



Disconnected standby BCU. Standby BCU is disconnected.

This system is simplex mode. The simplex system in effect.

Unable to swap system: System swap is suppressed. System swap is suppressed.Confirm the status of the standby BCU using the show system command (See "show system").

Unable to swap system: Standby BCU failuer. Standby BCU has a problem.

Unable to swap system:Now, configuration file is changing.

Cannot be executed because confirmation definition information is currently being updated.


267

swap bcu

Table 17-9: Conditions Where This Command Cannot Be Executed

• Wait for of about 10 seconds before entering this command again when the BCU's active and standby modes are switched in duplex configuration by executing this command.

• Standby FAULT CODE may display "11" when the active and standby modes are switched by continuously entering this command. In this case, execute the reload standby command (See "reload") from the active mode and restart the standby mode. The display of "11" in the standby FAULT CODE and the standby mode's restart operation do not influence communication.

No. Status Method to check

1 The system itself is a standby system. Execute the show system command and check the BCU status.

2 Simplex operation is defined by the command.

3 Problem occurring in standby system (being initialized).

4 Operation system and standby system software version does not match.

5 The composition definition of the operation and software license key of standby systems does not match.

6 The standby system BCU is hot-swapping.

268

Chapter

18. Time Management

show calendarset calendarrdateshow ntp statusrestart ntp

269

show calendar

show calendar

[Function]Displays the date and time currently set.

[Input Format]show calendar

[Parameters]Default

Displays the present time.

The year, month, day, hour and second (the minute cannot be omitted) can be omitted, but you cannot omit, for example, only the part between the day and the minute.


[Example]Enter the command below to display the present time.> show calendar[Enter] key pressingTue Sep 2 15:30:00 1997>



[Response Messages]"Table 18-1: show calendar Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the show calendar command.

Table 18-1: show calendar Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation

illegal time format. Time input format is different.

270

set calendar

set calendar

[Function]Displays and sets up the date and time.

[Input Format]set calendar <[[[[yy]mm]dd]hh]mm[.ss]>

[Parameters]yy

Specifies the last two numbers of the year (example: 00 for 2000).

mm

Specifies the month. (1-12)

dd

Specifies the day. (1-31)

hh

Specifies the hour. (0-23)

mm

Specifies the minute. (0-59)

ss

Specifies the second. (0-59)

Default

The year, month, day, hour and second (the minute cannot be omitted) can be omitted, but you cannot omit, for example, only the part between the day and the minute.


[Example]Enter the command below to set up for 15:30 on September 2, 1997.> set calendar 9709021530[Enter] key pressingTue Sep 2 15:30:00 1997>


[Response Messages]Table 18-2: set calendar Command Response Messages

Message Explanation


illegal time format. Time input format is different.

271

set calendar

[Precautions]1. Time cannot be set in the standby BCU.

2. If the time is set in the active BCU, it will be automatically set in the standby BCU.

3. The RM and CP CPU usage rate and CP buffer usage rate of the statistical information extracted using this System are cleared to "0" when the time is changed.

4. The adjacent relation of OSPF may be disconnected if the time is continuously corrected by 10 seconds or more when OSPF or OSPFv3 is used.

The disconnection conditions occur when the time is corrected for RouterDeadInterval time within HelloInterval time (default: 10 seconds) 10 times or more (default: 40/10 = four times or more)

5. DVMRP's adjacent relationship may be disconnected and the multicast packet relay may be temporarily stopped when time is continuously changed by 10 seconds or more using a time change command and function in performing IP multicast communication using DVMRP in this System. Such a state occurs when a correction of 10 seconds or more is continuously performed for 10 seconds two or more times.

272

rdate

rdate

[Function]Sets the date and time set in the specified remote host in this System.

[Input Format]rdate <IP address>

[Parameters]<IP address>

IP address of remote host


[Example]Set the date and time of the remote host with the IP address 192.168.0.1 in this System.> rdate 192.168.0.1[Enter] key pressingThu Sep 2 15:30:00 1997>



[Response Messages]"Table 18-3: rdate Command Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the rdate command.

Table 18-3: rdate Command Messages

[Precautions]1. Only the active BCU can use this command.

2. If the time is set in the active BCU, it will be automatically set in the standby BCU.

3. When use of the remote host time port (Port No. 37) is disabled, date and time of the remote host cannot be extracted.

Message Explanation


Local host <IP address> has best time, so not setting date Exact time set, so time will not be re-set. <IP address>: IP address

Time from <IP address> has varied more than the limit of <time> seconds

Allowable time of specified remote host exceeded, so time will not be re-set.<IP address>: IP address<time> : Second

Connection with <protocol> to <IP address> failed. Connection with specified remote host failed, so time will not be re-set.<protocol>: Protocol<IP address>: Remote host IP address

273

rdate

4. The display can be changed from the time zone variable to the local time in the workstation. With rdate, since the actual date and time set in the remote host are set in this System, the time displayed in the workstation and the time displayed in this System might be different.

5. The RM and CP CPU usage rate and CP buffer usage rate of the statistical information extracted using this System are cleared to "0" when the time is changed.

6. The adjacent relation of OSPF may be disconnected if the time is continuously corrected by 10 seconds or more when OSPF or OSPFv3 is used.

The disconnection conditions occur when the time is corrected for RouterDeadInterval time within HelloInterval time (default: 10 seconds) 10 times or more (default: 40/10 = four times or more)

7. DVMRP's adjacent relationship may be disconnected and the multicast packet relay may be temporarily stopped when time is continuously changed by 10 seconds or more using a time change command and function in performing IP multicast communication using DVMRP in this System. Such a state occurs when a correction of 10 seconds or more is continuously performed for 10 seconds two or more times.

274

show ntp status

show ntp status

[Function]Displays the operation state of a local ntp server.

[Input Format]show ntp status

[Parameters]None


[Example]Example of show ntp status command.

Display local ntp server operation state.

Figure 18-1: ntp Server Operation State> show ntp status [Enter] key pressingremote refid st t when poll reach delay offset disp==============================================================================*timesvr 192.168.1.100 3 u 1 64 377 0.89 -2.827 0.27>

[Display Explanation]Table 18-4: Content of show ntp status Command Display

Display item Meaning

remote Displays time server host name. Displays "LOCAL(1)" when local time server is defined.[Meaning of first code of host name]" ": host whose operation cannot be confirmed or made to invalid because high stratum value"+": host being left for selection candidate"#": selected synchronous host, which exceeds distance limit."*": selected synchronous hostother: host that made to invalid because of test result

refid Refer destination host that this time server synchronizes.

st Host stratum value

t Server type[Meaning of server type display]"u": unicast"b": broadcast"m": multicast"l": local

when Passed time (s) since received packet from host last.

poll Polling interval (s) to host

reach Reach possibility in octal

delay Total lap delay time (ms) at refer source of synchronous subnet

275

show ntp status


[Response Messages]"Table 18-5: show ntp status Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the show ntp status command.

Table 18-5: show ntp status Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

offset Offset value (ms)

disp Fluctuation value (ms) at refer source of synchronous subnet

Message Explanation

No association ID's returned Time server cannot be found.

Connection refused Cannot connect with NTP server.

Display item Meaning

276

restart ntp

restart ntp

[Function]Restarts the local ntp server.

[Input Format]restart ntp

[Parameters]None


[Example]Execution of restart ntp command:

Restart local ntp server.

Figure 18-2: ntp Server Restart# restart ntp [Enter] key pressing#



[Response Messages]"Table 18-6: restart ntp Command Response Messages" shows the response messages displayed in the restart ntp command.

Table 18-6: restart ntp Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation

No association ID's returned Time server cannot be found.

Connection refused Cannot connect with NTP server.

277

Chapter

19. MIB Information

snmp lookupsnmp getsnmp getnextsnmp walksnmp getifsnmp getroutesnmp getarpsnmp getforwardsnmp rgetsnmp rgetnextsnmp rwalksnmp rgetroutesnmp rgetarp

279

snmp lookup

snmp lookup

[Function]Displays the support MIB object name and object ID.

[Input Format]snmp lookup [<variable_name>]

[Parameters]variable_name

Specifies the object by the object name or dot notation.

Displays the list of objects of the object name and the dot notation after the specified object.

None

Displays all object names and dot notations.


[Example]Figure 19-1: Example of snmp lookup Command Execution

> snmp lookup sysDescr sysDescr = 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1 > snmp lookupiso = 1org = 1.3dod = 1.3.6internet = 1.3.6.1mgmt = 1.3.6.1.2

[Display Explanation]Displays in the format: "Object name = Object ID"


[Response Messages]Table 19-1: snmp lookup Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation

No match found for <MIB object name> <MIB object name> corresponding to lookup command not found.

280

snmp get

snmp get

[Function]Displays the value of the specified MIB.

[Input Format]snmp get <variable_name>



The specified object instance's administrative information is retrieved and displayed.


[Example]Figure 19-2: snmp get Command Example

> snmp get sysDescr.0 Name: sysDescr.0Value: HITACHI GR4000 xxxx 08-00> snmp get 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 Name: sysDescr.0Value: HITACHI GR4000 xxxx 08-00

[Display Explanation]Table 19-2: Definitions for snmp get Command Screen


[Response Messages]Table 19-3: snmp get Command Response Messages

Item Meaning Display detail information

Name Object instance -

Value Object instance value -

Message Explanation

Cannot translate variable class: <MIB Object Name> Object name <MIB Object Name> is incorrect.

make_obj_id_from_dot, bad character : x,y,z Incorrect characters x, y, and z included in object ID specified by dot notation.

receive error. Receive errors occur.

error parsing packet. SNMP frame with abnormal format received.

error parsing pdu packlet. Abnormal frame for SNMP PDU frame format received.

unable to connect to socket. SNMP frame send attempted, but failed.

281

snmp get

[Precautions]1. Immediately after the power turned on or immediately after the standby configuration

definition information file is copied into the current configuration definition information file (using copy backup-config command (see "copy backup-config)" a "No response" response message is output for about two minutes (SNMP agent being initialized).

2. If there is no snmp information set in the configuration definition information, a 'No Response' message will be outputted, and MIB cannot be obtained.

<SNMP agent IP address>: host unknown. Incorrect agent SNMP address specified.

No response - retrying No response from corresponding SNMP agent; retry.

No response - try again. No response from corresponding SNMP agent.

Error code set in packet - Return packet too big. The corresponding SNMP agent returns a response that it tried to respond to MIB value exceeding allowable size.

Error code set in packet - No such variable name. Index: <Number>.

The corresponding SNMP agent returns a response that the agent does not manage the object ID specified. The unmanaged object ID was specified as index <Number>.

Error code set in packet - General error: <Number>. The corresponding SNMP agent returns a response that MIB value could not be acquired properly while the agent manage the object ID specified was returned. Object ID is specified as index <Number>.

Error code set in packet - Unknown status code: <Code> SNMP frame containing response status code <Code> not governed by standard was received.

request ID mismatch. Got: <ID1>, expected: <ID2> Frame for request ID number <ID2> of SNMP frame expected, but SNMP frame of request ID number <ID1> received.

Message Explanation

282

snmp getnext

snmp getnext

[Function]Displays the value of the next specified MIBs.

[Input Format]snmp getnext <variable_name>



The objects of the object name and the dot notation are listed after the specified object.


[Example]Figure 19-3: Example of snmp getnext Command

> snmp getnext sysObjectID.0 Name: sysUpTime.0Value: 45300> snmp getnext 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2.0 Name: sysUpTime.0Value: 47300

[Display Explanation]Table 19-4: Definitions for snmp getnext Command Screen


[Response Messages]Table 19-5: snmp getnext Command Response Messages

Item Meaning Display Detail Information

Name Next specified object instance -

Value Next specified object instance value -

Message Explanation

Cannot translate variable class: <MIB Object Name> The object name <MIB Object Name> is incorrect.






283

snmp getnext


definition information file is copied into the current configuration definition information file (using copy backup-config command (see "copy backup-config"), a "No response" response message is output for about two minutes (SNMP agent being initialized).

2. When this System has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for IP-related MIB information and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire the information with snmp get (see "snmp get") or obtain it by setting an instance value in snmp getnext (see "snmp getnext").










request ID mismatch. Got: <ID1>, expected: <ID2> Frame for request ID number <ID2> of SNMP frame expected, but SNMP frame of request ID number <ID1> received. Or, a time-out took place in an MIB search.

Message Explanation

284

snmp walk

snmp walk

[Function]Displays specified MIB tree.

[Input Format]snmp walk <variable_name>



The next administrative information related to the specified object instance is retrieved, and all instances of the corresponding object are displayed.


[Example]Figure 19-4: Example of snmp walk Command Screen

> snmp walk interfaces Name: ifNumber.0Value: 3 Name: ifIndex.1Value: 1 Name: ifIndex.2Value: 2 Name: ifIndex.3Value: 3 Name: ifDescr.1Value: loopback Name: ifDescr.2Value: 10/100BASE-TX-rmEthernet Name: ifDescr.3Value: 1000BASE-X 8/0 giga80

[Display Explanation]Table 19-6: snmp walk Command Response Messages



Name Object instance -

Value Object instance value -

285

snmp walk

[Response Messages]Table 19-7: snmp walk Command Response Messages



2. When this System has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for IP-related MIB information and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire the information with snmp get (see "snmp get") or obtain it by setting an instance value in snmp getnext (see "snmp getnext").


Message Explanation

Cannot translate variable class: <MIB Object Name> The object name <MIB Object Name> incorrect.















286

snmp getif

snmp getif

[Function]Displays MIB interface group information.

[Input Format]snmp getif

[Parameters]None

The administrative information of the interface group is retrieved, and the interface information is displayed.


[Example]Figure 19-5: Example of snmp getif Command Screen

> snmp getif # Type PhysAddr Admn Oper InOctets OutOctets InPkts OutPkts 1 loopback 00:00:00:00:00:00 up up 18426 18575 290 292 2 Ethernet 00:00:87:c0:d1:61 up up 24591 3417 377 52 3 Ethernet 00:00:87:c0:d1:62 up down 601 854 6 7

[Display Explanation]Table 19-8: Definitions for snmp getif Command


# Shows ifIndex number. -

Type Shows ifType (interface type). other (Types other than the following)

Ethernet

loopback (Local loopback)

PhysAddr Shows ifPhysAddress (physical address of interface). -

Admn Shows ifAdminStatus (interface status of configuration definition information).

up (in operation)

down (not in operation)

Oper Shows ifOperStatus (current status of interface). up (in operation)

down (not in operation)

test (test in progress)

InOctets Shows ifInOctets (number of octets received by interface).

-

OutOctets Shows ifOutOctets (number of octets sent by interface). -

InPkts Shows ifInUcastPkts+ifInNUcastPkts (number of packets received by interface).

-

OutPkts Shows ifOutUcastPkts+ifOutNUcastPkts (number of packets received by interface).

-

287

snmp getif


[Response Messages]Table 19-9: snmp getif Command Response Messages



2. If there is no snmp information set in the configuration definition information, a "No Response" message will be outputted, and MIB cannot be obtained.

Message Explanation














288

snmp getroute

snmp getroute

[Function]Displays ipRouteTable (IP routing table).

[Input Format]snmp getroute

[Parameters]None

The administrative information of ipRouteTable is retrieved, and the routing information is displayed.


[Example]Figure 19-6: Example of snmp getroute Command

> snmp getrouteIndex Destination NextHop Metric1 Type Proto Age 2 10.0.0.0 10.1.1.1 0 direct local 720 2 10.1.1.0 10.1.1.1 0 direct local 720 2 10.1.1.1 10.1.1.1 0 direct local 720 0 127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 other local 720 1 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 0 direct local 720>

[Display Explanation]Table 19-10: Definitions for snmp getrouteCommand Screen


Index Shows ipRouteIfIndex (interface number to reach next hop of this route)

-

Destination Shows ipRouteDest (destination IP address of this route) -

NextHop Shows ipRouteNextHop (IP address of next hop of destination of this route)

-

Metric1 Shows ipRouteMetric1 (primary routing metric of this route).

-

Type Shows ipRouteType (type of this route) direct (direct route)

indirect (indirect route)

invalid (invalid route)

other (other routes)

Proto Shows ipRouteProto (routing protocol) rip (RIP)

ospf (OSPF)

bgp (bgp)

local (static routing)

netmgmt (static routing)

289

snmp getroute


[Response Messages]Table 19-11: snmp getroute Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. Immediately after the power turned on or after immediately the standby configuration

definition information file is copied into the current configuration definition information file (using copy backup-config command (see "copy backup-config") , a "No response" response message is output for about two minutes (SNMP agent being initialized).

2. When this System has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for MIB information of ipRouteTable and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire ipRouteTable information with snmp get (see "snmp getnext") or obtain it by setting an instance value in snmp getnext (see "snmp getnext").


other

Age Shows ipRouteAge (number of elapsed seconds since this route was last updated or confirmed).

-

Message Explanation














No routing information available. No entry in routing table.


290

snmp getarp

snmp getarp

[Function]Displays ipNetToMediaTable (IP address conversion table).

[Input Format]snmp getarp

[Parameters]None

The administrative information of ipNetToMediaTable is retrieved, and the ARP information is displayed without any parameters.


[Example]Figure 19-7: Example of snmp getarp Command

> snmp getarp Index Network Address Physical Address Type 4 12.1.1.99 00:00:87:c0:d1:62 static>

[Display Explanation]Table 19-12: Definitions for snmp getarpCommand Screen


[Response Messages]Table 19-13: snmp getarp Command Response Messages


Index Shows ipNetToMediaIfIndex (interface number with this ARP information)

-

Network Address Shows ipNetToMediaNetAddress (IP address corresponding to the physical address)

-

Physical Address Shows ipNetToMediaPhysAddress (physical address) -

Type Shows ipNetToMediaType (mapping type) other (other than the following mapping)

invalid (invalid mapping)

dynamic (dynamic mapping)

static (static mapping)

Message Explanation



291

snmp getarp


definition information file is copied into the current configuration definition information file (using copy backup-config command (see "copy backup-config"), a "No response" response message is output for about two minutes (SNMP agent being initialized) .

2. When this System has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for MIB information of ipNetToMediaTable and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire ipNetToMediaTable information with snmp get (see "snmp getnext") or obtain it by setting an instance value in snmp getnext (see "snmp getnext").













No ARP information available. No entry in ARP table.

Message Explanation

292

snmp getforward

snmp getforward

[Function]Displays ipForwardTable (IP forwarding table).

[Input Format]snmp getforward

[Parameters]None

Searches the management information of ipForwardTable and displays the forwarding information.


[Example]Figure 19-8: Example of snmp getforward Command

> snmp getforwardIndex Destination NextHop Metric1 Type Proto Age NH-AS 2 10.0.0.0/8 10.1.1.1 0 direct local 720 300 2 10.1.1.0/8 10.1.1.1 0 direct local 720 300 0 127.0.0.0/32 0.0.0.0 0 other local 720 300 1 127.0.0.1/32 127.0.0.1 0 direct local 720 300

[Display Explanation]Table 19-14: Definitions for snmp getforward Command


Index Shows ipForwardIfIndex (the identifier of a local interface connected with the next hop in this route).

-

Destination Shows ipForwardDest (the destination address of this route) and ipForwardMask (the mask for establishing the destination and operation) (the display in mask length).

-

NextHop Shows ipForwardNextHop (the address of the next system in a route).

-

Metric1 Shows ipForwardMetric1 (the metric for this route). -

Type Shows ipForwardType (the type of a route). local (Local)

remote (Remote)

invalid (Invalid)

other (Invalid)

Proto Shows ipForwardProto (the protocol in which this route was learned).

rip (RIP)

ospf (OSPF)

bgp (bgp)

local (Static routing)

293

snmp getforward


[Response Messages]Table 19-15: snmp getforward Command Response Messages



2. When this System has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for MIB information of ipForwardTable and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire ipForwardTable information with snmp rgetnext (see "snmp rgetnext").

netmgmt (Static routing)

other (Others)

Age Shows ipForwardAge (the passage time after this route was learned or updated).

-

NH-AS Shows ipForwardNextHopAS (the autonomous system number of the next hop).

-

Message Explanation














No forwarding information available. No entry of forwarding table.


294

snmp getforward


295

snmp rget

snmp rget

[Function]Displays the value of MIB of the specified remote system.

[Input Format]snmp rget [version { 1 | 2 }] <IP Address> <community> <variable_name>

[Parameters]Access to the SNMP agent remotely, and acquires and displays the specified object's administrative information.

version {1|2}

Specifies the SNMP version.

IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the remotely accessed system.

community

Specifies the community name of a remote system.

variable_name

Specifies the object by the object name or dot notation of MIB.


[Example]Figure 19-9: Example of snmp rget Command

> snmp rget version 2 192.168.11.35 public sysObjectID.0 Name: sysObjectID.0Value: gr4000

[Display Explanation]Table 19-16: Definitions for snmp rget Command Screen


[Response Messages]Table 19-17: snmp rget Command Response Messages


Name Next specified object instance. -

Value Next specified object instance value. -

Message Explanation



296

snmp rget

[Precautions]None














Message Explanation

297

snmp rgetnext

snmp rgetnext

[Function]Displays the value of the next MIB of the specified remote system.

[Input Format]snmp rgetnext [version { 1 | 2 }] <IP Address> <community> <variable_name>

[Parameters]Accesses to the SNMP agent remotely, and acquires and displays the next administrative information related to the specified object.

version { 1 | 2 }


IP Address


community


variable_name



[Example]Figure 19-10: Example of snmp rgetnext Command

> snmp rgetnext version 2 192.168.11.35 public sysObjectID.0 Name: sysUpTime.0Value: 27603450

[Display Explanation]Table 19-18: Definitions for snmp rgetnextCommand


[Response Messages]Table 19-19: snmp rgetnext Command Response Messages


Name Next specified object instance -

Value Next specified object instance value -

Message Explanation



298

snmp rgetnext

[Precautions]When the system has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for MIB information and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire information with snmp rget (see "snmp rget") or obtain it by setting an instance value in snmp rgetnext (see "snmp rgetnext").














Message Explanation

299

snmp rwalk

snmp rwalk

[Function]Displays the MIB tree of the specified remote system.

[Input Format]snmp rwalk [version { 1 | 2 }] <IP Address> <community> <variable_name>

[Parameters]Accesses to the SNMP agent remotely, and acquires and displays all administrative information related to the specified object.

version { 1 | 2 }


IP Address


community


variable_name



[Example]Figure 19-11: Example of snmp rwalk Command

> snmp rwalk version 2 192.168.11.35 public ifDescr Name: ifDescr.1Value: loopback Name: ifDescr.2Value: 1000BASE-X 4/5 giga45

[Display Explanation]Table 19-20: Definitions for snmp rwalk Command Screen


[Response Messages]Table 19-21: snmp rwalk Command Response Messages


Name Next specified object instance. -

Value Next specified object instance value. -

Message Explanation


300

snmp rwalk

[Precautions]When the system has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for IP-related MIB information and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire information with snmp rget (see "snmp rget") or obtain it by setting an instance value in snmp rgetnext (see "snmp rgetnext").















Message Explanation

301

snmp rgetroute

snmp rgetroute

[Function]Displays ipRouteTable (IP routing table) of the specified remote system.

[Input Format]snmp rgetroute <IP Address> <community>

[Parameters]Accesses to the SNMP agent remotely, and displays routing information from management information ipRouteTable.

IP Address


community



[Example]Figure 19-12: Example of snmp rgetroute Command

> snmp rgetroute 20.1.30.101 publicNo response - retrying... - retrying... - try again. > snmp rgetroute 20.1.30.101 publicIndex Destination NextHop Metric1 Type Proto Age 2 20.0.0.0 20.1.1.1 0 direct local 180 2 20.1.1.0 20.1.1.1 0 direct local 720

[Display Explanation]Table 19-22: Definitions for snmp rgetroute Command Screen


Index Shows ipRouteIfIndex (interface number to reach next hop of this route).

-

Destination Shows ipRouteDest (destination IP address of this route) -

NextHop Shows ipRouteNextHop (IP address of next hop of destination of this route)

-

Metric1 Shows ipRouteMetric1 (primary routing metric for this route) -

Type Shows ipRouteType (this route type) direct (direct route)

indirect (indirect route)

invalid (invalid route)

other (other routes)

Proto Shows ipRouteProto (routing protocol) rip (RIP)

302

snmp rgetroute


[Response Messages]Table 19-23: snmp getroute Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. For the block related to an AUX port, the index value is displayed in -1.

2. When the system has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for MIB information of ipRouteTable and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire ipRouteTable information with snmp rgetnext (see "snmp rgetnext").

ospf (OSPF)

bgp (bgp)

local (static routing)

netmgmt (static routing)

other (others)

Age Shows ipRouteAge (number of seconds elapsed since this route was last updated or confirmed).

-

Message Explanation














No routing information available. No entry in routing table.


303

snmp rgetarp

snmp rgetarp

[Function]Displays the ipNetToMediaTable (IP address conversion table) of the specified remote system.

[Input Format]snmp rgetarp <IP Address> <community>

[Parameters]Accesses to the SNMP agent remotely, and displays ARP information from management information ipNetToMediaTable.

IP Address


community



[Example]Figure 19-13: Example of snmp rgetarp Command

> snmp rgetarp 20.1.30.101 publicIndex Network Address Physical Address Type 4 12.1.1.99 00:70 static 1 112.1.1.99 00:87:00:58:88:70 static

[Display Explanation]Table 19-24: Definitions for snmp rgetarp Command



Index ipNetToMediaIfIndex (interface number with this ARP information)

-

Network Address ipNetToMediaNetAddress (IP address corresponding to the physical address.)

-

Physical Address ipNetToMediaPhysAddress (physical address) -

Type ipNetToMediaType (mapping type) other (other than the following mapping)

invalid (invalid mapping)

dynamic (dynamic mapping)

static (static mapping)

304

snmp rgetarp

[Response Messages]Table 19-25: snmp rgetarp Command Response Messages

[Precautions]When the system has many interfaces, it takes a long time to search for MIB information of ipNetToMediaTable and may sometimes give rise to time-out. In such a case, acquire ipNetToMediaTable information with snmp rgetnext (see "snmp rgetnext").

Message Explanation














No ARP information available. No entry in the ARP table.

305

Chapter

20. Flow Designation

show sflowclear sflow statistics restart sflowdump sflow

307

show sflow

show sflow

[Function]Displays the flow-statistics setting condition about sFlow statistics and the counter information extracted.

[Input Format]show sflow [detail]

[Parameters]detail

Displays detailed information of sFlow statistics for each physical port.


[Example]1. The figure below shows the displayed results of sFlow statistics information.

Figure 20-1: sFlow Statistics Information Display> show sflowsFlow service status: enablesFlow service version: 4Progress time from sFlow statistics cleared: 8:00:05Received sFlow samples:37269 Dropped sFlow samples:2093Collector exported sFlow samples:37269 Couldn't exported sFlow samples:0Collector IP address:192.168.4.199 UDP:6343 Source IP address:130.130.130.1 Send FlowSample UDP packets:12077 Send failed:0 Send CounterSample UDP packets:621 Send failed:0Collector IP address:192.168.4.203 UDP:65535 Source IP address:130.130.130.1 Send FlowSample UDP packets:12077 Send failed:0 Send CounterSample UDP packets:621 Send failed:0CounterSample interval rate:60Default configured rate:2048 Default actual rate:2048Configured sFlow port: 1/2 - 1/4 , 5/9 - 5/11 , 7/1

2. sFlow statistics information (detail) displayed results are shown in the figure below:

Figure 20-2: sFlow Statistics Information Display (Detail)> show sflow detailsFlow service status: enablesFlow service version: 4Progress time from sFlow statistics cleared: 8:00:05Received sFlow samples:37269 Dropped sFlow samples:2093Collector exported sFlow samples:37269 Couldn't exported sFlow samples:0Collector IP address:192.168.4.199 UDP:6343 Source IP address:130.130.130.1 Send FlowSample UDP packets:12077 Send failed:0 Send CounterSample UDP packets:621 Send failed:0Collector IP address:192.168.4.203 UDP:65535 Source IP address:130.130.130.1 Send FlowSample UDP packets:12077 Send failed:0 Send CounterSample UDP packets:621 Send failed:0CounterSample interval rate:60

308

show sflow

Default configured rate:2048 Default actual rate:2048Configured sFlow port: 1/2 - 1/4 , 5/9 - 5/11 , 7/1Sampling port rates: Port:1/2 Configured rate:2048 Actual rate:2048 Port:1/3 Configured rate:512 Actual rate:2048 Port:1/4 Configured rate:512 Actual rate:2048 Port:5/9 Configured rate:512 Actual rate:8192 Port:5/10 Configured rate:512 Actual rate:8192 Port:5/11 Configured rate:8192 Actual rate:8192 Port:7/1 Configured rate:512 Actual rate:512

[Display Explanation]The description of the flow statistics display items is shown in the table below:

Table 20-1: sFlow Statistics Information Display

Display item Content

sFlow service status Current operational state of sFlow statistics

sFlow service version Version of sFlow packet

Progress time from sFlow statistics cleared

Passed time since sFlow function started or since "clear sflow statistics" was input last.

hh:mm:ss (day) Passed time since sFlow statistics started (hour: minut: second) (day: Passed days are shown if 24 hours or more have elapsed.)

Received sFlow samples Total number of sample packets reported normally

Dropped sFlow samples Total number of sample packets which were not reported and were discarded for some reason.

Collector exported sFlow samples Total number of sample packets included in UDP packets sent to collector system.

Couldn't exported sFlow samples Total number of sample packets included in UDP packets whose transmission failed.

Collector IP address IP address of collector system set by configuration definition.

UDP UDP port Number

Source IP address IP address of source interface sending packets from this System.

Send FlowSample UDP packets Number of UDP packets in flow sample reported to collector system.

Send CounterSample UDP packets Number of UDP packets in counter sample reported to collector system.

Send failed Number of UDP packets that could not be reported to collector system

CounterSample interval rate Interval time of reporting counter samples (in seconds).

Default configured rate Interval time of sampling for entire system as set by configuration definition.

Default actual rate Actual interval time of sampling for entire system.

Configured sFlow port Physical port extracting flow statistics as specified by configuration definition.

Sampling port rates List of physical ports monitoring sFlow statistics.

Port NIF No./LINE No. used in sFlow statistics.

Configured rate Sampling interval of as set by configuration definition.

Actual rate Actual sampling interval.

309

show sflow


[Response Messages]Table 20-2: show sflow Command Response Messages

[Precautions]Statistical information counter will be cleared to 0 when initialization of CP occurs.

In addition, packet count and statistical information counter return to 0 when the values exceed their maximum value (32-bit counter).

Message Explanation

sflow is not configured. No configuration definition information has been set for sFlow statistics, or "no" is set in configuration definition. Check the configuration definition information. As for how to set the sFlow statistics function, see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, 4. Flow Statistics".

Flowd is not response. No response from flow statistics program. Input again the command. If this message appears frequently, restart the flow statistics program using a restart sflow command (See "restart sflow").

No enough memory. Memory is insufficient for executing the command.


Can't execute this command in standby BCU. A command cannot be executed in standby BCU.

310

clear sflow statistics

clear sflow statistics

[Function]Clears statistical information managed by sFlow statistics.

[Input Format]clear sflow statistics

[Parameters]None


[Example]> clear sflow statistics>



[Response Messages]Table 20-3: clear sflow statistics Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation






311

restart sflow

restart sflow

[Function]Restarts the flow statistics program.

[Input Format]restart sflow [-f] [core-file]

[Parameters]-f

Restarts the flow statistics program without a restart confirmation message.

core-fileOutputs the flow statistics program core file (flowd.core) during restarting.


[Example]Restart the flow statistics program.> restart sflowsflow program restart OK? (y/n): y>



[Response Messages]Table 20-4: restart sflow Command Response Messages

[Precautions]Counter value of statistics information is cleared when sFlow statistics restart.

core output file: /primaryMC/var/core/flowd.core

Message Explanation


Flowd is not response. No response from flow statistics program. Input again the command. If this message appears frequently, restart the flow statistics program using this command.




312

dump sflow

dump sflow

[Function]Outputs a debug information file extracting in the flow statistics program.

[Input Format]dump sflow

[Parameters]None


[Example]> dump sflow>



[Response Messages]Table 20-5: dump sflow Command Response Messages

[Precautions]Output file: /primaryMC/var/dump/sflow.trc

Message Explanation






313

PART 4: Network Interface

Chapter

21. Ethernet

show interfaces (Ethernet)clear counters (ethernet)show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage)show vlans (Tag-VLAN Linkage)clear counters(Tag-VLAN Linkage)clear vlan statistics (Tag-VLAN Linkage)close (ethernet)free (ethernet)test interfaces (ethernet)no test interfaces (ethernet)

315

show interfaces (Ethernet)


[Function]show interfaces

Displays the Ethernet NIF information, detailed Line information, and Tag-VLAN linkage line summary information.

[Input Format]show interfaces ethernet [<NIF No.>/<Line No.>] [detail]show interfaces nif <NIF No.> line [<Line No.>] [detail]show interfaces <Line Name> [detail]

[Parameters]ethernet

Displays all Line states set using Ethernet. NIF information is not displayed when a <NIF No.>/<Line No.> parameter is omitted and this parameter is specified.

nif <NIF No.> or <NIF No.>

Specifies NIF number. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

line [<Line No.>] or <Line No.>

Specifies Line number. For the range of line numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]". When line number is omitted, displays status of all line under control of specified NIF.

<Line Name>

Specifies Line name.

detail

Displays detail statistics information.


[Example]Displays the NIF information of 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, detailed Line information, and the summary information of a Tag-VLAN linkage line. An example of the screen displayed for an execution result is shown in "Figure 21-1: Execution Result Screen 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Line Specification".

316


Figure 21-1: Execution Result Screen 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Line Specification

(Note 1) This line is not displayed when a Tag-VLAN linkage line is not defined.

[Display Explanation]Explanation of the items displayed in 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Line

317

information and statistics information is shown in "Table 21-1: 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Line Detail Information and Statistics Information Display". Explanation of the display of items of the Tag-VLAN linkage line summary information is shown in "Table 21-2: Tag-VLAN Linkage Line summary Information Display".

For an explanation of the items in a display of NIF information and the line summary information, see show nif command ("11. PRU/NIF Management show nif (Ethernet)"). The display below appears with no NIF information when an ethernet parameter is executed. <Line Name>: NIF<NIF No.>/Line<Line No.>

Table 21-1: 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Line Detail Information and Statistics Information Display

Item Content


Protocol Displays the link status of protocol (up/down).

IP address Displays the IP address allocated to the corresponding line. "-" is displayed when the IP address is not acquired.

Broadcast IP address Displays the broadcast IP address allocated to the corresponding line.

Time-since-last-status-change Time elapsed since the status changed last.hh:mm:ss: When 24 hours or less has passed. (hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)dd:hh:mm:ss: When more than 24 hours has passed. (dd=date, hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)Over 100 days: When 100 days or more has passed.

Peak out Displays maximum use band on the transmission side of the relevant line (out) and the time for the 24 hours before command was entered. For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the nearest whole number for display.

Peak in Displays maximum use band on the receiving side of the relevant line (in) and the time for the 24 hours before command was entered.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the nearest whole number for display.

Output rate Displays the transmission throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.

Input rate Displays the receiving throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculationFor communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.

Signal status Displays detection (thru)/no detection (failure) of optical signal.Note: When NIF is 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, "-" is displayed.

Flow control send enable Sends a pause packet.

disable Sends no pause packet.

318

Flow control receive enable Receives a pause packet.

disable Receives no pause packet.

TPID Displays the TagProtocolIDentifier value that identifies VLAN using relevant line. When Tag-VLAN linkage function is not used, "-" is displayed.

Frame size Displays the maximum frame length (Note 1) on a relevant line in octets.

retry Failure retry counter for relevant line. When count value is 4, line is not operating due to failure.

Interface name Displays the interface name allocated to the relevant line. When Tag-VLAN linkage function is used or an interface is not allocated, "-" is displayed.

Statistics information

Classification <Out octets/packets counter> Transmission statistics information

<In octets/packets counter> Receiving statistics information

<Out line error counter> Transmission system error information

<In line error counter> Receiving system error information

<Line fault counter> Failure information

Transmission/receiving statistics information detail item

Octets Number of octets

Unicast packets Number of unicast packets

Multicast packets Number of multicast packets

Broadcast packets Number of broadcast packets

Transmission system error information detail item

Late collision Generation frequency of delayed collisions

Single collision Generation frequency of one collision

Multiple collisions Generation frequency of 2-15 collisions

Excessive collisions Generation frequency of 16 or more collisions

Carrier sense lost Undetected/lost carrier sense frequency

Defer indication Deferral generation frequency

Excessive deferral Excessive deferral generation frequency

Underrun Underrun generation frequency

Item Content


319

(Note 1)

The maximum frame length indicates the length from MAC header to DATA and PAD. For frame format, see Frame Format in "Applications Guide, Vol.1, 4.3 MAC/LLC Sub-Layer Control".

Table 21-2: Tag-VLAN Linkage Line summary Information Display

Receiving system error information detail item

CRC errors CRC Error generation frequency

Alignment Frame alignment error generation frequency

Fragments Fragment generation frequency

Jabber JAVA generation frequency

Overrun Generation frequency of overrun and underrun errors occurred in layer 1.

Layer 1 symbol errors Generation frequency of symbol errors occurred in layer 1.


Short frames Short-frame packet reception frequency

Long frames Long-frame packet reception frequency

Failure information detail item

Polarity changed Polarity alternation frequency of send/receive pin of a twisted-pair cable

MDI cross over changed Exchange frequency of the send and receive pins of a twisted-pair cable

Link down Link down frequency

Link down in operational state Generation frequency of failures (link down) during communication

Down shift Frequency of line speed change from 1000M to 100M

Item Content

VLAN:<VLAN ID> Displays a VLAN ID number or "untagged".

Interface name: <Line name> Displays the interface name allocated to the corresponding Tag-VLAN linkage line. Incidentally, "-" is displayed if there is no IP interface allocated.

description: <Complementary description>

Displays the contents of description configuration definition information defined in the relevant Tag-VLAN linkage line. description configuration definition information can set the usage purpose on the relevant Tag-VLAN linkage line as a comment. The contents are not displayed when no description configuration definition information is defined.

Protocol Displays link status of protocol (up/down).

Item Content


320


[Example]Displays the 1000BASE-X NIF information, the Line detail information, and the summary information of a Tag-VLAN linkage line. The screen example of an execution result is shown in "Figure 21-2: 1000BASE-X Line Specification Execution Result Display".

IP address Displays the IP address allocated to the corresponding Tag-VLAN linkage line.

Broadcast IP address Displays the broadcast IP address of the corresponding Tag-VLAN linkage line.

Item Content

321


Figure 21-2: 1000BASE-X Line Specification Execution Result Display


[Display Explanation]The description of 1000BASE-X line detail information and statistics information display item are shown in "Table 21-3: 1000BASE-X Line detail Information and Statistics Information

322

Display".

For the description of Tag-VLAN linkage line summary information display item, see "Table 21-2: Tag-VLAN Linkage Line summary Information Display".

For the NIF information display and Line summary information display item, see show nif command in ("11. PRU/NIF Management show nif (Ethernet)"). The display below appears with no NIF information when an ethernet parameter is executed. <Line Name>: NIF<NIF No.>/Line<Line No.>

Table 21-3: 1000BASE-X Line detail Information and Statistics Information Display

Item Content





Time-since-last-status-change Time elapsed since the status changed last.hh:mm:ss: When 24 hours or less has passed. (hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)dd:hh:mm:ss: When more than 24hours has passed. (dd=date, hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)Over 100 days: When 100 days or more has passed.

Peak out Displays maximum use band on the transmission side of the relevant line (out) and the time for the 24 hours before command was entered.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the nearest whole number for display.


Output rate Displays the transmission throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.

Input rate Displays the receiving throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.

Signal status Displays detection (thru)/no detection (failure) of optical signal.




323





retry Failure retry counter for relevant line. When count value is 4, line is not operating due to failure.














Late collision Generation frequency of delayed collisions

Single collision Generation frequency of one collision

Multiple collisions Generation frequency of 2-15 collisions

Excessive collisions Generation frequency of 16 or more collisions

Carrier sense lost Undetected/lost carrier sense frequency

Defer indication Deferral generation frequency

Excessive deferral Excessive deferral generation frequency




Item Content


324


(Note 1)

The maximum frame length indicates the length from MAC header to DATA and PAD. For frame format, see Frame Format in "Applications Guide, Vol.1, 4.3 MAC/LLC Sub-Layer Control".

[Example]Summary information of 10GBASE-R NIF information, Line detail information, and Tag-VLAN linkage line is displayed. Examples of execution results are shown in "Figure 21-3: 10GBASE-R Line Specification Execution Results".




Overrun Generation frequency of overrun and underrun errors occurred in layer 1.






Link down Link down frequency

TX fault Generation frequency of failures on a transmission line

Signal detect errors Frequency of failed detection of a signal line

Optical level errors Generation frequency of failures in an optical module

Link down in operational state Generation frequency of failures (link down) during communication

Signal detect errors in operational state Generation frequency of failures (failed detection of a signal line) during communication

Optical level errors in operational state Generation frequency of failures (in an optical module) during communication

Item Content


325


Figure 21-3: 10GBASE-R Line Specification Execution Results


[Display Explanation]Description of 10GBASE-R Line detail information and statistics information display items are shown in "Table 21-4: 10GBASE-R Line detail Information and Statistics Information Display".

326

For description of Tag-VLAN linkage line summary information display items, see "Table 21-2: Tag-VLAN Linkage Line summary Information Display".

For display items of NIF information and line summary information, see show nif command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management show nif (Ethernet)". The display below appears with no NIF information when an ethernet parameter is executed. <Line Name>: NIF<NIF No.>/Line<Line No.>

Table 21-4: 10GBASE-R Line detail Information and Statistics Information Display

Item Content





Time-since-last-status-change Time elapsed since the status changed last.hh:mm:ss: When 24 hours or less has passed. (hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)dd:hh:mm:ss: When more than 24hours has passed. (dd=date, hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)Over 100 days: When 100 days or more has passed.



Output rate Displays the transmission throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.

Input rate Displays the receiving throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.






327




retry Failure retry counter for relevant line. When count value is 4, line is not operating caused due to failure.




















Overrun Overrun generation frequency

Symbol errors Symbol error generation frequency




Signal detect errors Frequency of failed detection of a signal line

Item Content


328


(Note 1)

The maximum frame length indicates the length from MAC header to DATA and PAD. The frame length shows from MAC header to DATA and PAD. For frame format, see frame format in "Applications Guide, Vol.1, 4.3 MAC/LLC Sub-Layer Control".

[Example]sSummary information of 10GBASE-R NIF information, Line detail information, and Tag-VLAN linkage line is displayed. Examples of execution results are shown in "Figure 21-4: 10GBASE-W Line Specification Execution Results".

LOS of sync Frequency of failed synchronization

HI_BER Generation frequency of HI_BER (HIgh Bit Error Rate)

LF Generation frequency of LF (Local Fault)

RF Generation frequency of RF (Remote Fault)

Signal detect errors in operational state Generation frequency of failures (failed detection of a signal line) during communication

LOS of sync in operational state Generation frequency of failures (failed synchronization) during communication

HI_BER in operational state Generation frequency of failures (HI_BER) during communication

LF in operational state Generation frequency of failures (LF) during communication

RF in operational state Generation frequency of failures (RF) during communication

Item Content


329


Figure 21-4: 10GBASE-W Line Specification Execution Results


[Example]summary information of 10GBASE-R NIF information, Line detail information, detail statistics information, and Tag-VLAN linkage line is displayed. Examples of execution results are shown in "Figure 21-5: 10GBASE-W Line Detail Statistics Information Specification Execution Results".

330


Figure 21-5: 10GBASE-W Line Detail Statistics Information Specification Execution Results

331

[Display Explanation]Description of 10GBASE-W Line detail information and statistics information display items are shown in "Table 21-5: 10GBASE-W Line Detail Information and Statistics Information Display".

For the description of Tag-VLAN linkage line summary information display items, see "Table 21-2: Tag-VLAN Linkage Line summary Information Display".

For the NIF information display and the Line summary information display items, see show nif command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management show nif (Ethernet)"). The display below appears with no NIF information when an ethernet parameter is executed. <Line Name>: NIF<NIF No.>/Line<Line No.>

Table 21-5: 10GBASE-W Line Detail Information and Statistics Information Display

Item Content


Protocol Displays link status of protocol (up/down)



332


Time-since-last-status-change Time elapsed since the status changed last.hh:mm:ss: When 24 hours or less has passed. (hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)dd:hh:mm:ss: When more than 24 hours has passed. (dd=date, hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second)Over 100 days: When 100 days or more has passed.



Output rate Displays the transmission throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.

Input rate Displays the receiving throughput of the relevant line during one second before the command being entered in bps and pps.From MAC header to FCS of Frame are included for bps calculation.For communication smaller than 1 bit, "0 Mbps" is displayed in this value. For communication greater than 1 bit and under 1.5Mbits, "1 Mbps" is displayed. For communication of 1.5Mbits or greater, the value is rounded to the first decimal place for display.






TPID Displays the TagProtocolIDentifier value that identifies the VLAN using the relevant line. When Tag-VLAN linkage function is not used, "-" is displayed.


retry Failure retry counter for relevant line. When count value is 4, line is not operating caused by failure.


Clock independent Synchronous clock is synchronized independently.

external Synchronous clock is synchronized externally.

Item Content


333


RDI 1bit RDI mode uses 1 bit (RDI).

3bit RDI mode uses 3 bits (E-RDI).

Section trace message mode 16 Octets Section trace message mode uses 16 octets.

1 Octet Section trace message mode uses 1 octet.

C1 Section trace message mode uses C1 bytes.

Section trace message send The section trace message sent when the command was executed is displayed in hex.

Section trace message receive The section trace message received when the command was executed is displayed in hex.

Path trace message mode 16 Octets Path trace message mode uses 16 octets.

1 Octet Path trace message mode uses 1 octet.

Path trace message send The path trace message sent when the command was executed is displayed in hex.

Path trace message receive The path trace message received when the command was executed is displayed in hex.



















Overrun Overrun generation frequency

Symbol errors Symbol error generation frequency

Item Content


334





LOS of sync Frequency of failed synchronization

HI_BER Generation frequency of HI_BER (HIgh Bit Error Rate)

LF Generation frequency of LF (Local Fault)

RF Generation frequency of RF (Remote Fault)

LOS of sync in operational state Generation frequency of failures (failed synchronization) during communication

HI_BER in operational state Generation frequency of failures (HI_BER) during communication

LF in operational state Generation frequency of failures (LF) during communication

RF in operational state Generation frequency of failures (RF) during communication

Detail statistics information detail item

LOS LOS (Loss Of Signal)generation frequency

LOF LOF (Loss Of Frame) generation frequency

L-AIS L-AIS (Line-Alarm Indication Signal) generation frequency

L-RDI L-RDI (Line-Remote Defect Indication) generation frequency

P-LOP P-LOP (Path-Loss Of Pointer) generation frequency

P-AIS P-AIS (Path-Alarm Indication Signal) generation frequency

P-LCD P-LCD (Path-Loss of Cell Delination) generation frequency

P-RDI P-RDI (Path-Remote Defect Indication) generation frequency

RDI P-AIS/P-LOP RDI P-AIS/P-LOP (Remote Defect Indication- Path-Alarm Indication Signal/Path-Loss Of Pointer) generation frequency

RDI-PLM/LCD RDI-PLM/LCD (Remote Defect Indication-Payload Label Mismatch/Loss of Cell Delination) generation frequency

S-BIP8 S-BIP8 (Section Bit Interleaved Parity 8) generation frequency

L-BIP1536 L-BIP1536 (Line Bit Interleaved Parity 1536) generation frequency

Item Content


335

(Note 1)

The maximum frame length indicates the length from MAC header to DATA and PAD. The frame length shows from MAC header to DATA and PAD. For frame format, see Frame Format in "Applications Guide, Vol.1, 4.3 MAC/LLC Sub-Layer Control".


[Response Messages]Table 21-6: show interfaces (ethernet) Command Response Messages

P-BIP8 P-BIP8 (Path Bit Interleaved Parity 8) generation frequency

L-REI L-REI (Line Path Remote Error Indication) generation frequency

P-REI P-REI (Path Remote Error Indication) generation frequency

P-PLM P-PLM (Path Indication-Payload Label Mismatch) generation frequency

B2SD B2 SD (Signal Degrade) generation frequency

LOS in operational state Generation frequency of failures (LOS ) during communication

LOF in operational state Generation frequency of failures (LOF ) during communication

L-AIS in operational state Generation frequency of failures (L-AIS) during communication

L-RDI in operational state Generation frequency of failures (L-RDI) during communication

P-LOP in operational state Generation frequency of failures (P-LOP) during communication

P-AIS in operational state Generation frequency of failures (P-AIS) during communication

P-LCD in operational state Generation frequency of failures (P-LCD) during communication

P-RDI in operational state Generation frequency of failures (P-RDI) during communication

RDI P-AIS/P-LOP in operational state

Generation frequency of failures (RDI P-AIS/P-LOP) during communication

RDI-PLM/LCD in operational state Generation frequency of failures (RDI-PLM/LCD) during communication

Message Explanation

No such interface -- <Interface Name>. Cannot find specified interface.<Interface Name> Interface name

Item Content


336

[Precautions]• Execute a show nif command when displaying only the NIF information of ethernet and

the summary information of Line (see "11. PRU/NIF Management show nif (Ethernet)").

• The value of a statistical information counter is cleared to "0" for the following cases:

• If CP, PRU, or NIF is restarted.CP.

• If a hardware failure occurs in CP, PRU, or NIF.

• If release of closure state of PRU or NIF is directed after its closure was directed (Note 1)

• If configuration definition command Line information is deleted or added.

(Note 1) Any of the following operations falls under this case:

• Direction is given to release the closure state of PRU on a level higher than NIF with free pru command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management close pru".) after its closure was directed with close pru command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management free pru".).

• Direction is given to release the closure state of PRU on a level higher than NIF with a configuration definition command delete disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".) after its closure was directed with another configuration definition command disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".).

• Direction is given to release the closure state of NIF with free nif command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management close nif".) after its closure was directed with close nif command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management free nif".).

• Direction is given to release the closure state of NIF with a configuration definition command "delete disable" (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".) after its closure was directed with another configuration definition command disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)").


Disconnected or no configuration Line <Line No.>. Specified line is undefined or disconnected. <Line No.> Line number

Disconnected interface <Interface Name>. Specified interface is disconnected.<Interface Name> Interface name


Not operational interface <Interface Name>. Specified interface is not operational.<Interface Name> Interface name

No operational NIF. No operational NIF.

No operational Line. No operational Line.

Invalid name <name>. Invalid name specification.


Message Explanation

337

clear counters (ethernet)


[Function]clear counters

Clears the statistics information counter of an ethernet line to "0".

[Input Format]clear counters ethernet <NIF No.>/<Line No.>clear counters nif <NIF No.> line [<Line No.>]clear counters <Line Name>

[Parameters]ethernet

Clears the statistics information counter of the line defined using ethernet to "0".

nif <NIF No.> or <NIF No.>


line [<Line No.>] or <Line No.>

Specifies Line number. For the range of Line numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]". All lines under the control of specified NIF are treated for specification when Line number is omitted.

<Line Name>

Specifies Line name.


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 21-7: clear counters (ethernet) Command Response Messages

Message Explanation

No such interface -- <Interface Name>. Cannot find specified interface. <Interface Name> Interface name

Can't execute this command in standby BCU. The command cannot be executed on the standby BCU.

Disconnected or no configuration Line <Line No.>. Specified line is undefined or disconnected. <Line No.>line number

Disconnected interface <Interface Name>. Specified interface is disconnected. <Interface Name> Interface name


Not operational interface <Interface Name>. Specified interface is not operational. <Interface Name> Interface name

338



statistics information counter is cleared to "0".

• The value of a statistical information counter is cleared to "0" for the following cases:

• If CP, PRU, or NIF is restarted.

• If a hardware failure occurs in CP, PRU, or NIF.

• If release of closure state of PRU or NIF is directed after its closure was directed (Note 1)

• If configuration definition command Line information is deleted or added.

(Note 1) Any of the following operations falls under this case:

• Direction is given to release the closure state of PRU on a level higher than NIF with free pru command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management close pru".) after its closure was directed with close pru command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management free pru".).

• Direction is given to release the closure state of PRU on a level higher than NIF with a configuration definition command delete disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".) after its closure was directed with another configuration definition command disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".).

• Direction is given to release the closure state of NIF with free nif command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management close nif".) after its closure was directed with "close nif" command (see "11. PRU/NIF Management free nif".).

• Direction is given to release the closure state of NIF with a configuration definition command delete disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".) after its closure was directed with another configuration definition command disable (see "Configuration Commands CLI-CLI Type 1 Hierarchical Input Format, Vol. 2, disable (disable information)".).


No operational Line. No operational line.



Message Explanation

339

show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage)


[Function]Displays the NIF information of Tag-VLAN linkage, the Line information, and the summary information of a Tag-VLAN linkage line.

[Input Format]show vlan nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.> vlan [{<VLAN ID>|untagged}]show vlan <VLAN Name>


Specifies NIF number. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]"

line <Line No.>

Specifies Line number. For the range of Line numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

vlan [{<VLAN ID> | untagged}]

Specifies VLAN ID or "untagged". The range of VLAN ID that can be specified is 1 to 4095. When VLAN ID or "untagged" is omitted, displays status of all Tag-VLAN linkage function under control of specified Line.

<VLAN Name>

Specifies a VLAN name associated with the Tag-VLAN linkage function.


[Example]The NIF information, Line information, summary information, and statistics information of a Tag-VLAN linkage line are displayed. The example of result screen is shown in "Figure 21-6: Execution Result Screen of show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage)". The example of result screen on the untagged line is shown in "Figure 21-7: Execution Result Screen of show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage)[Untagged Setting]".

340


Figure 21-6: Execution Result Screen of show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage)

Figure 21-7: Execution Result Screen of show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage)[Untagged Setting]

341


[Display Explanation]The description of Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information display items is given in "Table 21-8: Tag-VLAN Linkage Statistics Information Display".

For NIF information display items, see "show nif (Ethernet)", for summary information display items of Line detail information and Tag-VLAN linkage line, see "show interfaces (Ethernet)".

Table 21-8: Tag-VLAN Linkage Statistics Information Display


[Response Messages]Table 21-9: show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage) Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• To display the NIF information on Ethernet or only the summary Line information, execute

show nif command (see "show nif (Ethernet)".).

• The Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information counter values are cleared to "0", if PRU is restarted, or if direction is given to release the closure state of PRU on a level higher than NIF (with free pru or free nif command) after its closure was directed (with close pru or close nif command).

• The statistics information counter under NIF is cleared to "0" if a H/W problem occurs in PRU.

Item Content


Out packets Number of transmitted packets

In packets Number of received packets

Out discard packets Number of transmitted/discarded packets

In discard packets Number of received/discarded packets

Message Explanation










342

show vlans (Tag-VLAN Linkage)


[Function]Displays the summary information and the statistics information of a Tag-VLAN linkage line.

[Input Format]show vlans

[Parameters]None


[Example]Displays the summary information and the statistics information of the defined Tag-VLAN linkage line. An example of a result screen is shown in "Figure 21-8: show vlans (Tag-VLAN linkage) Result".

Figure 21-8: show vlans (Tag-VLAN linkage) Result

[Display Explanation]The description of Tag-VLAN linkage statistics display items is shown in "Table 21-10: All Tag-VLAN Linkage Statistics Information Display".

The description of summary information display items of Tag-VLAN linkage line is shown in "show interfaces (Ethernet)".

343


Table 21-10: All Tag-VLAN Linkage Statistics Information Display


[Response Messages]Table 21-11: show vlans (Tag-VLAN Linkage) Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• To display the NIF information on Ethernet or only the summary Line information, execute

show nif command (see "show nif (Ethernet)").

• The Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information counter values are cleared to "0", if PRU is restarted, or if direction is given to release the closure state of PRU on a level higher than NIF (with free pru or free nif command) after its closure was directed (with close pru or close nif command).

• The statistics information counter under NIF is cleared to "0" if a H/W problem occurs in PRU.

Item Content


NIF/LINE NIF number/Line number

Out packets Number of transmitted packets

In packets Number of received packets

Out discard packets Number of transmitted/discarded packets

In discard packets Number of received/discarded packets

Message Explanation



344

clear counters(Tag-VLAN Linkage)


[Function]Clears the statistics information counter of Tag-VLAN linkage line to "0".

[Input Format]clear counters nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.> vlan [{<VLAN ID> | untagged}]clear counters <VLAN Name>



line <Line No.>


vlan [{<VLAN ID> | untagged}]

Specifies VLAN ID or "untagged". The range of VLAN ID that can be specified is 1 to 4095. When VLAN ID or "untagged" is omitted, displays status of all Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information under control of specified Line.

<VLAN Name>

Specifies VLAN name.


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 21-12: clear counters (Tag-VLAN Linkage) Command Response Messages

Message Explanation







345


[Precautions]• The value of the line statistics information is not cleared to "0" even if the value of a

Tag-VLAN statistics information counter is cleared to "0".

• If the Line statistics information is cleared to "0" with clear counters command (Ethernet), the Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information under the relevant Line is also cleared to "0".

• The Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information counter values are cleared to "0", if PRU is restarted, or if direction is given to release the closure state of NIF or PRU on a level higher than NIF (with free pru or free nif command) after its closure was directed (with close pru or close nif command).

• The statistics information counter under NIF is cleared to "0" if a H/W problem occurs in PRU or NIF.





Message Explanation

346

clear vlan statistics (Tag-VLAN Linkage)

clear vlan statistics (Tag-VLAN Linkage)

[Function]Clears the statistics information counter of all Tag-VLAN linkage lines to "0".

[Input Format]clear vlan statistics

[Parameters]None


[Example]None


[Response Messages]Table 21-13: clear vlan Statistics (Tag-VLAN linkage) Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• The value of the line statistics information is not cleared to "0" even if the value of a

Tag-VLAN statistics information counter is cleared to "0".

• The Tag-VLAN linkage statistics information counter values are cleared to "0", if PRU is restarted, or if direction is given to release the closure state of NIF or PRU on a level higher than NIF (with free pru or free nif command) after its closure was directed (with close pru or close nif command).

• The statistics information counter under NIF is cleared to "0" if a H/W problem occurs in PRU or NIF.

Message Explanation

Cannot execute this command in standby BCU. This command cannot be executed on the standby BCU.

Cannot execute. Cannot be executed for some cause not defined.

347

close (ethernet)

close (ethernet)

[Function]Sets the Ethernet interface temporarily from the operation state to the blocking state without changing the operational configuration definition information stored in memory.

[Input Format]close nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.>close <Line Name>close interface <Name>


Specifies NIF number to be set to blocking state. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

line <Line No.>

Specifies Line number to be set to blocking state. For the range of Line numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

<Line Name>

Specifies the Line name.

interface <Name>

Specifies the interface name specified using IP configuration definition information.


[Example]Set NIF 0 and Line 0 to the blocking state.close nif 0 line 0


[Response Messages]Table 21-14: close (Ethernet) Command Response Messages


LINE <Line No.> is already closed. Specified Line is closed. <Line No.> line number

LINE <Line No.> is failed. Specified Line is not in the operational state. <Line No.> Line number

LINE <Line No.> is not configured. Specified Line is disconnected or undefined. <Line No.> Line number

LINE <Line No.> is Locked. Specified Line is locked. <Line No.> Line number

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is closed. NIF that controls specified Line is already closed. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is initializing.

NIF that controls specified Line is initializing. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number

348

close (ethernet)

[Precautions]• Using this command causes no change in the current configuration definition information

stored in memory.

• If system is restarted after execution of this command, its closure state is released.

• Use free command (see "free (ethernet)".) to restore the operational state of the Ethernet interface closed with this command.

• This command cannot be executed toward line, NIF on a higher level, or an interface on a lower level while line testing is under way. Execute this command after stopping such test (no test interfaces command (see "no test interfaces (ethernet)".).

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is failed. NIF that controls specified Line is not in the operational state. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is locked. NIF that controls specified Line is locked. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number



Not operational interface <Interface Name>. Specified interface is not in the operational state. <Interface Name> Interface name

Line test executing. Line test is in progress.





Invalid name <name>. Invalid name specification. (Specify the tunnel interface.)

Illegal setting for NIF <NIF No.>. Interface setting of specified NIF is incorrect. Check package type with show version and show nif commands and re-enter command correctly. <NIF No.> NIF number


349

free (ethernet)

free (ethernet)

[Function]Restores the operational state of the Ethernet interface which has been closed temporarily with close command (see "close (ethernet)".).

[Input Format]free nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.>free line <Line Name>free interface <Name>


Specifies NIF number to be returned to operational state. For the range of NIF numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

line <Line No.>

Specifies Line number to be returned to operational state. For the range of Line numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

interface <Name>

Specifies the interface name specified using IP configuration definition information.

<Line Name>

Specifies the Line name.


[Example]Returns NIF 0 line 0 to operational state.free nif 0 line 0


[Response Messages]Table 21-15: free (ethernet) Command Response Messages


LINE <Line No.> is already active. Specified Line is in the operational state. <Line No.> Line number

LINE <Line No.> is not configured. Specified Line is disconnected or undefined. <Line No.> Line number

LINE <Line No.> is already initializing. Specified Line is already initializing. <Line No.> Line number

LINE <Line No.> is failed. Specified Line is not in the operational state. <Line No.> Line number

LINE <Line No.> is locked. Specified Line is locked. <Line No.> Line number

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is closed. NIF that controls specified Line is already closed. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number

350

free (ethernet)

[Precautions]• Using this command causes no change in the current configuration definition information

stored in memory.

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is initializing.

NIF that controls specified Line is initializing. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is failed. NIF that controls specified Line is not in the operational state. <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number

NIF <NIF No.> that controls LINE <Line No.> is locked. NIF that controls specified Line is locked <NIF No.> NIF number, <Line No.> Line number


Illegal setting for NIF <NIF No.>. Interface setting of specified NIF is incorrect. Check package type with show version and show nif commands and re-enter command correctly. <NIF No.> NIF number


Not operational interface <Interface Name>. Specified interface is not in the operational state. <Interface Name> Interface name



Invalid name <name>. Invalid name specification. (Specify the tunnel interface.)



351

test interfaces (ethernet)


[Function]Identifies the section affected if any abnormality occurs in the communication on the Ethernet line, and checks operation (line test) for each frame after a failed part (cable, etc.) is replaced. To conduct the line test, first specify the relevant line.

You can execute the line test regardless of whether the line is in operation or closed. However, you cannot close or start a line while a test is in progress. For detail information regarding a line test, see "Operations - Device Management Overview, 8.7 Line test".

[Input Format]test interfaces nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.> {internal | connector | network-line} [auto_negotiation {10base-t | 100base-tx | 1000base-t}] [interval <Interval Time>] [pattern <Test Pattern No.>] [length <Data Length>]



line <Line No.>


internal

Specifies the module internal loop-back test.

See [Precautions] (3) described later.

connector

Specifies the loop connector loop-back test.

A loop connector must be connected when executing the loop-back test of the loop connector. To conduct the loop connector loop-back test, conduct the network-line loop-back test on the other side of connection if the connection of loop connector or the other side of connection is 10GBASE-W.

network-line

Specifies the network line loop-back test.

Test result is not displayed because it only specifies turn of received data. The line test starts if the loop connector loop-back test is conducted on the other side of connection.

auto_negotiation {10base-t | 100base-tx | 1000base-t}

Specifies automatic recognition of the type parameter to the Line information, which is configuration definition information, and specifies a segment standard used for line testing. By default, 100base-tx is selected. This parameter cannot be specified if something other than the automatic recognition of the type parameter has been specified. It can be specified only if the Line type is 10BASE-T/10BASE-TX/1000BASE-T.

Types of lines tested 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T

1000BASE-X 10GBASE-R 10GBASE-W

Module internal loop Y Y Y Y

352

Y: Can be conducted, N: Cannot be conducted

The auto_negotiation parameter-specified value that can be specified for each NIF type is shown in the table below.

Table 21-16: auto_negotiation Parameter-Specified Value that Can Be Specified for Each NIF Type

interval <Interval Time>

Leaves the send interval empty for the specified number of seconds. The specified value range is 1 - 30 in decimal. When omitted, the send interval is 1 second.

pattern <Test Pattern No.>

Specifies the test pattern number. When omitted, the test pattern used is number 3. The specified value range is 0 - 4.

0: Test patterns 1-4 are repeated in order.

1: all 0xff f

2: all 0x00

3:

"** THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG.0123456789 **" Repeating pattern

4: Illegal NIF data detection pattern

length <Data Length>

Specifies the length (not including the MAC header, LLC header, and FCS) in bytes of the frame to be used in the test. The specified value range is shown in the table below.

Loop connector loop Y Y Y Y

Network line loop N N N Y

No NIF Type auto_negotiation parameter value

10base-t 100base-tx 1000base-t

1 NE100-48T Y Y -

2 NE1000-12T Y Y Y

3 NE1G-12S - - -

4 NE1G-6G - - -

5 NE1GSHP-4S - - -

6 NE10G-1LR - - -

7 NE10G-1ER - - -

8 NE10G-1LR - - -

9 NE10G-1EW - - -

Types of lines tested 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T

1000BASE-X 10GBASE-R 10GBASE-W

353

Table 21-17: Specified Value Range by Test Type


[Example]The start screen of a line test using an Ethernet board is shown in "Figure 21-9: Line Test Starting Screen". The module-internal loop-back test begins by sending 100-byte frames with an all-0xff test pattern in NIF 1, Line 2 at 5-second intervals.

Figure 21-9: Line Test Starting Screen> test interfaces nif 1 line 2 internal interval 5 pattern 1 length 100


[Response Messages]Response messages of test interfaces command are shown in "Table 21-18: test interfaces Command Response Messages".

Table 21-18: test interfaces Command Response Messages

No Test Type Data Length (Octet) When Omitted (Octet)

1 Module internal loop-back test 43 - 1497 500

2 Loop connector loop-back test 43 - 9575 500




Illegal Line -- <Line No.>. Line number is out of range. <Line No.> Line number

No support test type -- <Test type>. Specified test type is not supported by the specified NIF. <Test type> Test type name

Not auto negotiation Line <Line No.>. Specified Line is not auto-negotiation line. <Line No.> Line number

No support auto negotiation parameter. Auto-negotiation parameter is not supported by the specified NIF.

No support auto negotiation type -- <autonegotype> The specified auto negotiation type is not supported by the specified NIF. <autonegotype> auto negotiation type

Test already executing. Line test is in progress.

Not start condition. Test not in start-enable status.

Not operational NIF <NIF No.>. Specified NIF is not in the operational state. <NIF No.> NIF number



Disconnected or no configuration Line <Line No.>. Specified Line is disconnected or undefined. <Line No.> Line number

354

[Precautions]1. If the relevant line is in operation when the test starts, operation of that line temporarily

stops so the test can be carried out. After the line test, operation automatically resumes. That is, the relevant line cannot be operational during line testing. Take care regarding this point..

2. After the line test starts, it is repeatedly carried out until a line test stop occurs.

3. To conduct the loop connector loop-back testing with 1000base-t specified to the auto_negotiation parameter, an 8-conductor 4-pair loop connector of category 5 or higher is required..

4. Execution of loop connector loopback test by 1000BASE-LH, 10GBASE-ER or 10GBASE-EW requires optical attenuator. For the optical attenuation, see "Table 21-19: Optical Attenuation".

Table 21-19: Optical Attenuation

5. For SFP (NE1GSHP-4S) with a shaper, a line test is executed in 2032 bytes even if the data length is specified to be more than 2033 bytes.

6. For 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, an auto_negotiation parameter cannot be specified to 1000base-t.

Not operational Line <Line No.>. Specified Line is not in the operational state. <Line No.> Line number



No NIF Type Attenuation Value (db)

1 GBIC-LH of 1000BASE-X 5 - 20

2 10GBASE-ER 5 - 11

3 10GBASE-EW


355

no test interfaces (ethernet)


[Function]Stops the line test of an ethernet line and displays the test result.

For the details of the line test, see "Operations - Device Management Overview, 8.7 Line test".

[Input Format]no test interfaces nif <NIF No.> line <Line No.>



line <Line No.>



Line test with 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T

[Example]The module-internal loop-back test begins by sending 100-octet all-0xff frames at 5-second intervals in NIF 1, line 2. The line test execution results on an Ethernet board (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T) are shown in "Figure 21-10: Line Test Execution Results (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T)".

Figure 21-10: Line Test Execution Results (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T)

>test interfaces nif 1 line 2 internal interval 5 pattern 1 length 100>no test interfaces nif 1 line 22003/02/23 12:32:00Interface type :100BASE-TXTest count :0Send-OK :0 Send-NG :0Receive-OK :0 Receive-NG :0Data compare error :0 Out underrun :0Out buffer hunt error :0 Out line error :0In CRC error :0 In frame alignment :0In overrun :0 In monitor time out :0In line error :0 H/W error :none>

[Display Explanation]"Table 21-20: Contents of Line Test Execution Results (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T)" shows the contents of the line test execution results on 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T.

356


Table 21-20: Contents of Line Test Execution Results (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T)

(*1)

Number of frames that did not match in the comparison check with transmitting data when the data was received.

Line test with 1000BASE-X

Item Meaning Possible Cause Action

Interface type Interface type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)

- -

Test count Number of tests - -

Send-OK Number of tests sent successfully.

- -

Send-NG Number of tests sent unsuccessfully.

Summation of frame discard frequency due to line damage, underrun frequency

If underrun frequencies are not calculated during loop connector test, check whether loop-back connector is securely connected to the interface.

Receive-OK Number of tests received successfully.

- -

Receive-NG Number of tests received unsuccessfully.

Summation of data-compare error and receive monitor timer timeout

See each item.

Data compare error Data compare error (*1) NIF failure Replace NIF.

Out underrun Excessive underrun frequency NIF failure Replace NIF.

Out buffer hunt error Send buffer acquisition failure. Congestion occurred in another line in same PRU

Execute again after canceling congestion in other line in the same PRU.

Out line error Excessive send-line-error frequency

NIF failure Replace NIF.

In CRC error Excessive CRC-error frequency


In overrun Excessive overrun frequency NIF failure Replace NIF.

In frame alignment Alignment Error (Frame bit length is not in octet boundary.)


In monitor time out Receive-monitor timer timeout Line failure With loop-connector test, check whether loop-back connector is securely connected to the interface.

In line error Excessive receive-line-error frequency

Line failure With loop-connector test, check whether loop-back connector is securely connected to the interface.

H/W error Failure of H/WNone: Nooccurred: Yes


357


[Example]The module-internal loop-back test begins by sending 100-octet frames with an all-oxff test pattern in NIF 1, Line 2 at 5-second intervals. The line test results screen on an Ethernet board (1000BASE-X) is shown in "Figure 21-11: Line Test Results Screen (1000BASE-X)".

Figure 21-11: Line Test Results Screen (1000BASE-X)>test interfaces nif 1 line 2 internal interval 5 pattern 1 length 100>no test interfaces nif 1 line 22003/02/23 12:32:00Interface type :1000BASE-SXTest count :0Send-OK :0 Send-NG :0Receive-OK :0 Receive-NG :0Data compare error :0 Out underrun :0Out buffer hunt error :0 Out line error :0In CRC error :0 In frame alignment :0In overrun :0 In monitor time out :0In line error :0 H/W error :none>

[Display Explanation]"Table 21-21: Line Test Results Display (1000BASE-X)" shows the description of the line test results display (1000BASE-X).

Table 21-21: Line Test Results Display (1000BASE-X)


Interface type Interface type (1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LH/----(*1))

- -



- -


Summation of frame discard frequency due to line damage, underrun frequency



- -

Receive-NG Number of tests received unsuccessfully.


See each item.

Data compare error Data check error (*2) NIF failure Replace NIF.

Out underrun Excessive underrun frequency NIF failure Replace NIF.

Out buffer hunt error Send buffer acquisition failure Congestion occurred in another line in same PRU.




In CRC error Excessive CRC-error frequency NIF failure Replace NIF.

358


(*1)

Displays in the following conditions:

• The test type is internal.

• The test type is connector, but the interface type is unknown.

(*2)

Number of frames that did not match in the comparison check with transmitting data when the data was received.

Line test with 10GBASE-R and 10GBASE-W

[Example]The module-internal loop-back test begins by sending 100-octet frames with an all-oxff test pattern in NIF 1, Line 2 at 5-second intervals. The line test results screen on an Ethernet board (10GBASE-R) is shown in "Figure 21-12: Line Test Results Screen (10GBASE-R)".

Figure 21-12: Line Test Results Screen (10GBASE-R)>test interfaces nif 1 line 2 internal interval 5 pattern 1 length 100>no test interfaces nif 1 line 22003/02/23 12:32:00Interface type :10GBASE-LRTest count :0Send-OK :0 Send-NG :0Receive-OK :0 Receive-NG :0Data compare error :0 Out underrun :0Out buffer hunt error :0 Out line error :0In CRC error :0 In frame alignment :0In overrun :0 In monitor time out :0In line error :0 H/W error :none>

[Display Explanation]"Table 21-22: Line Test Result Display (10GBASE-R and 10GBASE-W)" shows the description of the line test result display (10GBASE-R and 10GBASE-W).




In monitor time out Alignment Error (Frame bit length is not in octet boundary.)




H/W error Failure of H/WNone: Nooccurred: Yes



359


Table 21-22: Line Test Result Display (10GBASE-R and 10GBASE-W)

(*1)

Number of frames that did not match in the comparison check with transmitting data when


Interface type Interface type (10GBASE-LR/10GBASE-ER/10GBASE-LW/10GBASE-EW)

- -



- -


Summation of frame discard frequency due to underrun frequency or line damage.



- -

Receive-NG Number of test received unsuccessfully.


See each item.

Data compare error Data compare error (*1) NIF failure Replace NIF.

Out underrun Excessive underrun frequency


Out buffer hunt error Send buffer acquisition failure

Congestion occurred in another line in same PRU.




In CRC error Excessive CRC-error frequency





In monitor time out Receive-monitor timer timeout




H/W error Failure of H/W None: Nooccurred: Yes


360

the data was received.


[Response Messages]Response messages using no test interfaces command are shown in "Table 21-23: no test interface Command Response Messages".

Table 21-23: no test interface Command Response Messages

[Precautions]1. If the relevant line is in operation when the test starts, operation of that line temporarily

stops so the test can be carried out. After the line test, operation automatically resumes. That is, the relevant line cannot be operational during the line testing. Take care.

2. Occasionally, the line test result may show the number of Send-OKs to be one less than the total of Receive-OKs and Receive-NGs. This is because the test was interrupted by a time-out while waiting to receive a test frame.



Illegal Line -- <Line No.>. Line number is out of range. <Line No.> Line number

Test not executing. Line test is not in progress.

Not operational NIF <NIF No.>. Specified NIF is not in the operational state. <NIF No.> NIF number



Disconnected or no configuration Line <Line No.>. Specified Line is disconnected or undefined. <Line No.> Line number

Not operational Line <Line No.>. Specified Line is not in the operational state. <Line No.> Line number



361

Chapter

22. Link Aggregation Information

show link-aggregationshow link-aggregation statisticsclear link-aggregation statistics lacprestart link-aggregationdump protocols link-aggregation

363

show link-aggregation


[Function]Displays the link aggregation information.

[Input Format]show link-aggregation [{[<LA ID list>] [detail] | [summary]}]

[Parameters]Omitted

Displays all the link aggregation information.

<LA ID list>

Displays the statistics information of the link aggregations with a link aggregation group ID specified (in the list format). When this parameter is not specified, all the link aggregation statistics information is displayed. For the range of port numbers that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".

summary

Displays the summary information of the link aggregation.

detail

Displays the detail information of the link aggregation.


[Example]The result screen of the link aggregation information display is shown below.

Figure 22-1: Link Aggregation Information Display>show link-aggregationDate 2003/01/15 14:15:00link-aggregation Counts:4LA ID:1 Mode:LACP LA Status :Up Elapsed Time:10:10:39 Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 Description : 6 ports are aggregated. MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:01 Router Interface:Switch1 IP Address:172.16.1.249/24 LACP Activity:Active Periodic Timer:Short Actor information: System Priority:1 MAC: 00:00:87:12:ff:02 Key:101 Partner information: System Priority:10000 MAC: 00:40:67:f0:69:be Key:100 Port(6) :0/1-3,10,12-13 Up Port(2) :0/1-2 Down Port(4) :0/3,10,12-13LA ID:11 Mode:LACP LA Status :Down Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:02 LACP Activity:Passive Periodic Timer:Long Actor information: System Priority:1 MAC: 00:00:87:12:ff:03 Key:111

364


Partner information: System Priority:10000 MAC: 00:40:67:f0:69:bd Key:200 Port(3) :2/1-3 Up Port(0) : Down Port(3) :2/1-3LA ID:101 Mode:Static LA Status :Disabled Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:04 Port(2) :3/1-2 Up Port(0) : Down Port(2) :3/1-2LA ID:111 Mode:Static LA Status :Up Elapsed Time:160.11:45:10 Max Active Port:2 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:05 Port(3) :4/1 5/1-2 Up Port(2) :4/1,5/1 Down Port(1) :5/2 Standby Port(1):5/2>

Shown below is an example of the display of link aggregation information when a link aggregation group ID was specified:

Figure 22-2: Link Aggregation Information Display of Specified Link Aggregation Group

>show link-aggregation 101-120Date 2003/01/15 14:16:00link-aggregation Counts:2LA ID:101 Mode:Static LA Status :Disabled Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:04 Port(2) :3/1-2 Up Port(0) : Down Port(2) :3/1-2LA ID:111 Mode:Static LA Status :Up Elapsed Time:160.11:45:10 Max Active Port:2 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:05 Port(3) :4/1 5/1-2 Up Port(2) :4/1,5/1 Down Port(1) :5/2 Standby Port(1):5/2>

[Display Explanation]The description of the link aggregation information display item is shown below.

Table 22-1: Link Aggregation Information Display Item (1/2)


Date Command received time yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss year/month/date hour:minute:second

link-aggregation Counts

Number of link aggregations to be displayed.

Number of link aggregations

LA ID Link aggregation group ID 1 - 128

365


Mode Link aggregation mode LACP: LACP link aggregation mode

Static: Link aggregation mode

LA Status Link aggregation status Up: State where a data packet can be sent and received

Down: State where data packet cannot be sent or received

Disabled: State where link aggregation is disabled

Elapsed Time Elapsed time of link aggregation in Up state:

hh:mm:ss (In case of within 24 hours)ddd.hh:mm:ss (In case of exceeding 24 hours)Over 1000 days (A case of more than 1000 days having elapsed)"-" is shown if a link aggregation group is in a state other than "Up"

Max Active Port Maximum number of ports used for the link aggregation

1 - 16 (16 is displayed as default)

Max Detach Port Limited number of ports detached 0 or 15 (15 is displayed as default)

Description Link aggregation group complementary description

Not displayed if no complementary description has been set in the configuration definition.

MAC Address Link aggregation group MAC address

MAC address of groupSelected from the MAC addresses of the ports belonging to the group

Router Interface Router interface name Not displayed if a router interface name has not been defined in the configuration definition.

IP Address IP address Not displayed if a router interface name has not been defined in the configuration definition."-" is shown if no IP address has been defined in the configuration definition.

LACP Activity Method for starting LACP Only LACP mode is displayed.

Active: Send LACPDUs always.

Passive: Send a LACPDU after receiving a LACPDU.

Periodic Time Interval of sending LACPDUs Only LACP mode is displayed.

Short: Interval is 1 second.

Long: Interval is 30 seconds.

Actor information Local system information System ID and Key of local systemOnly LACP mode is displayed.

System Priority Priority of systems 1 - 65535; "1" has the highest priority.

MAC MAC address MAC address of system ID

Key Key of group 1 - 65535

Partner information Information of the system the router is connected to

System ID and Key of the system the router is connected to.Only LACP mode is displayed. "-" is shown if no system connected to has not been decided yet by LACP.

System Priority Priority of systems 0 - 65535; "0" has the highest priority.



366


[Example]Example of a link aggregation summary information display is shown in the figure below.

Figure 22-3: Link Aggregation Summary Information Display>show link-aggregation summaryDate 2003/01/15 14:15:00LA Status :LA IDUp(2) :1,111Down(1) :11Disabled(1) :101>

[Display Explanation]The description of link aggregation summary information display item is shown in the table below.

Table 22-2: Link Aggregation Summary Information Display

[Example]Example of a link aggregation detail information display is shown in the figure below.

Figure 22-4: Link Aggregation Detail Information Display


Port(n) Port information of link aggregation group

n: Number of ports in the relevant link aggregation groupPort No. of the link aggregation group (NIF number/Line number)

Up Port(n) Information on the ports that can send and receive data packets in a link aggregation group

n: Number of ports that can send and receive data packets in the relevant link aggregation groupPort Nos. of the ports which can send and receive data packets in a link aggregation group (NIF number/Line number)

Down Port(n) Information of the ports that cannot send or receive data packets in a link aggregation group

n: Number of ports that cannot send or receive data packets in the relevant link aggregation groupPort Nos. of the ports that cannot send or receive data packets in the link aggregation group (NIF number/Line number)

Standby Port(n) Information on the standby ports in a link aggregation group

n: Number of the standby ports in the relevant link aggregation groupPort Nos. of the standby ports in the link aggregation group (NIF number/Line number)



Up(n) Information of link aggregations in the Up state n: Number of the relevant link aggregationsIDs of link aggregations in the Up state

Down(n) Information on link aggregations in the Down state

n: Number of relevant link aggregations IDs of link aggregations in the Down state

Disabled(n) Information on link aggregations in the Disabled state

n: Number of relevant link aggregations IDs of link aggregations in the Disabled state


367


>show link-aggregation detailDate 2003/01/15 14:17:00link-aggregation Counts:4LA ID:1 Mode:LACP LA Status :Up Elapsed Time:10:10:39 Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 Description : All 100M Full-Duplex MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:01 Router Interface:Switch1 IP Address:172.16.1.249/24 LACP Activity:Active Periodic Timer:Short Actor information: System Priority:1 MAC: 00:00:87:12:ff:02 Key:101 Partner information: System Priority:10000 MAC: 00:40:67:f0:69:be Key:100 Port Counts:6 Up Port Counts:2 Port:0/1 Status:Up Reason:- Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:0/2 Status:Up Reason:- Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:0/3 Status:Down Reason: LACPDU Expired Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:0/10 Status:Down Reason:Duplex Half Speed: 100M Duplex:Half Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:0/12 Status:Down Reason:Partner Aggregation Individual Speed: 100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:0/13 Status:Down Reason:Synchronization OUT_OF_SYNC Speed: 100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:10LA ID:11 Mode:LACP LA Status :Down Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:02 LACP Activity:Passive Periodic Timer:Long Actor information: System Priority:1 MAC: 00:00:87:12:ff:03 Key:111 Partner information: System Priority:10000 MAC: 00:40:67:f0:69:bd Key:200 Port Counts:3 Up Port Counts:0 Port:2/1 Status:Down Reason:Port Down Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:2/2 Status:Down Reason:Partner Key Unmatch Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Unmatched Partner Key:201 Port:2/3 Status:Down Reason:Partner System ID Unmatch Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:1 Unmatched System ID: Priority:5000MAC:00:40:67:F0:69:BALA ID:101 Mode:Static LA Status :Disabled Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:04 Port Counts:2 Up Port counts:0

368


Port:3/1 Status:Down Reason:LA Disabled Speed :100M Duplex:Full Port:3/2 Status:Down Reason:LA Disabled Speed :100M Duplex:FullLA ID:111 Mode:Static LA Status :Up Elapsed Time:160.11:45:10 Max Active Port:2 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:05 Port Counts:3 Up Port counts:2 Port:4/1 Status:Up Reason:- Speed :100M Duplex:Full Priority:0 Port:5/1 Status:Up Reason:- Speed :100M Duplex:Full Priority:0 Port:5/2 Status:Down Reason:Standby Speed :100M Duplex:Full Priority:0>

Display example of link aggregation detail information display of specified link aggregation group is shown in the figure below.

Figure 22-5: Link Aggregation of Specified Link Aggregation Group>show link-aggregation 10-110 detailDate 2003/01/15 14:18:00link-aggregation Counts:2LA ID:11 Mode:LACP LA Status :Down Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:02 LACP Activity:Passive Periodic Timer:Long Actor information: System Priority:1 MAC: 00:00:87:12:ff:03 Key:111 Partner information: System Priority:10000 MAC: 00:40:67:f0:69:bd Key:200 Port Counts:3 Up Port Counts:0 Port:2/1 Status:Down Reason:Port Down Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Port:2/2 Status:Down Reason:Partner Key Unmatch Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:100 Unmatched Partner Key:201 Port:2/3 Status:Down Reason:Partner System ID Unmatch Speed :100M Duplex:Full Actor Priority:128 Partner Priority:1 Unmatched System ID: Priority:5000MAC:00:40:67:F0:69:BALA ID:101 Mode:Static LA Status :Disabled Elapsed Time:- Max Active Port:16 Max Detach Port:15 MAC address: 00:00:87:ac:83:04 Port Counts:2 Up Port counts:0 Port:3/1 Status:Down Reason:LA Disabled Speed :100M Duplex:Full Port:3/2 Status:Down Reason:LA Disabled Speed :100M Duplex:Full>

[Display Explanation]The description of link aggregation detail information display item is shown in the table below.

369


Table 22-3: Link Aggregation Detail Information Display Items



link-aggregation counts

Number of link aggregations to be displayed



Mode Link aggregation mode LACP: LACP link aggregation mode

Static: Static link aggregation mode

LA Status Link aggregation status Up: State where data packets can be sent and received


Disabled: State where link aggregation is disabled

Elapsed Time Elapsed time of link aggregation in Up state:

hh:mm:ss (In case of within 24 hours)ddd.hh:mm:ss (In case of exceeding 24 hours)Over 1000 days (Case of more than 1000 days having elapsed.)"-" is shown if a link aggregation group is in a state other than "Up"

Max Active Port Maximum number of ports used for the link aggregation

1 - 16 (16 is displayed as default.)

Max Detach Port Limited number of ports detached 0 or 15 (15 is displayed as default.)

Description Link aggregation group complementary description

Not displayed if no complementary description has been set in the configuration definition.

MAC Address Link aggregation group MAC address MAC address of groupSelected from the MAC addresses of the ports belonging to the group

Router interface Router interface name Not displayed if a router interface name has not been defined in the configuration definition.

IP address IP address Not displayed if a router interface name has not been defined in the configuration definition."-" is shown if no IP address has been defined in the configuration definition.

LACP activity Method for starting LACP Only LACP mode is displayed.

Active: Send LACPDUs always.

Passive: Send a LACPDU after receiving a LACPDU.

Periodic time Interval of sending LACPDUs Only LACP mode is displayed.

Short: Interval is 1 second.

Long: Interval is 30 seconds.

Actor information

Local system information System ID and Key of local systemOnly LACP mode is displayed.

System Priority

Priority of systems 1 - 65535; "1" has the highest priority.


370



Partner information

Information of the system the router is connected to

System ID and Key of the system the router is connected to.Only LACP mode is displayed. "-" is shown if no system connected to has not been decided yet by LACP.

System Priority

Priority of systems 0 - 65535; "0" has the highest priority.



Port count Number of ports defined Number of ports set using configuration definition

Up port count Number of ports that can send and receive data packets

Number of the ports that can send and receive data

Port Port information (NIF number/Line number)

Port number

Status Aggregation state of ports Up: State where data packets can be sent and received


Reason Failure factors -: "Up" status

Standby: Ports in the own-link aggregation group are in the standby state.

LA Disabled: Own link aggregation group is in the Disabled state.

Port Down: A port in the own-link aggregation group is in the Down state.

Port Speed Unmatch: Line speed is unmatched with that of another port in the own-link aggregation group.

Duplex Half: Duplex mode of a port in the own-link aggregation group is "Half".

Port Selecting: Now checking the conditions of port aggregation into the own-link aggregation group.

Waiting for Partner Synchronization: Checking of the conditions of port aggregation into the own-link aggregation group has been completed. Now waiting for synchronization of the port connected to.

LACPDU Expired: Timeout for LACPDU sent from a port it is connected to.

Partner System ID Unmatch: Partner System ID received from a port connected to does not match that held within the group.Unmatched Partner System is displayed.

Partner Key Unmatch: Partner Key received from a port connected to does not match with that held within the group.Unmatched Partner Key is displayed.

Partner Aggregation Individual: "No link aggregation possible" was received from a port connected to.


371



[Response Messages]Response messages displayed by show link-aggregation are shown in the table below.

Table 22-4: show link aggregation Command Response Messages

Partner Synchronization OUT_OF_SYNC: "No synchronization possible" was received from a port connected to.

Port Moved: A port was moved within a link aggregation group.

Actor key Unspecified: Key has not been specified yet.

Operation of Detach Port Limit: Number of detached ports is limited.

Speed Line speed 10M: 10Mbit/s

100M: 100Mbit/s

1G: 1Gbit/s

10G: 10Gbit/s

Duplex Duplex mode Full: Full-duplex

Half: Half-duplex

Actor Priority Priority of the ports of own system 0 - 65535; "0" has the highest priority.Only LACP mode is displayed.

Partner Priority Priority of the ports of the system the router is connected to

0 - 65535; "0" has the highest priority.Only LACP mode is displayed.

Priority Priority of the ports of own system 0 - 65535; "0" has the highest priority.Displayed only if the standby link function (Max Active Ports) has been set to the Static mode.

Unmatched partner key

Unmatched key of the system the router is connected to

0 - 65535Displayed only if "Reason: Unmatched Partner Key" in the Down state.

Unmatched partner system ID

Unmatched System ID of the system the router is connected to

Displayed only if "Reason: Unmatched Partner System ID" in the Down state.

Priority Priority of systems 0 - 65535; "0" has the highest priority.

MAC Address

MAC address MAC address of system ID

Message Meaning


No operational Link Aggregation Group. There is no link aggregation group for which the command can be executed.

Specified link aggregation is not configured. The link aggregation is not defined. Check the configuration definition information.


372


[Precautions]None

Connection failed to link aggregation. Communication with the Link Aggregation program failed. Input the command again. If failure occurs often, restart the Link Aggregation program using the "restart link-aggregation" command.

Connection failed to L2 manager. Communication with the L2 Manager program failed. Input the command again. If the failure occurs often, restart the L2 Manager program using the "restart vlan" command.


Message Meaning

373

show link-aggregation statistics


[Function]Displays link aggregation statistics information.

[Input Format]show link-aggregation statistics [ lacp ] [<LA ID list>]

[Parameters]Default

Displays the statistics information of data packets sent and received through all the link aggregations for each port.

lacp

Displays the statistics information of LACPDUs sent and received through a link aggregation for each port, except in the Static Link Aggregation mode.

<LA ID list>

Displays the statistics information of the link aggregations with a link aggregation group ID specified (in the list format). When this parameter is not specified, all the link aggregation statistics information is displayed. For the range of link aggregation group ID value that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Shown below is an example of a display of statistics information of data packets sent and received (for each port) through the link aggregation specified.

Figure 22-6: Statistics Information of Data Packets Sent And Received Through the Link Aggregation; Displayed for Each Port

>show link-aggregation statisticsDate 2003/01/15 14:18:00link-aggregation Counts:4LA ID:1(Up) Total: Octets Tx: 12760301 Rx: 9046110 Frames Tx: 71483 Rx: 64377 Discards Tx: 96 Rx: 9 Port:0/1 Octets Tx: 12745991 Rx: 9033008 Frames Tx: 71432 Rx: 64332 Discards Tx: 95 Rx: 5 Port:0/2 Octets Tx: 14310 Rx: 13102 Frames Tx: 51 Rx: 45 Discards Tx: 1 Rx: 4 Port:0/3 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:0/10 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:0/12 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:0/13 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0

374


Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0LA ID:11(Up) Total: Octets Tx: 2031141 Rx: 1643359 Frames Tx: 3344 Rx: 2353 Discards Tx: 14 Rx: 25 Port:2/1 Octets Tx: 2008831 Rx: 1623147 Frames Tx: 3312 Rx: 2332 Discards Tx: 10 Rx: 22 Port:2/2 Octets Tx: 22310 Rx: 20212 Frames Tx: 32 Rx: 21 Discards Tx: 4 Rx: 3 Port:2/3 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0LA ID:101(Up) Total: Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:3/1 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:3/2 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0LA ID:111(Down) Total: Octets Tx: 5971370 Rx: 5205702 Frames Tx: 11133 Rx: 10286 Discards Tx: 12 Rx: 32 Port:4/1 Octets Tx: 4023121 Rx: 3403392 Frames Tx: 7211 Rx: 6884 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:5/1 Octets Tx: 1948249 Rx: 1802310 Frames Tx: 3922 Rx: 3402 Discards Tx: 12 Rx: 32 Port:5/2 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0>

Shown below is a display sample of the statistics information of data packets sent and received (for each port) through the link aggregation specified.

Figure 22-7: Statistics Information of Data Packets Sent And Received Through the Link Aggregation Specified; Displayed for Each Port

>show link-aggregation statistics 110-120Date 2003/01/15 14:18:00link-aggregation Counts:1LA ID:111(Down) Total: Octets Tx: 5971370 Rx: 5205702 Frames Tx: 11133 Rx: 10286 Discards Tx: 12 Rx: 32 Port:4/1 Octets Tx: 4023121 Rx: 3403392 Frames Tx: 7211 Rx: 6884 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Port:5/1 Octets Tx: 1948249 Rx: 1802310 Frames Tx: 3922 Rx: 3402 Discards Tx: 12 Rx: 32 Port:5/2 Octets Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Frames Tx: 0 Rx: 0 Discards Tx: 0 Rx: 0>

375


[Display Explanation]Shown below is an explanation of the display items for the statistics information of data packets sent and received through a link aggregation.

Table 22-5: Display Items of Statistics Information of Data Packets Sent and Received Through a Link Aggregation

[Example]Shown below is a screen showing the results of the command executed to show the statistics information of LACPDUs sent and received through a link aggregation:

Figure 22-8: Link Aggregation LACPDU Sent/Received Statistics Information Display>show link-aggregation statistics lacpDate 2003/01/15 14:18:00link-aggregation Counts:2LA ID:1 Port Counts:6 Port:1/1 TxLACPDUs : 50454011 RxLACPDUs : 16507650 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:1/2 TxLACPDUs : 50454011 RxLACPDUs : 16507650 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:1/3 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:1/10 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8



link-aggregation counts

Number of link aggregations to be displayeds


LA ID Link aggregation group ID. Shown in parentheses ( ) is the status of link aggregation group.

1 - 128Up: State where data packets can be sent and receivedDown: State where data packet cannot be sent or receivedDisabled: State where link aggregation is disabled

Total Total of statistics information Display of the statistics information for each link aggregation group

Port Port number (NIF number/Line number)

Display of the statistics information for each port

Octets Size of sent/received data Tx: Total number of bytes sent Rx. Total number of bytes received MAC header - payload (except FCS)

Frames Number of frames of sent/received data

Tx: Total number of frames of data sentRx. Total number of frames of data received

Discards Number of discarded frames of sent/received data

Tx: Total number of discarded frames of data sentRx: Total number of discarded frames of data received

376


Port:1/12 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:1/13 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8LA ID:11 Port counts:3 Port:2/1 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:2/2 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:2/3 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8>

Shown below is a screen of the results of the command executed to show the statistics information for the LACPDUs sent and received through a link aggregation group with an ID specified:

Figure 22-9: Specified Link Aggregation LACPDU Sent/Received Statistics Information Display

>show link-aggregation statistics lacp 10-20Date 2003/01/15 14:18:00link-aggregation Counts:1LA ID:11 Port Counts:3 Port:2/1 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:2/2 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8 Port:2/3 TxLACPDUs : 100 RxLACPDUs : 100 TxMarkerResponsePDUs: 10 RxMarkerPDUs: 10 RxDiscards : 8>

[Display Explanation]Shown below is explanation of the display items for the statistics information of data packets sent and received through a link aggregation.

Table 22-6: Display Items for Statistics Information of Data Packets Sent And Received Through a Link Aggregation



link-aggregation counts Number of link aggregations to be displayed.


377



[Response Messages]Response messages displayed using show link-aggregation statistics command are shown in the table below.

Table 22-7: show link-aggregation statistics command Response Message

[Precautions]• The statistics information is cleared when the system is started or when any of the

following commands is input:

Statistics information of data packets sent and received: clear counters (Ethernet)

Information of data sending/receiving with LACP: clear link-aggregation statistics lacp

• The statistics information for data packets sent and received shown by this command consists of the sum total of the statistics figures of the link aggregation groups on an Ethernet line. To clear such information, use the command to "clear" the Ethernet line. The related commands are shown below:

Related commands: show interfaces (Ethernet)

clear counters (Ethernet)


Port Counts Number of ports to be displayed Number of ports

Port Port number (NIF number/Line number)

-

TxLACPDUs Number of sent LACPDU -

RxLACPDUs Number of received LACPDU -

Tx marker response PDUs Number of marker response PDUs sent -

Rx marker PDUs Number of marker PDUs received -

Rx Discards Number of PDUs received and discarded Number of LACPDUs discarded due to a wrong parameter

Message Meaning






378

clear link-aggregation statistics lacp


[Function]Clears LACPDU statistics information of link aggregation.

[Input Format]clear link-aggregation statistics lacp [<LA ID list>]

[Parameters]Default

Clears LACPDU sent/received statistics information of all link aggregation.

<LA ID list>

Clears the statistics information for LACPDUs sent/received through the link aggregation group with an ID specified (in the list format). When this parameter is not specified, the LACPDU statistics information of all link aggregation groups is displayed. For the range of the link aggregation group ID value that can be specified, see "1.3 About the Description of This Manual (3) [Parameters]".


[Example]Result screen of LACPDU sent/received statistics information clear of link aggregation.

Figure 22-10: Link Aggregation LACPDU Sent/Received Statistics Information Clear>clear link-aggregation statistics lacp>

Shown below is a screen of the results for the command executed to clear the statistics information of LACPDUs sent/received through a link aggregation group ID specified:

Figure 22-11: LACPDU Sent/Received Statistics Information Clear of Link Aggregation Group ID Specified

>clear link-aggregation statistics lacp 101>


[Response Messages]Response messages displayed using clear link-aggregation statistics lacp command is shown in the table below.

Table 22-8: clear link-aggregation statistics lacp Command Response Messages

Message Meaning





379


[Precautions]• This command clears only the statistics information of LACPDUs. It cannot clear statistics

information of data packets sent/received through each link aggregation group. See [Precautions] in the show link-aggregation statistics command.

• The value of the MIB information acquired using SNMP is not cleared to "0" even if the statistics information is cleared to "0".

• If any deletion or addition is made from/to configuration definition information, the relevant LACPDU statistics information is cleared to "0".

380

restart link-aggregation


[Function]Restart the link aggregation program.

[Input Format]restart link-aggregation [-f] [core-file]

[Parameters]Default

Restarts the Link Aggregation program without outputting a message requesting confirmation.

-f

Restarts the Link Aggregation program without outputting a message requesting confirmation.

core-file

Outputs a core file (LAd.core) of the Link Aggregation program when it is restarted.


[Example]The link aggregation restart result screen is shown below.

Figure 22-12: Link Aggregation Restart> restart link-aggregationlink-aggregation program restart OK? (y/n): y>

Figure 22-13: Link Aggregation Restart (-f parameter specified)> restart link-aggregation -f>

[Influence on User Communication]Data cannot be transmitted and received at a port for which link aggregation has been defined.

[Response Messages]The response messages displayed using the restart link-aggregation command are shown in the table below.

Table 22-9: restart link-aggregation Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• The directory storing the core file and its name is as follows:

Message Meaning

Link aggregation does not seem to be running. The command failed because the link aggregation program is not started.Wait for the restart of the link aggregation program and enter a command again.


381


Storing directory: /primaryMC/var/core/

Core file: LAd.core

Executing the commands overwrites unconditionally the file specified, if it exists already. Therefore back up the file beforehand if required.

382

dump protocols link-aggregation

dump protocols link-aggregation

[Function]Outputs into a file the detailed event-trace information extracted by the Link Aggregation program and the control-table information.

[Input Format]dump protocols link-aggregation

[Parameters]None

Outputs detail event trace information and control table information to a file.


[Example]Shown below is a screen of the results of the command execution instructing the user to dump the link aggregation.

Figure 22-14: Instruction to Dump Link Aggregation> dump protocols link-aggregation>


[Response Messages]The response messages displayed using the dump protocols link-aggregation command are shown in the table below.

Table 22-10: dump protocols link-aggregation Command Response Messages

[Precautions]• The directory storing the output file and its name is as follows:

Storing directory: /primaryMC/var/LA/

File: LAd_dump.gz

Executing the commands overwrites unconditionally the file specified, if it exists already. Therefore back up the file beforehand if required.

Message Meaning


Connection failed to link-aggregation. Communication with the Link Aggregation program failed. Input the command again. If failure occurs often, restart the Link Aggregation program using the "restart link-aggregation" command.


383

Chapter

23. All Interfaces

show interfaces (Display of all interface information)

385



[Function]Displays all interface information defined as an IP interface.

[Input Format]show interfaces

[Parameters]None


[Example] [Display Explanation]The display contents when all interface information items are displayed are the same as the result of execution by line type designation. For each display item and its contents, see "show interfaces" for each line type.


[Response Messages]Table 23-1: show interfaces (display of all interface information) Command Response Messages

[Precautions]None

Message Explanation


No configuration interface . An interface is not defined.


386

Index

Aadduser 28

Ccat 99cd 93chmod 111clear control-counter 134clear counters (ethernet) 338clear counters nif (Ethernet) 180clear counters system 133clear counters(Tag-VLAN linkage) 345clear cp buffer 214clear link-aggregation statistics lacp 379clear logging 190clear mode 266clear password 35clear report-email 198clear sflow statistics 311clear trace (CP) 228clear trace frame 233clear trace report-email 203clear vlan statistics (Tag-Vlan Linkage) 347close (ethernet) 348close nif 182close pru 172close rmEthernet 141close standby 256configure(configure terminal) 23copy backup-config 90copy mc 74copy running-config 86copy startup-config 88cp 100

Ddebug trace (CP) 226debug trace frame 231delete 105df 220diff 116dir 96disable 19du 221dump cp 240dump nif 246dump protocols link-aggregation 383dump pru 243dump sflow 313

Eenable 18end 25erase dumpfile 250erase startup-config 92exit 21

Fformat mc 76free (ethernet) 350free nif 184free pru 174free rmEthernet 142free standby 258ftp 54ftpbackup 65ftprestore 67

Ggrep (egrep,fgrep) 117

Hhexdump 123

Kkilluser 39

Lless 119logout 22ls 95

Mmkdir 101more 118mv 102

Nno debug trace (CP) 227no debug trace frame 232no test interfaces (ethernet) 356no test interfaces rmEthernet 145

Ppassword 32ppupdate 63pwd 94

387

Index

Qquit 20

Rrdate 273reload 138restart link-aggregation 381restart ntp 277restart sflow 312rlogin 52rm 103rmdir 104rmuser 30

Sset calendar 271set dump 248set exec-timeout 43set logging console 192set mc disable 80set mc enable 81set mode 262set register 236set report-email 199set terminal command-literal 44set terminal help 45set terminal pager 46set terminal warning-level 42show calendar 270show cp buffer 212show cp cpu 209show dump status 249show dumpfile 252show history 47show interfaces (Display of all interface information) 386show interfaces (Ethernet) 316show link-aggregation 364show link-aggregation statistics 374show logging 188show logging console 191show mc 78show memory 218show mode 260show nif (Ethernet) 175show ntp status 275show power-supply 135show processes 215show pru resources 168show register 234show report-email 196show rm cpu 206show running-config (show configuration) 84show sessions 37show sflow 308show startup-config 85

show system 126show tcpdump (tcpdump) 151show tech-support 146show trace (CP) 224show trace frame 229show trace report-email 201show version 60show vlan (Tag-VLAN Linkage) 340show vlans (Tag-VLAN Linkage) 343show warning 193show whoami 38snmp get 281snmp getarp 291snmp getforward 293snmp getif 287snmp getnext 283snmp getroute 289snmp lookup 280snmp rget 296snmp rgetarp 304snmp rgetnext 298snmp rgetroute 302snmp rwalk 300snmp walk 285sort 121squeeze 109stty 48swap bcu 267synchronize 69

Ttail 122telnet 50test interfaces (ethernet) 352test interfaces rmEthernet 143test report-email 200ttcp 161

Uundelete 107

Vvi 120

Zzmodem 112

388

Operation Commands, Vol. 1 Ver. 08-03 compatible

Documents

Transcript of Operation Commands, Vol. 1 Ver. 08-03 compatible